WO1994021081A2 - Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling - Google Patents

Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1994021081A2
WO1994021081A2 PCT/US1994/001984 US9401984W WO9421081A2 WO 1994021081 A2 WO1994021081 A2 WO 1994021081A2 US 9401984 W US9401984 W US 9401984W WO 9421081 A2 WO9421081 A2 WO 9421081A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
die
data
remote control
vcr
code
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1994/001984
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO1994021081A3 (en
Inventor
Roy J. Mankovitz
Original Assignee
Mankovitz Roy J
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Mankovitz Roy J filed Critical Mankovitz Roy J
Priority to JP52005294A priority Critical patent/JP4472786B2/en
Priority to EP94910749A priority patent/EP0688488A1/en
Priority to AU63528/94A priority patent/AU6352894A/en
Publication of WO1994021081A2 publication Critical patent/WO1994021081A2/en
Publication of WO1994021081A3 publication Critical patent/WO1994021081A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/76Television signal recording
    • H04N5/765Interface circuits between an apparatus for recording and another apparatus
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N5/00Details of television systems
    • H04N5/76Television signal recording
    • H04N5/78Television signal recording using magnetic recording
    • H04N5/782Television signal recording using magnetic recording on tape

Definitions

  • This invention relates generally to video cassette recorder systems and particularly to an apparatus and method for using encoded information to shorten the time required to perform timer preprogramming and for remotely controlling various home electronic devices and for easily performing an initial setup routine of such an apparatus.
  • the video cassette recorder has a number of uses, including playing back of tapes filmed by a video camera, playing back of pre-recorded tapes, and recording and playing back of broadcast and cable television programs.
  • CDTL information can be programmed in various ways including: (i) pushing an appropriate sequence of keys in the console according to instructions contained in the user's manual, (ii) pushing an appropriate sequence of keys in a remote
  • a principal feature of the invention is providing an improved system for the selection and entering of channel, date, time and length (CDTL) information required for timer preprogramming of a VCR which is substantially simpler, faster and less error-prone than present techniques.
  • Another principal feature of the invention is providing televisions having an embedded capability for timer programming control.
  • to program the timer preprogramming feature of a video system mere is an apparatus and method for using encoded video recorder/player timer preprogramming information. The purpose is to significandy reduce die number of keystrokes required to set up die timer preprogramming feature on a VCR. In accordance with this invention it is only necessary for the user to enter a code with 1 to 8 digits or more into the VCR.
  • His can be done either remotely or locally at die VCR.
  • a decoding means Built into either the remote controller or d e VCR is a decoding means which automatically converts the code into the proper CDTL programming information and activates the VCR to record a given television program with the corresponding channel, date, time and length.
  • multiple codes can be entered at one time for multiple program selections.
  • the code can be printed in a television program guide in advance and selected for use with a VCR or remote controller with the decoding means.
  • This instant programmer sold under die VCRPlus+* trademark, consists of a handheld unit into which compressed codes (each 1 to 8 digits long) for television programs to be recorded are entered.
  • the compressed codes are most commonly found in printed television listings.
  • the instant programmer decodes die compressed codes into channel, date, time-of-day and length commands which are then stored in the programmer's memory.
  • date and time of the program in the memory that is scheduled die nearest to the current time coincides with d e current time, as determined by an internal clock
  • the instant programmer using an infrared transmitter and universal remote technology, sends infrared remote control signals to a cable box or a video recorder to change die channel to the correct channel and infrared remote control signals to a video recorder to turn die recorder on and begin recording.
  • an infrared remote control signal to stop recording is sent to die video recorder.
  • the user Before the VCRPlus+ programmer can be used, the user must perform an initial setup procedure. This procedure includes entering the brands and models of die user's video recorder and cable box into e programmer, setting the clock in the programmer, and entering a local channel map which maps "national" channel numbers for certain networks and cable channels into the actual channel numbers used for these channel by die user's cable system.
  • the instant programmer is manufactured with the infrared codes necessary to remotely control a wide variety of cable boxes and video recorders stored in ROM.
  • the model and brands of die cable box and video recorder must be entered so that the instant programmer will use die correct ones of the infrared codes stored in ROM for the user's particular video recorder and cable box.
  • die decoder, memory and infrared transmitter of me instant programmer are embedded in a video recorder.
  • the 1 to 8 digit compressed codes are entered direcdy into the video recorder, eidier through keys o ⁇ the video recorder or through a remote for the video recorder.
  • the compressed codes are decoded by die video recorder into channel, date, time-of-day and length commands and stored into the video recorder's memory.
  • die video recorder transmits, using its infrared transmitter and universal remote technology, infrared remote control signals to a cable box that change the channel tuned by die cable box to the desired channel.
  • the video recorder then internally signals itself to begin recording the television signal received from the now correctly tuned cable box.
  • the video recorder When the length, stored in memory, has elapsed, the video recorder turns itself off.
  • the present invention includes an improvement to the video recorder with a built in instant programmer and remote control transmitter.
  • the invention involves downloading data over telephone lines from a remote site to the video recorder.
  • the information downloaded is initial setup data that otherwise would have to be manually keyed in by the user. Instead, die user can call a customer service representative on the telephone and orally give d e representative the information necessary to perform the initial setup. The representative then enters the necessary information into a computer which, in turn, downloads die data over d e telephone line to the video recorder which has been connected to die telephone line.
  • die video recorder is connected to die telephone line by a modular phone jack in the video recorder or through the telephone's earpiece which is held in the proximity a microphone connected to the video recorder.
  • data is downloaded first over a telephone line into a VCR remote control, instead of into me video recorder direcdy, in any of the ways that the data can be transmitted to the video recorder. Thereafter, die data is retransmitted from the VCR remote control to the video recorder through infrared remote control signals transmitted by the VCR remote and received by d e video recorder.
  • the initial setup data is transferred and stored into the video recorder without d e user having to key the information manually.
  • Another principal object of the invention is to embed the decoding means into a television.
  • the television would then at the appropriate time distribute die proper commands to a VCR and a cable box to record d e desired program.
  • the user would use die television remote or controls on die television to enter the code that signifies the program to be recorded.
  • the same television remote and controls on the television would also be used to perform normal television control functions, such as channel selection.
  • the codes When the codes are entered they are transmitted to die television and die decoder in the television, which decodes d e codes into CDTL information and then the codes diemselves and die CDTL information could be displayed "on screen" so that die user can verify that the proper codes have been entered. Then at die appropriate time the television would transmit the proper commands to a VCR and a cable box, if necessary, to command e recording of the selected program.
  • This control function can be carried out by using an infrared link by placing infrared transmitters on the television cabinet, preferably at me corners.
  • the television circuitry would include d e capability of storing or learning the infrared code protocols for the VCR and die cable box.
  • Another principal object of the invention is to embed d e decoding means into various equipments associated witii television, such as a video cassette recorder, cable box or satellite receiver.
  • the decoding means would only have to be present in one of the equipments, such as the cable box, which would tiien at the appropriate time distribute the proper commands to the otiier equipments such as a VCR and a satellite receiver to record die desired program.
  • the user would use die television remote or controls on the equipment with die decoder to enter the code that signifies the program to be recorded.
  • the same television remote would also be used to perform normal television control functions, such as channel selection.
  • die codes are entered they are transmitted to e equipment with d e decoder, which decodes die codes into CDTL information.
  • the equipment with die decoder would transmit the proper commands to a die otiier equipment such as a VCR, satellite receiver and a cable box to command die recording of the selected program.
  • This control function can be carried out by using an infrared link by coupling infrared transmitters on the equipment with die decoder.
  • the infrared transmitter can be placed in a infrared dome on me equipment, mounted behind die front panel, attached to a mouse coupled via a cable to the equipment with the decoder with die mouse placed near die receiver, or attached to a stick on miniature mouse coupled via a cable to the equipment with the decoder witii die miniature mouse attached to the device with die receiver.
  • the equipment with die decoder would include e capability of storing or learning die infrared code protocols for the other equipment, such as a VCR, satellite receiver and a cable box.
  • Another embodiment of die invention includes a full function universal remote control capable of controlling various home electronic devices.
  • the functions of die buttons of the remote control and the infrared codes needed to perform the functions are programmed remotely, such as by transmissions over telephone lines received by a microphone in the remote control.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic showing apparatus according to this invention with the code decoder means embedded in die video cassette recorder;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic of die VCR embedded processors for command control and code decoding
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic showing a preferred embodiment according to is invention with the code decoder means embedded in a remote controller;
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic of the processor embedded in the remote controller
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic of a universal remote controller with the code decoder means embedded in die universal remote controller;
  • FIG. 6 is a flow graph of the G-code decoding technique
  • FIG. 7 is a flow graph of the G-code encoding technique
  • FIG. 8 is an illustration of part of a television calendar according to this invention
  • FIG. 9 is a flow chart for decoding for cable channels
  • FIG. 10 is a flow chart for encoding for cable channels
  • FIG. 11. is a flow graph of die G-code decoding for cable channels including conversion from assigned cable channel number to local cable carrier channel number;
  • FIG. 12 is a means for decoding including a stack memory;
  • FIG. 13 is a flow chart for program entry into stack memory;
  • FIG. 14 is an operation flow chart for sending programs from remote control to main unit VCR;
  • FIG. 15 is a perspective view of an apparatus for using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of me invention.
  • FIG. 16 is a front view of the apparatus of FIG. 15 showing a forward facing light emitting diode
  • FIG. 17 is a perspective view of die apparatus of FIG. 15 placed in a mounting stand;
  • FIG. 17A is a front elevational view of the apparatus of FIG. 15 placed in the mounting stand as shown in FIG. 17;
  • FIG. 18 is a detail of the LCD display of the apparatus of FIG. 15;
  • FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing a manner of placing the apparatus of FIG. 15 relative to a cable box and a VCR;
  • FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a manner of placing the mounting stand with the apparatus of FIG. 15 mounted thereon near a cable box and VCR;
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic showing apparatus for using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of d e invention.
  • FIG. 22 is a detailed schematic showing a preferred embodiment of apparatus implementing the schematic of FIG. 21;
  • FIG. 23 is a flow graph for program entry into the apparatus of FIG. 15;
  • FIG. 24 is a flow graph for review and program cancellation of programs entered into the apparatus of FIG. 15;
  • FIG. 25 is a flow graph for executing recorder preprogramming using compressed codes according to a preferred embodiment of die invention.
  • FIG. 26 is a flow graph for encoding program channel, date, time and length information into decimal compressed codes
  • FIG. 27 is a flow graph for decoding decimal compressed codes into program channel, date, time and length information
  • FIG. 28 is an embodiment of an assigned channel number/local channel number table
  • FIG. 29 block diagram of a system including a television having a G-code decoder
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic of a television having a G-code decoder
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic showing apparatus for a G-code decoder in a television having G-code decoding
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a system including a television having a G-code decoder, a VCR, a cable box and a satellite receiver;
  • FIG. 33 is a block diagram of a system including a VCR having a G-code decoder, a television, a cable box and a satellite receiver;
  • FIG. 34 is a block diagram of a system including a cable box having a G-code decoder, a television, a VCR, and a satellite receiver;
  • FIG. 35 is a block diagram of a system including a satellite receiver having a G-code decoder, a television, a VCR, and a cable box;
  • FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing a cable box placed on top of a VCR having an infrared transmitter behind die front panel which communicates to the cable box infrared receiver via reflection;
  • FIG. 37 is a perspective view showing a cable box placed on top of a VCR having an infrared transmitter inside a infrared dome on the top of die VCR which communicates to the cable box infrared receiver;
  • FIG. 38 is a perspective view of a VCR having an infrared transmitter inside a mouse coupled via a cable to die VCR with die mouse placed near the cable box infrared receiver;
  • FIG. 39 is a perspective view of a VCR having an infrared transmitter inside a miniature mouse coupled via a cable to the VCR with the miniature mouse stuck onto die cable box near die infrared receiver.
  • FIG. 40 is a perspective view of a second apparatus for using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of die invention.
  • FIG. 41 is a bottom view of the apparatus of FIG. 41 showing a microphone hole and two electrical contact holes.
  • FIG. 42 shows the apparatus of FIG. 40 being used in conjunction with a telephone.
  • FIG. 43 is a schematic showing second apparatus for using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of die invention.
  • FIG. 44 is an alternate schematic showing second apparatus for using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 45 is a perspective view of an apparatus for programming remote controls with memories according to a preferred embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 46 is a perspective view of die apparatus of FIG. 45 with die hinged lid in the open position.
  • FIG. 47 is a rear view of the apparatus of FIG. 45 showing telephone and computer input/output ports.
  • FIG. 48 is a bottom view of the apparatus of FIG. 15 showing electrical contact access holes.
  • FIG. 49 is a perspective view of die apparatus of FIG. 45 coupled to an apparatus according to FIG. 15.
  • FIG. 50 is a perspective view of die apparatus of FIG. 45 coupled to an apparatus according to FIG. 40.
  • FIG. 51 is a schematic showing apparatus for programming remote controls with memories according to a preferred embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 52 is a schematic showing die electronic connection between apparatus for programming remote controls witii memories according to a preferred embodiment of the invention and a personal computer.
  • FIG. 53 is a perspective view of a complete universal remote control capable of using con ⁇ ressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of die invention.
  • FIG. 54 is a front view of the apparatus of FIG. 53.
  • FIG. 55 is a side view of die apparatus of FIG. 53 showing a microphone opening and an electrical contact access hole.
  • FIG. 56 is a rear view of the apparatus of FIG. 53.
  • FIG. 57 is a back view of the apparatus of FIG. 53 showing electrical contact access holes.
  • FIG. 58 is a block schematic of an embodiment of die apparatus of FIG. 53.
  • FIG. 59 is a block schematic of an alternative embodiment of the apparatus of
  • FIG. 60 is a flow chart of the process of remotely programming the apparatus of
  • FIG. 53 over telephone lines.
  • FIG. 61 shows the apparatus of FIG. 53 in its upright position, resting on a coffee table on the apparatus' rear surface.
  • FIG. 62 is a cross sectional view taken along line 7-7 of FIG. 53.
  • FIG. 63 is a cross sectional view taken along line 8-8 of FIG. 53.
  • FIG. 64 is a cross sectional view taken along line 9-9 of FIG. 53.
  • FIG. 65 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the remote control of FIG. 53.
  • FIG. 66 is a top view of the remote control of FIG. 65.
  • FIG. 67 is a side view of die remote control of FIG. 65.
  • FIG. 68 is a front view of the remote control of FIG. 65.
  • FIG. 69 is a rear view of the remote control of FIG. 65.
  • FIG. 70 is a bottom view of the remote control of FIG. 65.
  • FIG. 71 is a perspective view of a second alternative embodiment of the remote control of FIG. 53.
  • FIG. 72 is a top view of die remote control of FIG. 71.
  • FIG. 73 is a side view of die remote control of FIG. 71.
  • FIG. 74 is a rear view of die remote control of FIG. 71.
  • FIG. 75 is a front view of the remote control of FIG. 71.
  • FIG. 76 is a bottom view of the remote control of FIG. 71.
  • FIG. 77 is a block diagram of a system for downloading initial setup data from a remote site, through a remote control, to a video recorder capable of controlling other devices, according to a preferred embodiment.
  • FIG. 78 is a flow diagram of a method for downloading initial setup data from a remote she, through a remote control, to a video recorder, according to a preferred embodiment.
  • FIG. 79 is a block diagram for an alternative embodiment of the system shown in FIG. 77.
  • FIG. 80 is a block diagram for an alternative embodiment of die system shown in
  • FIG. 77 is a diagrammatic representation of FIG. 77.
  • FIG. 81 is a block diagram for an alternative embodiment of the system shown in FIG. 77.
  • FIG. 82 is a diagram of a system for downloading television program data to a telephone downloadable programmer for control of video recorders and channel selectors.
  • FIG. 83 is a flow diagram showing the operation of die system shown in FIG. 82. Detailed Description
  • the primary components include a remote controller 12 and a video cassette recorder/player witii G-code decoder 14, which can be controlled by remote controller 12 via a command signal 16.
  • the remote controller 12 can have a number of keys, which include numerical keys 20, G-code switch 22, function keys 24, program key 26 and power key 27.
  • the remote controller 12 is essentially the same as any other remote controller in function.
  • the G-code switch 22 is provided just to allow the user to lock die remote controller 12 in the G-code mode while using a G-code, which is the name given to the compressed code which is the encoded CDTL information, to perform timer preprogramming.
  • a G-code consists of 1 to 7 digits, although more could be used, and is associated with a particular program.
  • a user would look up die G-code in a program guide and just enter the G-code on die remote controller 12, instead of die present state of the art, which requires that the user enter the actual channel, date, time and length (CDTL) commands.
  • the first program (PROG) key 26 enters the programming mode. Then a sequence of numerical keys 20 are pushed. The 2 means it is timer recording rather than time setting. The 1 means the user is now entering the settings for program 1. The 15 is the date. The
  • 08 00 2 is the stopping time.
  • the 04 is channel number.
  • the PROG is hit again to exit the program mode.
  • this command could have been "coded” and entered in a typical G-code sequence as follows: PROG 1138 PROG.
  • die G-code switch 22 should be turned to the "ON" position. Instead of having a switch, a separate key “G” can be used.
  • the G-code programming keystroke sequence would then be: G 1138 PROG.
  • a video cassette recorder/player with G-code decoder 14 is provided to be used in conjunction with remote controller 12.
  • the command signal 16 sent from the remote controller 12 is sensed by the photodiode 32 and converted to electrical signals by command signal receiver 30.
  • the electrical signals are sent to a command controller 36, which interprets the commands and determines how to respond to die commands.
  • the command controller 36 it is also possible for the command controller 36 to receive commands from the manual controls 34 that are normally built into a VCR. If the command controller 36 determines that a G-code was received then the G-code will be sent to the
  • the G-code decoder 38 for decoding.
  • the G-code decoder 38 converts the G-code into CDTL information, which is used by die command controller 36 to set the time/channel programming 40.
  • a clock 42 Built into the VCR is a clock 42. This is normally provided in a VCR and is used to keep track of the date and time.
  • the clock 42 is used primarily by the time channel programming 40 and the G-code decoder 38 functions.
  • the time/channel programming 40 function is set up with CDTL information by the command controller 36.
  • the time/channel programming 40 function turns die record/playback 44 function "ON" to record.
  • the tuner 46 is tuned to die proper channel in the television signal 18. Later die user can command die record/playback 44 function to a playback mode to watch the program via the television monitor 48.
  • An alternate way to control the recorder is to have the command controller 36 keep all die CDTL information instead of sending it to die time/channel programming 40.
  • the command controller would also keep track of the time by periodically reading clock 42.
  • the command controller would then send commands to die time/channel programming 40 to turn on and off the recorder and to tuna 46 to cause it to tune to the right channel at the right time according to the CDTL information.
  • the clock 42 is also an input to G-code decoder 38, which allows the G-code decoding to be a function of the clock, which lends a measure of security to the decoding technique and makes it harder to copy. Of course this requires that the encoding technique must also be a function of the clock.
  • a possible realization of the command controller 36 and die G-code decoder 38 is shown in FIG. 2.
  • the command controller 36 function can be realized with a microprocessor 50, a random access memory 52 and a read only memory 54, which is used for program storage.
  • the input/output 56 function is adapted to receive commands from the command signal receiver 30, the manual controls 34 and die clock 42, and to output signals to a display 35, the clock 42, and die time/channel programming 40 function. If die microprocessor 50 interprets that a G-code has been received, then the G-code is sent to microcontroller 60 for decoding.
  • the microcontroller 60 has an embedded random access memory 62 and an embedded read only memory 64 for program and table storage.
  • the clock 42 can be read by both microprocessor 50 and microcontroller 60.
  • FIGS. 1 and 2 are well known in the prior art and are present in the following patents: Fields, Patent No. 4,481,412; Scholz, Patent No. 4,519,003; and Brugliera, Patent No. 4,631,601.
  • clock 42 is analogous to element 7 in Scholz and dement 17 in Brugliera.
  • Other analogous elements are: command signal receiver 30 and Scholz 14 and Brugliera 12; tuner 46 and Scholz 6 and Brugliera 10; time channel programming 40 and Scholz 8, 11 and Brugliera 16; record & playback 44 and Scholz 1,
  • command controller 36 and Scholz 11, 10 and Brugliera 12 microprocessor 50 and Fields 27; RAM 52 and Fields 34; ROM 54 and Fields 33; manual controls 34 and Scholz 15, 16; and remote controller 12 and Scholz 26 and Brugliera 18.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates an alternate preferred embodiment of this invention.
  • a remote controller witii embedded G-code decoder 80 is provided.
  • the remote controller with embedded G-code decoder 80 is very similar to remote controller 12, except for the addition of die G-code decoder 82. Note that it is also possible in any remote controller to provide a display 84.
  • the remote controller with embedded G-code decoder 80 would be used in conjunction with a normal video cassette recorder/player 70, which would not be required to have an embedded G-code decoder.
  • the numerals for the subelements of video cassette recorder/player 70 are die same as described above for the video cassette recorder/player with G-code decoder 14 and have the same function, except for die absence of G-code decoder 38.
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a possible realization of die G-code decoder 82 built into die remote controller with embedded G-code decoder 80.
  • a microcontroller 60 can be used as before to decode die G-code, as well as interface with die display 84, a clock 85, the keypad 88 and die light emitting diode 28. Alternately, other hardware implementations can be used to perform the G-code decoding.
  • the clock 85 is provided in the remote controller 80 so that the G-code decoder 82 can be made to have die clock 85 as one of its inputs. This allows the G-code decoding to be a function of die clock 85, which lends a measure of security to the decoding technique and makes it harder to copy.
  • the remote controller with embedded G-code decoder as described above would send channel, date, time and length information to die video cassette recorder/player 70, which would use die CDTL information for tuning into the correct channel and starting and stopping the recording function.
  • the remote controller may have to be unique for each different video cassette recorder/player, because each brand or model may have different infrared pulses for each type of information sent such as the channel number keys and start record and stop record keys.
  • the particular infrared pulses used for each key type can be called the vocabulary of die particular remote controller.
  • Each model may also have a different protocol or order of keys that need to be pushed to accomplish a function such as timer preprogramming. The protocol or order of keys to accomplish a function can be called sentence structure.
  • die proper vocabulary and sentence structure can be built directly into die remote controller.
  • die remote controller not only performs the G-code decoding to CDTL, but also keeps track of time via clock 85, then it is possible for the remote controller to send just channel, start record and stop commands to die video cassette recorder/player.
  • the channel, start and stop are usually basic one or two key commands, which means there is no complicated protocol or sentence structure involved.
  • the remote controller such as ROM 64 of FIG. 4, for storing the protocol for all die models or at least a large subset.
  • Another preferred embodiment is to provide a universal remote controller 90 with an embedded G-code decoder.
  • Universal remote controllers provide the capability to mimic a number of different remote controllers. This reduces die number of remote controllers that a user needs to have. This is accomplished by having a learn function key 94 function on die universal remote controller, as shown in FIG. 5. If die learn function key 94 is pushed in conjunction with another key, the unit will enter into the learn mode. Incoming infrared (IR) pulses from the remote controller to be learned are detected by die infrared photodiode 96, filtered and wave-shaped into recognizable bit patterns before being recorded by a microcontroller into a battery-backed static RAM as the particular IR pulse pattern for that particular key. This is done for all the individual keys.
  • IR infrared
  • die microcontroller should recognize it is now in the execute mode. If me key is one of die direct command keys, die microcontroller will read back from its static RAM die stored pulse sequence and send out command words through die output paralld I/O to pulse the output light emitting diode 28. If the key is the PROG key and the G-code switch is "OFF", then the microcontroller should recognize the following keys up to die next PROG key as a timer preprogramming CDTL command and send it out through die light emitting diode 28. If die G-code switch 22 is set to "ON" and die program key 26 is pushed, die microcontroller should recognize the following keys up to die next PROG key as a G-code command for timer preprogramming. It will decode die G-code into channd, date, start time and length
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a possible realization of the G-code decoder 92 that could be built into the universal remote controller with embedded G-code decoder 90.
  • a microcontroller 60 can be used as before to decode the G-code, as well as for interfacing with die input/output functions including die photodiode 96. Alternately, the G-code decoding can be performed with other hardware implementations.
  • the universal remote controller can also be used in another manner to simplify the interfacing problem with existing video cassette recorder/players.
  • die universal remote controller performs not only the G-code decoding to CDTL, but also keeps track of time via clock 85 in FIG. 4, then it is possible for die universal remote controller to send just channel, start record and stop commands to die video cassette recorder/player, which as explained before, are usually basic one key commands, which means there is no complicated protocol or sentence structure involved.
  • the universal remote controller to "learn" each key of the remote controller it is replacing.
  • the G-code would be entered on die universal remote controller as before and decoded into channel, date, time and length information, which would be stored in die universal remote controller. Via clock 85, the time would be checked and when die correct time arrives the universal remote controller would automatically send out commands to the VCR unit for tuning to the correct channel and for starting and stopping the recording. It would be necessary to position the universal remote controller properly with respect to the VCR unit so that the signals sent by the universal remote are received by the VCR unit.
  • the G-code decoding can be performed. The most obvious way is to just have a large look up table.
  • the G-code would be the index.
  • the present state of the art has about 1 million bits per chip.
  • G-code decoding using a straightforward table look up would require a prohibitively expensive number of chips.
  • FIG. 6 is a flow diagram of a preferred G-code decoding technique.
  • FIG. 7 is the flow chart. Then the G-code decoding technique, which is the reverse of the G-code encoding will be explained.
  • the encoding of die G-codes can be done on any computer and is done prior to preparation of any program guide mat would include G-codes.
  • a channd, date, time and length (CDTL) code 144 is entered in step
  • Step 146 separately reads die priority for the channel, date, time and length in die priority vector storage 122, which can be stored in read only memory 64.
  • the priority vector storage 122 contains four tables: a priority vector C table 124, a priority vector D table 126, a priority vector T table 128 and a priority vector L table 130.
  • the channd priority table is ordered so that the most frequently used channels have a low priority number.
  • An example of the data that is in priority vector C table 124 follows.
  • the dates of a month all have an equal priority, so the low number days in a month and die low number priorities would correspond in the priority vector D table as in the following example.
  • the priority of die start times would be arranged so that prime time would have a low priority number and programs in the dead of the night would have a high priority number.
  • the priority vector T table would contain:
  • An example of die data that is in the priority vector L table 130 is the following:
  • die channd date time length (CDTL) 144 data is 5 10 19.00 1.5, which means channel 5, lOtii day of die month, 7:00 PM, and 1.5 hours in length
  • the C p ,D p ,T F ,L p data 148 which are the result of looking up the priorities for channel, date, time and length in priority tables 124, 126, 128 and 130 of FIG. 7, would be 4 9 1 3.
  • Step 150 converts C-,O T ,T r ,L r data to binary numbers. The number of binary bits in each conversion is determined by die number of combinations involved. Seven bits for C, which can be denoted as C, C 6 C- C Cj C Thread would provide for 128 channels.
  • bit hierarchy key 120 which can be stored in read only memory 64 to reorder the 22 bits.
  • the bit hierarchy key 120 can be any ordering of die 22 bits.
  • the bit hierarchy key might be:
  • the bit hierarchy key is ordered so that programs most likely to be the subject of timer preprogramming would have a low value binary number, which would eliminate keystrokes for timer preprogramming the most popular programs. Since all the date information has equal priority, then the D 5 D 4 D 3 D 2 D, bits are first. Next T, C t L, are used, because for whatever date it is necessary to have a time channd and length and T, C, L, are the most probable in each case due to the ordering of die priority vectors in priority vector storage 122. The next bit in the hierarchy key is determined by die differential probabilities of die various combinations. One must know the probabilities of all the channels, times and lengths for this calculation to be performed. For example, the probability for channels may be:
  • the probabilities for times might be:
  • die probabilities for lengths might be:
  • the probabilities associated with each channel, time and length, as illustrated above, are used to determine die proper ordering. Since the priority vector tables are already ord ⁇ ed by die most popular channd, time, and length, the ord ⁇ in which to select between the various binary bits for one table, for example selecting between the C, C- C 3 C j
  • Cj bits is already known.
  • the C, bit would be selected first because as die lowest ord ⁇ binary bit it would sdect between the first two entries in the channd priority table. Then the Cj bit would be sdected and so on.
  • the T, and L t bits would be used before any of the other time and length bits.
  • a combination of die C tough T criteria L, and D 3 D 4 D, D 2 D, bits should be used first, so that all the information is available for a channd, date, time and length.
  • the D 3 D 4 D, D 2 D, bits are all used because die date bits all have equal priority and all are needed to specify a date even if some of the bits are binary z ⁇ o.
  • the bit hierarchy key could be:
  • bit hierarchy key starts with the least significant bit D die and then is filled in with die highest differential probability bits. This is for the purpose of constructing the most compact codes for popular programs.
  • the next bit is selected in the same way. Which combination is more probable: C- with Ti L,, or T 2 with or C- and -[-,, or L- with C, or Cz and T,.
  • C- with Ti L, or T 2 with or C- and -[-,, or L- with C, or Cz and T,.
  • T 2 is selected as the next bit in the bit hi ⁇ archy key. This procedure is repeated for all die differential probabilities until the entire key is found.
  • die bit hierarchy key can be just some arbitrary sequence of the bits. It is also possible to make the priority vectors interdependent, such as making the leng h priority vector dependent on different groups of channels. Another technique is to make the bit hi ⁇ archy key 120 and the priority vector tables 122, a function of clock 42, as shown in FIG. 7. This makes it very difficult for die key and therefore the coding technique to be duplicated or copied. For example it is possible to scramble the date bits in the bit hierarchy key 120 as a function of the clock. Changing the order of the bits as a function of the clock would not change the effectiveness of die bit hi ⁇ archy key in reducing the number of binary bits for the most popular programs, because the date bits all are of equal priority. This could be as simple as switching the D, and D 3 bits periodically, such as every day or week. Thus the bit hierarchy key 120 would switch between
  • the priority vector tables could also be scrambled as a function of the clock. For example, the first two channds in the priority channd table could just be swapped periodically. If this technique is followed, then the C, of 148 in FIG. 7 would change as a function of die clock 42. For example,
  • die bit hi ⁇ archy key 120 is determined and stored.
  • step 154 the binary bits of C r ,D p ,T p ,L are rearranged according to die bit hierarchy key 120 to create one 22 bit binary numb ⁇ .
  • die resulting 22 bit binary numb ⁇ is converted to decimal in the convert binary number to decimal G-code step 156.
  • G-code 158 If the priority vector and die bit hierarchy key are well matched to die viewing habits of the general population, then it is expected that the more popular programs would require no more than 3 or 4 digits for die G-code.
  • die decoding technique is just reversing the coding technique. This is done according to the flow chart of FIG. 6. This is the preferred G-code decoding that can be built into G-code decoder 38 in VCR 14 or the remote controller G-code decoders 82 and 92 in FIGS. 3 and 5.
  • the first step 102 is to ent ⁇ G-code 104.
  • the G-code 104 is converted to a 22 bit binary numb ⁇ in step 106.
  • the bits are reord ⁇ ed in step 108 according to the bit hierarchy key 120 to obtain the reord ⁇ ed bits 110.
  • the bits are grouped togedier and converted to decimal form in step 112.
  • C ⁇ D ⁇ T ⁇ L, data 114 which are the indices to the priority vector tables.
  • This C r , ⁇ r . ⁇ r ,L r data 114 is then used in step 116 to look up channd, date, time, and length in priority vector storage 122.
  • the CDTL 118 for the example above is 5 10 19.00 1.5, which means channd 5, 10th day of die month, 7:00 PM, and 1.5 hours in length.
  • die coding technique is a function of die clock men it is also necessary to make the decoding technique a function of die clock. It is possible to make the bit hierarchy key 120 and die priority vector tables 122, a function of clock 42, as shown in FIG. 6. This again makes it very difficult for the key and th ⁇ efore the coding technique to be duplicated or copied. It is also possible to have die decoding and encoding techniques dependent on any other predetermined or preprogrammable algorithm.
  • a mixed radix numb ⁇ system can avoid this result.
  • a mixed radix numb ⁇ system with die factors of 7 1 and 5° can represent 35 combinations without any empty space in the code.
  • the allowed numbers for the 7' factor are 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4.
  • the allowed numbers for the 5° factor are 0, 1, 2, 3,
  • digital 0 is represented in the mixed radix number system as 00.
  • the major advantage of a mixed radix number system is in prioritizing the hi ⁇ archy key. If the first 5 channels have about equal priority and the next 30 are also about equal, then the mixed radix numb ⁇ system allows the two tiers to be accurately represented. This is not to say that a mixed radix number system is necessarily preferable.
  • Binary numbers are easi ⁇ to represent in a computer and use of a fixed radix number system such as binary numbers allows a pyramid of prioritization to be easily represented in the hierarchy key.
  • Anoth ⁇ feature that is desirable in all of the embodiments is the capability to key in the G-code once for a program and then have die resulting CDTL information used daily or weekly. Ordinarily die CDTL information is discarded once it is used. In the case of daily or weekly recording of die same program, the CDTL information is stored and used until it is cancelled.
  • the desire to repeat the program daily or weekly can be performed by having a "WEEKLY” or "DAILY" button on die remote controll ⁇ or built into the VCR manual controls.
  • Anoth ⁇ way is to use one key, such as the PROG key and push it multiple times within a certain period of time such as twice to specify daily or thrice to specify weekly. For example, if the G-code switch is "ON" and die G-code for die desired program is 99 then daily recording of the program can be selected by the following keystrokes:
  • the G-code 99 would be converted to CDTL information, which would be stored and used daily in this case.
  • the recording would begin on the date specified and continue daily after that using die same channd time and length information. A slight twist is that daily recording could be automatically suspended during the weekends, because most daily programs are diff ⁇ ent on Saturday and Sunday.
  • CDTL daily or weekly entry
  • a television calendar 200 according to this invention is illustrated in FIG. 8.
  • the television calendar has multiple day of year sections 202, multiple day sections 204, multiple time of day sections 206, channd identifiers 208, and descriptive program identifiers 210, including the name of the program, arranged in a mann that is common in television guide publications.
  • a compressed code indication 212 or G-code containing the channel, date, time and length information for that entry in the television calendar.
  • FIG. 8 shows how easy it is to perform timer programming. All one needs to do is find die program one wants to watch and enter die compressed code shown in the compressed code indication.
  • the video cassette record ⁇ apparatus such as the remote controll ⁇ , the VCR unit or both, could then be provided with two (2) extra modes: "set” and "cable channd” .
  • One way of providing the user interface to these modes would be to provide two (2) extra buttons: one called SET and one called CABLE CHANNEL.
  • the buttons could be located on the video cassette recorder unit itself or located on a remote controller, as shown in FIGS. 1, 3 and 5, wh ⁇ e SET is element 168 and CABLE CHANNEL is element 170.
  • FIGS. 1, 3 and 5 wh ⁇ e SET is element 168
  • CABLE CHANNEL is element 170.
  • other user interfaces are possible.
  • This "setting" procedure would relate each of the assigned numbers for each cable channd to the channd number of the local cable carri ⁇ . For example, suppose that the local cable carrier uses channel 6 for ESPN, then cable channd number 1 could be assigned to ESPN, as shown in the following table.
  • the us ⁇ could perform the "setting" procedure by pushing the buttons on his remote controll ⁇ as follows:
  • the "setting" procedure would create a cable channel address table 162, which would be loaded into RAM 52 of command controller 36.
  • the cable channel address table 162 would have die following information.
  • die TV view ⁇ can now sdect cable channds for viewing by the old way: e.g., pushing the key pad buttons 24 will sdect HBO.
  • the advantage of die new way is that the television guide will publish [C2] next to the program description, so die view ⁇ will just look up the assigned channel numb ⁇ identifi ⁇ instead of having to remember mat HBO is local cable channd 24.
  • command controll ⁇ 36 knows that it will look up the local cable channd number in cable channd address table 162 to tune the VCR to the correct channd.
  • a way to differentiate between broadcast and cable channds is to add an eighth channd bit, which would be set to 0 for normal broadcast channds and 1 for cable channds such as HBO.
  • This eighth channd bit could be one of the low ord ⁇ bits such as the third bit C, out of the eight channd bits, so that die number of bits to specify popular channds is minimized, whether they be normal broadcast or cable channels.
  • die 7 oth ⁇ bits can be decoded according to priority vector C table 124.
  • the 7 oth ⁇ bits can be decoded according to a separate cable channd priority vector table 160, which could be stored in ROM 54 of microcontroll ⁇ 36.
  • the cable channd priority vector table can be set ahead of time for the entire country or at least for an area covered by a particular wide area television guide publication.
  • a television guide that carries the compressed code known as the G-code will now print the cable channel information as follows:
  • the (4679) is the G-code indication for this particular program.
  • FIG. 8 shows a section of a television guide.
  • the cable channels all have an assigned cable channd number 188 in front of the cable channd mnemonic. Oth ⁇ than that the cable channd information is arranged die same as the broadcast channels with a compressed G-code 212 associated witii die channel.
  • the view ⁇ need only enter the numb ⁇ 4679 according to the unit ' s G-code entry procedure, e.g., PROG 4679 PROG.
  • the G-code decod ⁇ unit will decode this G-code into "cable channd 2" and will also signal die command controll ⁇ 36 with a cable channd signal 164, as shown in FIGS.
  • die decoding and encoding algorithms are as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, respectivdy.
  • the encoding should be explained first before die decoding.
  • the primary change in FIG. 10 from FIG. 7 is that a cable channel priority vector table 160 has been added and is used in look up priority step 180 if a cable channd is being encoded.
  • a cable channd is being encoded tiien die cable channel bit is added in the correct bit position in the convert CJD.T-L. to binary numbers step 182.
  • This could be bit Ca, as discussed before.
  • the bit hierarchy key could be determined as before to compress the number of bits in the most popular programs; howev ⁇ , it needs to be 23 bits long to accommodate die cable channd bit.
  • the decoding is shown in FIG. 9 and is just the reverse of the encoding process.
  • test cable channel bit 174 is added and effectively tests the cable channel bit to determine if it is a " 1 " . If so then die command controller 36 is signaled via cable channel signal 164 of FIGS. 1 and 2 that the CDTL 118 that will be sent to it from G-code decoder 38 is for a cable channel. Then the command controller knows to look up die local cable carri ⁇ channd numb ⁇ based on die assigned cable channel numb ⁇ . In step 176 of FIG. 9, the priority vector tables including die cable channel priority vector table 160 are used to look up die CDTL 118 information.
  • FIG. 11 shows the implementation of me entire decode algorithm if mis step is included. All that needs to be added is convert assigned channd to local cable carri ⁇ channd step 166, which performs a look up in cable channd address table 162, if the cable channd bit indicates that a cable channd is involved. Step 166 effectivdy replaces step 174 in FIG. 9.
  • Anoth ⁇ issue that needs addressing is the number of programs that can be preprogrammed. Since die G-code greatly simplifies the process of entering programs, it is likely that die user will quickly learn and want to enter a large numb ⁇ of programs; however, some existing VCRs can only store up to four (4) programs, while some can store as many as eight. Thus, die user may get easily frustrated by die programming limitations of the VCR.
  • One approach to this problem is to perform the compressed G-code decoding in the remote controll ⁇ and provide enough memory th ⁇ e to store a large number of programs, e.g., 20 or 40.
  • the remote controll ⁇ would have the capability of transferring periodically several of these stored programs at a time to the VCR main unit.
  • extra memory called stack memory 76 is required inside the remote unit, as shown in FIG. 12, which oth ⁇ than that is identical to FIG. 4.
  • Stack memory 76 can be implemented with a random access memory, which may in fact reside in the microcontroll ⁇ itself, such as RAM 62.
  • the stack memory 76 is wh ⁇ e new entry, insertion & ddetion of timer preprogramming information is carried out. It is also wh ⁇ e editing takes place.
  • the top memory locations of die stack for example the first 4 locations, correspond exactly to the available tirn ⁇ preprogramming memory in the VCR main unit.
  • die new information will be sent ov to the VCR main umt to update it.
  • FIG. 13 shows the sequence of events when the user enters a G-code program on the keypad of die remote controller. For illustration purposes, suppose the VCR main unit can only handle four (4) programs. Suppose also that die stack memory capacity is 20 timer preprograms.
  • the microcontroll ⁇ 60 first decodes it into the CDTL information in step 234 and displays it on die display unit with die additional word "entered” also displayed.
  • the microcontroll ⁇ men enters the decoded program into the stack memory in step 236.
  • the microcontroll ⁇ 60 after doing die temporal ordering, checks in step 242 whether the first n entries have changed from before, wh ⁇ e for die current example n equals 4. In this case, since a new program has been entered into location 3, what used to be in location 3 now moves to location 4. Since the VCR's main unit program menu of 4 entries should correspond exactly to location 1 through 4 of die stack memory, entries 3 and 4 on die VCR main unit must now be revised.
  • the microcontroll ⁇ th ⁇ efore sends out die new entries 3 and 4 to die main unit, in step 244 of FIG. 13.
  • the ddetion is first carried out in the stack memory. If the first 4 entries are affected, the microco ⁇ troll ⁇ will send the revised information ova to die VCR main un . If die first 4 entries are not affected, then again the remote controll ⁇ unit will not send anything. The deletion will only change the low ⁇ part of the stack (low ⁇ meaning location 5 to 20). This new information will be sent over to the VCR main unit at the appropriate time. In the meantime, the VCR main unit will be carrying out its timer programming function, completing its timing preprogramming entries one by one.
  • die stack in the remote must send some new entries over to "replenish" the VCR main unit (if the stack has more than 4 entries).
  • the real time clock 85 in the remote controller unit is monitored by the microcontroll ⁇ to determine when die programs in the main unit have been used up. Referring to the flow chart in FIG. 14, the microcontroll ⁇ periodically checks the clock and die times for die programs at the top of the stack in step 250 (say the first 4 entries), which are identical to the VCR's main unit ' s menu.
  • the display unit will be set to a blinking mode or display a blinking message in step 258 to alert the us ⁇ to send more programs.
  • the blinking will remind him that the VCR main unit's program menu has been completed and it is time to replenish the VCR main umt with program entries stored in the remote.
  • the us ⁇ simply picks up die remote and points it towards die VCR main unit and presses "ENTER". This will "pop" the top of die stack memory in step 260, i.e., pop all the entries in the stack up by four locations.
  • Anoth ⁇ preferred embodiment of an apparatus for using compressed codes for record ⁇ preprogramming is die instant programm ⁇ 300 of FIG. 15.
  • the instant programmer 300 has number keys 302, which are numbered 0 through 9, a CANCEL key 304, a REVIEW key 306, a WEEKLY key 308, a ONCE key 310 and a DAILY (M-F) key 312, which are used to program die instant programm ⁇ 300.
  • a lid normally covers oth ⁇ keys, which are used to setup the instant programm ⁇ 300.
  • instant programm ⁇ 300 When lid 314 is lifted, die following keys are revealed: SAVE key 316, ENTER key 318, CLOCK key 320, CH key 322, ADD TIME key 324, VCR key 326, CABLE key 328, and TEST key 330.
  • Oth ⁇ features of instant programm ⁇ 300 shown on FIG. 15 are: liquid crystal display 350 and red warning light emitting diode 332.
  • the front devation view FIG. 16 of instant programm ⁇ 300 shows front infrared (IR) diode 340 mounted on the front side 338.
  • FIG. 18 shows a detail of die liquid crystal display 350. Certain text 354 is at various times visible on die display and tii ⁇ e is an entry area 356. Time bars 352 are displayed at die bottom of die display and their function is described below.
  • a companion dement to the instant programmer 300 is the mounting stand 360, shown in FIG. 17, which is designed to hold instant programmer 300 between left raised side 362 and right raised side 364. The instant programm ⁇ 300 is slid between left raised side 362 and right raised side 364 until coming to a stop at front alignment flange 365, which is at the front of mounting stand 360 and connected across left raised side 362 and right raised side
  • the mounting stand 360 has an alignment flange 366, which has die purpose of aligning die back edge of mounting stand 360, which is defined as the edge along which alignment flange 366 is located, along die front side of a cable box or VCR, or similar umt as shown in FIG. 20.
  • the mounting stand 360 aligns the instant programm ⁇ 300 so tiiat die left IR diode 342, down IR diode 344, two back IR diodes 346 and right IR diode 348, as shown in FIG. 17, are in position to transmit signals to video cassette record ⁇ 370 and cable box 372, as necessary. If die VCR and/or cable box functions are located within the television 374 itsdf, tiien die instant programm ⁇ 300 could be positioned to transmit to me television 374, eith ⁇ in me mann of FIG. 19 or by placing the mounting stand on top of die television in me manner of FIG. 20.
  • mounting stand 360 By using mounting stand 360, die us ⁇ only need to align die mounting stand 360, and the instant programm ⁇ 300 once with die equipment to be programmed rath ⁇ than having die us ⁇ remember to keep me instant programm ⁇ 300 in the correct location to transmit via front infrared (IR) diode 340, as shown in FIG. 19.
  • IR infrared
  • Current experience with various remote controllers shows that it is difficult at best to keep a remote controll ⁇ in a fixed location, for example, on a coffee table.
  • the mounting stand 360 solves this problem by locating the instant programm ⁇ 300 with die equipment to be controlled.
  • IR diode 344 two back IR diodes 346 and right IR diode 348 are positioned to transmit to the left, downward, backward, and to die right.
  • the downward transmitter assumes that mounting stand 360 will be placed on top of die unit to be programmed.
  • the left and right transmission allows units to die left or right to be programmed.
  • the backward transmission back IR diodes 346 are provided so that signals can bounce off walls and otii ⁇ objects in me room.
  • the front IR diode 340, die left IR diode 342, die right IR diode 348 and die down IR diode 344 are implemented witii 25 degree emitting angle diodes.
  • Two back IR diodes are provided for greater en ⁇ gy in that direction and are implemented witii 5 degree emitting angle diodes, which focus die en ⁇ gy and provide for greater reflection of die IR energy off of walls or objects in die room.
  • VCRs and cable boxes can be controlled by an infrared remote controll ⁇ ; howev ⁇ , different VCRs and cable boxes have diff ⁇ ent IR codes.
  • tii ⁇ e are literally hundreds of different models of VCRs and cable boxes, there are notably only tens of sets of IR codes. Each set may have a few tens of "words” that represent the diff ⁇ ent keys required, e.g., "power”, "record”, “channel up”, “channel down”, “stop”, “0”, "1", “2” etc.
  • words For die purpose of controlling the VCR and cable box to do recording, only the following "words” are required: “0”, “1", “2", “3”, “4", "5", "6", "7”, “8”, “9", "power",
  • the IR codes for these words for all the sets are stored in the memory of the instant programm ⁇ 300, which is located in microcomputer 380 of FIGS. 21 and 22.
  • the us ⁇ interactively inputs to the instant programm ⁇ 300 the type and modd of his VCR and cable box.
  • the correct set of IR codes will be recalled from memory during die actual control process.
  • the infrared (IR) codes for that particular VCR will be recalled to control the VCR.
  • die us ⁇ performs a setup sequence. First, the us ⁇ looks up the numb ⁇ corresponding to die modd/brand of VCR to be programmed in a table, which lists the VCR brand name and a two digit code. Then witii the VCR tuned to Channd 03 or Channd 04, whichever is normally used, die user turns the VCR "OFF". Thai die usa presses the VCR key 326. When die display shows VCR, die user presses die two-digit code looked up in the VCR modd/brand table (for example 01 for RCA). Hie user points the instant programmer 300 at the VCR and then presses ENTER key 318. The red warning light emitting diode 332 will flash while it is sending a test signal to the VCR. If the VCR turned “ON” and changed to Channd 09, me us ⁇ presses the SAVE key 316 and proceeds to die set clock step. If the VCR turned “ON" and changed to Channd 09, me us ⁇ presses the SAVE key 316 and proceeds to die set clock
  • VCR did not turn “ON” or turned “ON” but did not change to Channd 09 the us ⁇ presses ENTER key 318 again and waits until red warning light emitting diode 332 stops flashing.
  • the instant programm ⁇ 300 sends die next possible VCR code, while the red warning light emitting diode 332 is flashing. If the VCR turns "ON” and changed to Channd 09 the us ⁇ presses SAVE key 316, otherwise the us ⁇ presses ENTER key 318 again until the VCR code is found that works for die VCR.
  • the display shows "END” if all possible VCR codes for that brand are tried. If so, die us ⁇ presses VCR key 326 code 00 and then ENTER key 318 to try all possible codes, for all brands, one at a time.
  • die next setup step is to set the dock on instant programm ⁇ 300.
  • the us ⁇ presses the CLOCK key 320.
  • the display shows: "YR:”
  • die user presses the year (for exan ⁇ le 90), then presses ENTER key 318.
  • the display shows "MO:”
  • the us ⁇ presses the month (for example 07 is July), and tiien presses ENTER key 318.
  • This is repeated for "DA:” date (for example 01 for the 1st), "Hr:” hour (for example 02 for 2 o'clock), "Mn:” minute (for example 05 for 5 minutes), and "AM/PM:” 1 for AM or 2 for PM.
  • the display will show "SAVE” for a few seconds and then the display will show the current time and date that have been entered. It is no longer necessary for die user to set the clock on his/her VCR.
  • die setup steps are as follows. First, the number corresponding to die model/brand of cable box (converter) to be controlled is looked up in a cable box model brand table, that lists cable box brands and corresponding two digit codes. The VCR is tuned to Channd 03 or 04 and turned “OFF”. Then the cable box is tuned to Channd 02 or 03, whichev ⁇ is normal, and left "ON”. Then die CABLE key 328 is pressed. When die display shows: "CA B-:” the us ⁇ alters the two digit code looked up in cable box modd brand table, points the instant programmer 300 at the cable box (conv ⁇ ter) and presses ENTER key 318.
  • the red warning light emitting diode 332 will flash while it is sending a test signal to the cable box. If the cable box changed to Channd 09: then die us ⁇ presses SAVE key 316; howev ⁇ , if the cable box did not change to Channd 09 the us ⁇ presses ENTER key 318 again and waits until red warning light emitting diode 332 stops flashing, while the next possible code is sent. This is repeated until me cable box changes to Channd 09 and when it does die us ⁇ presses SAVE key 316. If the display shows "END" then the us ⁇ has tried all possible cable box codes for that brand. If so, the us ⁇ presses cable code 00 and tiien ENTER key 318 to try all possible brand's codes, one at a time.
  • the channels listed in their television guide or calendar are diff ⁇ ent from the channels on their television or cable. If they are different, the us ⁇ proceeds as follows. First, the us ⁇ presses the CH key 322. The display will look like this: "Guide CH TV CH”. Then the user presses the channd printed in the television guide or calendar (for example, press 02 for channel 2), and then die us ⁇ presses the channd numb ⁇ mat die printed channd is received on through his/h local cable company. Then the us ⁇ presses ENTER key 318. This is repeated for each channd listing mat is on a diff ⁇ ent channel than the printed channd. When this procedure is finished die user presses SAVE key 316.
  • die television guide or calendar in the area will have a chart indicating the channd numb ⁇ that has been assigned to each Cable and broadcast channel, for example: HBO, CNN, ABC, CBS, NBC, etc.
  • This chart would correspond, for example, to die left two columns of FIG. 28.
  • the us ⁇ will press the CH button (the two blank spaces under die display "Guide CH” will flash).
  • the user presses 14. (now the two blank spaces under die display "TV CH” will flash).
  • the user presses 18 and then ENTER key 318. This is repeated for each channel that is different.
  • the user presses SAVE key 316 When finished, the user presses SAVE key 316.
  • die user may review die settings by pressing CH key 322 and tiien REVIEW key 306. By repeated pressing of die REVIEW key
  • each of the set channels will scroll onto the display, one at a time.
  • the user can test to make sure that the location of die instant programmer 300 is a good one.
  • the us ⁇ makes sure that the VCR is turned “OFF” but plugged in and makes sure that the cable box (if there is one) is left “ON”.
  • the user can press the TEST key 330. If th ⁇ e is only a VCR, then if the VCR turned "ON", changed to channel
  • the VCR should be left OFF and die cable box ON.
  • the us ⁇ looks up in the television guide die compressed code for die program, which he/she wishes to record.
  • the compressed code 212 is listed in the television guide, as shown in FIG. 8.
  • the television guide/calendar that would be used with this embodiment would have die same elements as shown on FIG. 8 except that element 188 of FIG. 8 is not required.
  • the compressed code 212 for die program selected by die us ⁇ is entered into the instant programm ⁇ 300 by using the numb ⁇ keys 302 and tiien die us ⁇ selects how often to record die program.
  • the us ⁇ presses the ONCE key 310 to record die program once at the scheduled time, or the us ⁇ presses the WEEKLY key 308 to record die program every week at the same scheduled time until cancdled or the user presses the DAILY (M-F) key
  • die instant programm ⁇ 300 will immediately decode die compressed code and display the date, channd and start time of the program entered by the us ⁇ .
  • the length of die entered program is also displayed by time bars 352 that run across die bottom of me display. Each bar represents one hour (or less) of program.
  • the us ⁇ just needs to leave die instant programm ⁇ 300 near die VCR and cable box so that commands can be transmitted, and at die right time, the instant programmer 300 will turn “ON” the VCR, change to the correct channel and record die program and then turn the VCR "OFF".
  • the us ⁇ must just make sure to insert a blank tape.
  • the REVIEW key 306 allows the us ⁇ to step through the entered programs. These are displayed in chronological ord ⁇ , by date and time. Each time the REVIEW key 306 is pressed, the next program is displayed, until "END" is displayed, when all the entered programs have been displayed. If the REVIEW key 306 is pressed again the display will return to the current date and time.
  • die us ⁇ may press the ADD ⁇ ME key 324 to increase the recording length, even while the program is being recorded.
  • the us ⁇ presses die REVIEW key 306 to display die program, then presses ADD ⁇ ME key 324. Each time ADD TIME key 324 is pressed, 15 minutes is added to the recording length.
  • die amount of blank tape needed for the next 24 hours is also displayed by die time bars 352 that run across the bottom of the display. Each bar represents one hour (or less) of tape. The us ⁇ should check this before leaving the
  • VCR unattended to ensure that tii ⁇ e is enough blank tape.
  • the instant programmer 300 Each time a program code is entered, the instant programmer 300 automatically checks through all the entries to ensure that th ⁇ e is no ov ⁇ lap in time between the program entries. If the us ⁇ attempts to enter a program that ov ⁇ laps in time with a program previously entered, then the message "CLASH" appears. Then, as summarized by step 432 of FIG.
  • the us ⁇ has the following options: 1) if die us ⁇ wishes to leave the program previously entered and forget about the new one, die us ⁇ does nothing and after a short time delay, die display will return to show die current time and date; 2) if die user wishes the program which starts first to be recorded to its end, and tiien to record die remainder of the second program, then the us ⁇ presses ONCE key 310, DAILY (M-F) key 312, or WEEKLY key 308 again
  • die program (whichev ⁇ one the user pushed to enter the code). If die programs have the same starting time, then die program most recendy entered will be recorded first. If on being notified of die "CLASH", the us ⁇ decides die new program is more important than die previously entered program, then die user can caned the previously entered program and then re-enter the new one.
  • die cable system airs some channels three (3) hours later/earli ⁇ than the times listed in the local television guide. This is due to time differences depending on whether die channel is received on a east or west satellite feed.
  • die us ⁇ to record die program 3 hours later than the time listed in the television guide die procedure is as follows. First the us ⁇ enters the code for die program and thai presses SAVE key 316 (for +) and then presses ONCE key 310, DAILY (M-F) key 312, or WEEKLY key 308, as desired.
  • SAVE key 316 for +
  • ONCE key 310 for +
  • DAILY (M-F) key 312, or WEEKLY key 308 as desired.
  • die user to record die program 3 hours earlier than the time listed in the television guide die procedure is as follows.
  • the user enters the code for the program and then presses ENTER key 318 (for -) and tiien presses ONCE key 310, DAILY (M-F) key 312, or WEEKLY key 308, as desired.
  • the instant programmer 300 will display die time that the program will be recorded, not die time shown in the television guide.
  • Err: DATE indicates the user may have: tried to sdect a daily recording (Monday to Friday) for a Saturday or Sunday program; tried to select weekly or daily recording for a show more than 7 days ahead, because the instant programm ⁇ 300 only allows the weekly or daily recording option to be used for the current weeks' programs ( ⁇ 7 days); or tried to ent ⁇ a program that has already ended.
  • "FULL” indicates that die stack storage of the programs to be recorded, which is implemented in random access memory (RAM) inside die instant programm ⁇ 300 has been filled. The us ⁇ could tii ⁇ i caned one or more programs before entering new programs.
  • EMPY indicates th ⁇ e are no programs entered to be recorded. The number of programs to be recorded mat can be stored in the instant programm ⁇ 300 varies depending on die density of RAM available and can vary from 10 to more.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic of me circuitry needed to implement die instant programm ⁇ 300.
  • the circuity consists of microcomputer 380, oscillator 382, liquid crystal display 384, key pad 386, five way IR transmitters 390 and red warning light emitting diode 332.
  • the microcomputer 380 consists of a CPU, ROM, RAM, I/O ports, timers, counters and clock.
  • the ROM is used for program storage and die RAM is used among otiier purposes for stack storage of the programs to be recorded.
  • the liquid crystal display 384 is display 350 of FIGS. 15 and 18.
  • the key pad 386 implements all the previously discussed keys.
  • the five way IR transmitters 390 consists of front infrared (ER) diode 340, left IR diode 342, down IR diode 344, two back IR diodes 346 and right IR diode 348.
  • FIG. 22 shows die detailed schematic of die instant programm ⁇ 300 circuitry and previously identified dements are identified by die same numbers.
  • the microcomputer can be implemented with a NEC ⁇ PD7530x part, which can interface directly witii the display, die keypad, the light emitting diodes and die oscillator.
  • the 25 degree IR diodes can be implemented with NEC 313AC parts and die 5 degree IR diodes can be implement witii Litton 2871C IR diodes.
  • FIGS. 23, 24, and 25, The flow charts for the program that is stored in the read only memory (ROM) of the microcomputer 380 mat executes program entry, review and program cancellation, and record execution are illustrated in FIGS. 23, 24, and 25, respectively.
  • the FIG. 23 for program entry, which process was described above, consists of die following steps: display current date, time and time bars step 402, which is the quiescent state of instant programmer 300; scan keyboard to determine if numeric decimal compressed code entered step 404; display code as it is entered step 406; us ⁇ checks if correct code ent ⁇ ed step 408 and user presses CANCEL key 304 step 428; us ⁇ advances or retards start time by three hours by pressing
  • SAVE key 316 or ENTER key 318 step 410 user presses ONCE key 310, WEEKLY key 308 or DAILY key 312 key step 412; microcomputer decodes compressed code into CDTL step 414; test if conflict with stored programs step 416, if so, display "CLASH" message step 420, us ⁇ presses ONCE key 310, WEEKLY key 308 or DAILY key 312 step 422, then accommodate conflicting entries step 432, as described above in die discussion of die
  • CASH options, and entry not saved step 424; set display as date, channd, start time and duration (time bars) for ONCE, or DA, channd, start time and duration for DAILY, or day of week, channd, start time and duration for WEEKLY step 418; user presses ADD ⁇ ME key 324, which adds 15 minutes to record time step 426; us ⁇ checks display step 430; enter program on stack in chronological ord ⁇ step 434 wh ⁇ ein die stack is a portion of die RAM of microcontroll ⁇ 380; and calculate length of tape required and update time bars step 436.
  • FIG. 24 flow chart for review and cancdlation which process was described above, consists of the following steps: display current date, time and time bars step 402;
  • FIG. 25 flow chart for record execution which is die process of automatically recording a program and which was described above, consists of the following steps: compare start time of top program in stack memory with current time step 472; test if three minutes before start time of program step 474; start red warning LED 332 blinking for 30 seconds step 476; display channd, start time and blinking "START" message step 478, is correct start time reached step 480 and send pow ⁇ ON signal to VCR and display "REC" message step 482; test if a cable box is input to VCR step 484, send channd switching signals to VCR step 486 and send channd switching signals to cable box step 488; send record signals to VCR step 490; compare stop time with current time step 492, test if stop time reached step 494 and display "END” message step 496; send stop signals to VCR step 498; send power OFF signal to VCR step 500; and pop program stack step 502.
  • FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the method for encoding channel, date, time and length
  • CDTL decimal compressed code 510.
  • This process is done "off-line” and can be implemented on a general purpose computer and is done to obtain die compressed codes 212 that are included in the program guide or calendar of FIG. 8.
  • the first step in the encoding method is the enter channel, date, time and length (CDTL) step 512 wherein for a particular program the channd, date, start time and length CDTL 514 of the program are entered.
  • the next step is the look up assigned channd number step 516, which substimtes an assigned channel numb ⁇ 522 for each channel 518.
  • die assigned channd numb ⁇ is die same; howev ⁇ , for a cable channd such as HBO a channd numb ⁇ is assigned and is looked up in a cable assigned channd table 520, which would essentially be the same as the first two columns of the table of FIG. 28.
  • the look up priority of channd, date and time/length in priority vector tables step 524 performs a look up in priority vector channd (C) table 526, priority vector date (D) table 528 and priority vector time/length (TL) table 530 using die indices of channd, date and time/length, respectivdy, to produce the vector C,, D r , TL, 532.
  • C priority vector channd
  • D priority vector date
  • TL priority vector time/length
  • the use of a combined time/length (TL) table to set priorities recognizes that th ⁇ e is a direct rdationship between these combinations and die popularity of a program. For example, at 6:30 PM, a short program is more likely to be popular than a 2 hour program, because it may be the dinn ⁇ hour.
  • the channd priority table is ord ⁇ ed so that die most frequently used channels have a low priority number.
  • An example of the data diat is in the priority vector C table 526 follows.
  • the dates of a month all have an equal priority or equal usage, so the low number days in a month and die low numb ⁇ priorities would correspond in the priority vector D table 528 as in the following example.
  • the priority of die start times and length of the programs could be arranged in a matrix that would assign a priority to each combination of start times and program lengths so that more popular combinations of start time and length would have a low priority number 1 and less popular combinations would have a high priority number.
  • a partial priority vector T/L table 530 might appear as follows.
  • the C,,D r ,ll-, data 532 for the above example would be 4 9 19.
  • the next step is the convert C,, D p , TL-, to binary numbers and concatenate them into one binary numb ⁇ step 534, resulting in the data word j5 ...TL 2 TL,...C 2 C,...D 2 D 1 536.
  • ...TL 2 TL 1 ...C 2 C,...D 2 Dj 536 word to binary would yield the three binary numbers: ...0010011, ...0100, ...01001.
  • the number of binary bits to use in each conversion is determined by die numb ⁇ of combinations involved. This could vary depending on die implementation; howev ⁇ one preferred embodiment would use eight bits for C,, denoted as 0 C, C, C 6 Cj C Cj Cj C combat which would provide for 256 channels, five bits for D, which can be denoted as D 3 D D 3 D 2 D discomfort would provide for 31 days in a month, and fourteen bits for TL ⁇ , denoted as TL, 4 ...
  • TL, TLj TL which would provide for start times spaced every 5 minutes ova 24 hours and program lengths in increments of 5 minute lengths for programs up to 3 hours in length and program length in increments of 15 minute lengths for programs 5 from 3 to 8 hours in length.
  • padding each number with zeros and then concatenating them would yield die 27 bit binary number: 000000000100110000010001001.
  • bit hierarchy key 540 which can be stored in read only memory 64 to perform the reord ⁇ bits of binary number according to bit hierarchy key step 538.
  • a bit hierarchy key 540 can be any ordering of die ...TL 2 TL,...C 2 C,...D 2 D 1 536 bits and in general will be selected so that programs most likely to be the subject of tim ⁇ preprogramming would have a low value compressed code 212, 5 which would minimize keystrokes.
  • the ord ⁇ ing of the bit hi ⁇ archy key can be determined by die differential probabilities of die various bit combinations as previously discussed.
  • the details of deriving a bit hi ⁇ archy key 540 w ⁇ e described relative to bit hierarchy key 120 and die same method can be used for bit hierarchy key 540.
  • the bit hierarchy key might be:
  • the next step is the combine groups of bits and convert each group into decimal numbers and concatenate into one decimal numb ⁇ step 542.
  • die code may be 000000001010010000010001001, which could be grouped as 00000000101001000,0010001001. If these groups of binary bits are converted to decimal as 328, 137 and concatenated into one decimal numb ⁇ , then die resulting decimal numb ⁇ is 328137.
  • the last encoding step is the permute decimal numb ⁇ step 546, which permutes the decimal numb ⁇ according to permutation function 544 that is dependent on die date 548 and in particular die montii and year and provides a security feature for the codes.
  • the decimal compressed code G,...G 2 G* 550 may, for example, be 238731.
  • FIG. 27 is a flow chart of die method for decoding a decimal compressed code into channel, date, time and length 560, which is step 414 of FIG. 23.
  • the first step is die extract day code step 566, which extracts the day code for die program in e decimal compressed code and passes the day code to step 568, which also receives the current day 574 from me clock 576, which is implemented by microcomputer 380 in FIGS. 21 and 22.
  • the clock 576 also sends die current month and year to die permutation function 570, which is dependent on die month and year.
  • step 568 performs the function: if day code is same or great ⁇ than current day from clock, then use permutation function for month/year on clock, otherwise use permutation function for next month aft ⁇ the month on the clock and use next year if the month on the clock is Decemb ⁇ .
  • step 568 performs the function: if day code is same or great ⁇ than current day from clock, then use permutation function for month/year on clock, otherwise use permutation function for next month aft ⁇ the month on the clock and use next year if the month on the clock is Decemb ⁇ .
  • the extract day code step 566 which must be performed before the invert permutation of decimal compressed code step 580, is accomplished by a prior knowledge of how die permute decimal numb ⁇ step 546 of FIG. 26 is performed rdative to the day code information.
  • the selected permutation method 578 is used in the invert permutation of decimal compressed code step 580.
  • the output of step 580 would be: 328137.
  • the next step is the convert groups of decimal numbers into groups of binary numbers and concatenate binary groups into one binary number step 584, which is the inverse of step 542 of FIG. 26 and for die above example would result in the binary code:
  • bit hierarchy key 588 is used in the reorder bits of binary numb ⁇ according to bit hierarchy key step 586, which inverts step 538 of FIG. 26 to obtain 000000000100110000010001001 for the above example, which is ...TL 2 TL,...C 2 C,...D 2 D 1 582 corresponding to 536 of FIG. 26.
  • the next step is to group bits to form three binary numbers TLv, C k , D ⁇ and convert to decimal numbers step 590 resulting in C,, D,, TL, 592, which for the example above would be: 4, 9, 19, and which are priority vectors for channd, day and time length, which in turn are used to look up channel, day, time and l ⁇ igth 604 in priority vector channel (C) table 598, priority vector date (D) table 600, and priority vector time/length (TL) table 602, respectively.
  • the look up local channd numb ⁇ step 606 looks up die local channel 612 given the assigned channd numb ⁇ 608, in the assigned local channd table 610, which is setup by the us ⁇ via the CH key 322, as explained above.
  • An example of the assigned/local channd table 610 is the right two columns of me assigned/local channd table 620 of FIG. 28.
  • the correspondence between die assigned channd numbers, such as 624 and 628, and die local channd numbers, such as 626 and 630 is established during setup by the user.
  • FIG. 28 shows an exact correspondence between the assigned channd numb ⁇ 5 and the local channd number 5.
  • the last step is the append montii and year to day to form date step 614.
  • the correct month and year are obtained from step 568 and are again dependent on wheth ⁇ die day code is equal to or greater than the day from the clock or less than the day from the clock.
  • Anoth ⁇ preferred embodiment is to embed die decoding means into a television receiv ⁇ witii G-code decoder 950, as shown in FIG. 29, which is a block diagram of a system including a television receiv ⁇ having a G-code decod ⁇ .
  • the us ⁇ would use die television remote controll ⁇ 956 or controls on the television receiv ⁇ to enter the code that signifies die program to be recorded.
  • the same television remote and controls on the television would also be used to perform normal television control functions, such as channel sdection.
  • die television remote would send die G-code to die television with G-code decod ⁇ 950 via infrared transmitter 958.
  • An infrared receiv ⁇ 960 on the television receiver 950 would receive die transmission and send die code to d e G-code decod ⁇ 954, which would decode die code into CDTL and use this information along with a clock, which would also be embedded in the television receiver 950, to send die proper commands to die VCR 964 and cable box 966 at the appropriate time so that the selected program will be recorded at the prop ⁇ time.
  • the transmission from the television 950 would be via infrared transmitters 962, which can be placed at strategic points on the television cabinet, such as at the corners.
  • the transmission is then received by the VCR 964 via infrared receiv ⁇ 968 and die cable box 966 via infrared receiv ⁇ 969.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic of a television receiv ⁇ having a G-code decoder.
  • the television receiv ⁇ with G-code decod ⁇ 950 would receive signals from the television remote controll ⁇ 956 via infrared receiv ⁇ 960, which would send the signals to eith ⁇ command controll ⁇ 974 or directly to G-code decod ⁇ 954.
  • the command controll ⁇ 974 may be present in the television receiver to control oth ⁇ items in the television, including "on screen" functions such as displaying die channd numb ⁇ when die channd is changed.
  • the G-code decod ⁇ 954 would decode a sent G-code and using die date and time from clock 976 would send the prop ⁇ commands to die VCR 964 and cable box 966 via infrared transmitters 962.
  • the G-codes and oth ⁇ commands could also be sent to die command controll ⁇ via manual control 975.
  • die G-code is decoded, then die G-code and die decoded CDTL information could be displayed "on screen” as shown in on screen display 978 on television display/monitor 952.
  • the "on screen” display is not necessary and any format is optional.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic showing apparatus for a G-code decoder in a television receiv ⁇ having G-code decoding.
  • the circuitry is very similar to mat described in FIGS. 21 and 22; howev ⁇ , tiiere are interfaces to an infrared receiv ⁇ 960 and command controll ⁇ 974 rather than LCD 384 and Key Pad 386.
  • the key dements are microcontroll ⁇ 980 and oscillator 982.
  • the interface to command controll ⁇ 974 is one preferred embodiment; another embodiment could have direct interfaces between the manual control 975, the infrared receiv ⁇ 960, die television display/monitor 952 and die G-code decod ⁇ 954 without going through die intermediary command controll ⁇ 974.
  • the television circuitry would include die capability of storing or learning e infrared code protocols for die VCR and die cable box.
  • the warning light emitting diode 984 would be mounted on die cabinet of the television to warn that recording was about to begin in ord ⁇ to alert the us ⁇ to have die VCR ready witii tape to record.
  • die operation of the television receiv ⁇ with G-code decod ⁇ 950 can be essentially identical to that described in FIGS. 23, 24 and 25 for program entry, program review and program cancellation, and execution of record ⁇ preprogramming using compressed codes, respectively. Every that was displayed on LCD 384 would instead be displayed on the television monitor 952. The only difference would be that "on screen” would only perform step 402 (display current date, time and time bars) when die user put television remote controller 956 into a mode for G-code entry and transmission, program review or program cancellation.
  • step 402 display current date, time and time bars
  • the method of encoding program channel, date, time and length information into decimal compressed codes of FIG. 26 the method of decoding decimal compressed codes into program channel, date, time and length information of FIG. 27, and die method of assigning channel numbers to local channel numbers as illustrated in FIG. 28 would stay the same.
  • Another preferred embodiment of the invention is to embed die decoding means into various equipments associated with television, such as a video cassette record ⁇ , cable box or satellite receiver.
  • the decoding means would only have to be present in one of the equipments, such as the cable box, which would tiien at the appropriate time distribute die proper commands to die oth ⁇ equipments such as a VCR and a satellite receiv ⁇ to record die desired program.
  • FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a system including a television having a G-code decoder 950, a VCR 964, a cable box 966 and a satellite receiv ⁇ 986.
  • This system would work identically to the system shown in FIG. 29, except that a satellite receiver is included, which could receive commands via infrared receiv ⁇ 988 from infrared transmitters 962 mounted on television receiv ⁇ with G-code decod ⁇ 950.
  • the commands received by die satellite receiv ⁇ could include on/off commands and channel sdect commands.
  • the satellite receiver 986 could feed a television signal to VCR 964, which would record die program and/or relay it to television display/monitor 952.
  • FIG. 33 is a block diagram of a system including a VCR having a G-code decoder 991, a television 952, a cable box 966 and a satellite receiv ⁇ 986.
  • the us ⁇ would use die television remote controll ⁇ 956 or controls on die VCR 991 to enter the code that signifies the program to be recorded.
  • die television remote would send die
  • G-code to VCR 991 with G-code decod ⁇ 992 via infrared transmitter 958 An infrared receiv ⁇ 990 on die VCR 991 would receive the transmission and send die code to die G-code decod ⁇ 992, which would decode die code into CDTL and use this information along with a clock, which would also be embedded in the VCR 991, to send die prop ⁇ commands to the cable box 966 and die satellite receiv ⁇ 986 at the appropriate time so that the selected program will be recorded at the prop ⁇ time.
  • the transmission from the VCR 991 would be via infrared transmitters 994, which can be placed at strategic points on the VCR.
  • FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing a cable box 372 placed on top of a VCR 370 having an infrared transmitter 1008 behind die front panel 1009 which communicates to the cable box infrared receiver 1010 via reflection from surrounding reflecting surfaces such as walls.
  • FIG. 37 is a perspective view showing a cable box 372 placed on top of a VCR 370 having an infrared transmitter 1014 inside a infrared dome 1012 on the top of the VCR which communicates to the cable box infrared receiver 1010 via direct communication or reflection depending on placement of the infrared receiv ⁇ 1010 relative to infrared dome 1012.
  • FIG. 38 is a perspective view of a VCR 370 having an infrared transmitter 1022 inside a mouse 1020 coupled via a cable 1018, which is plugged via plug 1017 into receptacle 1016 on the VCR.
  • the mouse 1020 is placed near die cable box infrared receiver 1010. This embodiment is most useful when the cable box is separated from die VCR by walls of a cabinet, for example, that would prevent eith ⁇ direct or reflective infrared transmission.
  • FIG. 39 is a perspective view of a VCR 370 having an infrared transmitter 1026 inside a stick on miniature mouse 1024 coupled via a cable 1018, which is plugged via plug 1017 into receptacle 1016 on the VCR.
  • the stick on miniature mouse 1024 is stock onto the cable box very near the infrared receiver 1010. This embodiment is also most useful when the cable box is separated from me VCR by walls of a cabinet, for example, mat would prevent eith ⁇ direct or reflective infrared transmission.
  • FIGS. 36, 37, 38 and 39 could also be used witii the system of FIG. 32 to transmit information from television receiver with G-code decod ⁇ 950 to VCR 964, cable box 966 and satellite receiv ⁇ 986.
  • FIG. 34 is a block diagram of a system including a cable box having a G-code decod ⁇ 997, a television 952, a VCR 964, and a satellite receiv ⁇ 986.
  • the us ⁇ would use die television remote controller 956 or controls on the cable box 997 to enter the code that signifies die program to be recorded.
  • die television remote would send die G-code to cable box 997 with G-code decod ⁇ 998 via infrared transmitter 958.
  • An infrared receiv ⁇ 996 on the cable box 997 would receive die transmission and send die code to die G-code decod ⁇ 998, which would decode die code into CDTL and use this information along witii a clock, which would also be embedded in the cable box 997, to send die proper commands to me VCR 964 and die satellite receiv ⁇ 986 at the appropriate time so that the sdected program will be recorded at the prop ⁇ time.
  • the transmission from the cable box 997 would receive die transmission and send die code to die G-code decod ⁇ 998, which would decode die code into CDTL and use this information along witii a clock, which would also be embedded in the cable box 997, to send die proper commands to me VCR 964 and die satellite receiv ⁇ 986 at the appropriate time so that the sdected program will be recorded at the prop ⁇ time.
  • FIG. 35 is a block diagram of a system including a satellite receiver 1005 having a G-code decoder, a television 952, a VCR 964, and a cable box 966.
  • the user would use die television remote controller 956 or controls on the satellite receiver 1005 to enter the code that signifies the program to be recorded.
  • die television remote would send die G-code to satellite receiv ⁇ 1005 with G-code decoder 1004 via infrared transmitter 958.
  • An infrared receiv ⁇ 1002 on die satellite receiv ⁇ 1005 would receive the transmission and send die code to die G-code decoder 1004, which would decode die code into CDTL and use this information along with a clock, which would also be embedded in die satellite receiver 1005, to send die prop ⁇ commands to the VCR 964 and die cable box 966 at the appropriate time so that the selected program will be recorded at the prop ⁇ time.
  • the transmission from the satellite receiv ⁇ 1005 would be via infrared transmitters 1006, which can be placed at strategic points on the satellite receiver.
  • the transmission is then received by die VCR 964 via infrared receiv ⁇ 968 and die cable box 966 via infrared receiv ⁇ 969.
  • Anoth ⁇ preferred embodiment of an apparatus for using compressed codes for a recorder programming is the custom programm ⁇ 1100 of FIGS. 40 and 41.
  • the custom programm ⁇ 1100 is similar to instant programm ⁇ 300 and has number keys 1102, which are numbered 0-9, a CANCEL key 1104, a REVIEW key 1106, a WEEKLY key 1108, a ONCE key 1110 and a DAILY (M-F) key 1112, which correspond directly to keys 302-312 of instant programmer 300, and which are used to program the custom programm ⁇ 1100.
  • a lid normally covers oth ⁇ keys, which are used to semp the instant custom programm ⁇ 1100.
  • die following keys are revealed, but not shown in the drawings: SAVE key, ENTER key, CLOCK key, CH key, ADD ⁇ ME key, VCR key, CABLE key, and TEST key.
  • Custom programmer 1100 includes a microphone opening 1140 through which at least one microphone inside die custom programmer 1100 can receive electronically coded audio signals that contain the information necessary for the custom programmer's initial setop and commands to store this information into the custom programmer 1100.
  • a user may call a special phone number which could be a toll-free 800 number, a pay-p ⁇ -minute 900 number, or a standard telephone number with standard toll charges applying.
  • the consum ⁇ can speak to an operator who orally inquires from the consum ⁇ the information regarding die consumer's VCR modd and brand, zip code, modd and brand of cable box and the newspap ⁇ or oth ⁇ publication which the consumer will use to obtain the compressed codes. This is all the information needed to perform the initial semp for the custom programmer 1100. From the zip code information, the operator can determine to which cable system the consum ⁇ is connected and can combine this data with die knowledge of which publication the consum ⁇ will use to select the correct local channel mapping table for die consum ⁇ .
  • a designated programming key which is, in me case of the preferred embodiment, the CH key located und ⁇ lid 1114.
  • die display 1134 with display die message "PHONE1 KEY2”. Pressing the "2" numeric key places the custom programmer into the manual local channd table programming mode that is implemented by instant programm ⁇ 300 when CH key 322 is pressed. Pressing me “ 1 " numeric key initiates the remote programming mode.
  • the custom programmer 1100 is then ready to receive an audio signal and display 1134 displays die message "WATT".
  • the op ⁇ ator will then direct the consumer to place the earpiece 1142 of die telephone receiv ⁇ 1144 ov die microphone opening 1140 of the custom programma 1100 as generally shown in FIG. 42.
  • the earpiece need not be placed directly against the custom programm ⁇ 1100, but may be held more than an inch away from the microphone opening with generally satisfactory results.
  • die operator will initiate the downloading of die initial semp data and initial setop programming commands transmitted over die telephone line 1146 using audio signals to die consum ⁇ 's custom programma 1100.
  • the display 1134 of die custom programm ⁇ 1100 will display the message "DONE". If the reception of die initial semp data is not successful within a predetermined time limit, red warning light emitting diode 1132 will blink to inform the consum ⁇ to adjust die position of the telephone earpiece before anoth ⁇ download of the information is attempted. After a waiting period allowing this adjustment, the initial semp data and commands are retransmitted over the telephone line. If after a predetermined number of attempts to download the initial semp information are unsuccessful, the liquid crystal display 1134 displays die message "FAIL" and die operator is again connected to die consumer allowing the operator to speak to the consumer to provide additional assistance in the positioning of the telephone earpiece.
  • a live operator could be provided by die local cable company and die initial setup information downloaded to die custom programm ⁇ 1100 by telephone line, through the existing cable of the cable system, or any oth ⁇ transmission means. If local cable companies supply the live operators, the only information they would need to gather from the consum ⁇ would be the VCR brand and modd and die publication containing compressed codes that the consum ⁇ plans on using, because the local cable company would know the modd and brand of cable box installed at die consum ⁇ 's location and the necessary data regarding die local channd designations for that cable system.
  • FIGS. 43 and 44 are schematics of die circuitry needed to implement alternative embodiments of the custom programm ⁇ 1100.
  • the circuit consists of microcomputer 1150, oscillator 1152, liquid crystal display 1154, keypad 1156, five way IR transmitters 1158 and red warning light emitting diode 1160. These components directly correspond to microcomputer 380, oscillator 382, liquid crystal display 384, keypad 386, five way IR transmitters 388 and red warning light emitting diode 332, respectivdy of instant programmer
  • earpiece 1142 gen ⁇ ates serial audio signals which are received by microphone 1162.
  • audio signals received by microphone 1162 are passed through amplifier 1164 and forwarded through a DTMF decod ⁇ circuit and into a serial port of microcomputer 1150.
  • the audio signals received by microphone 1162 are passed through amplifi ⁇ 1166, through a high pass filter 1166 with a cutoff at approximately 1-5 kHz, and through a second amplifi ⁇ 1170 to a serial port of microcomputer 1150.
  • a dual microphone system (not shown) may be employed to increase reliability, especially when the custom programm ⁇ 1100 is to be programmed in an environment with a high levd of background noise that could interfere with die transmission of data through die single microphone acoustic means.
  • one microphone would be placed near die telephone earpiece and die second microphone would be placed some distance away from the earpiece in ord ⁇ to pick up background noise.
  • a audio signal cancellation circuit is then used to effectively "subtract" the background noise picked up by the second microphone from the audio data signals combined with the background noise that is picked up from the first microphone resulting in solely clean audio data signals.
  • Anoth ⁇ preferred embodiment includes a separate initial setup programmer 1200 as shown in FIGS. 45.
  • the initial setup programmer 1200 serves the same basic function as the telephonic audio signal programming capability of custom programma 1100, namely allowing the total setup of the instant programm ⁇ 300 or custom programmer 1100 with a minimum of effort on the part of the consum ⁇ .
  • initial setup programmers 1200 would be maintained by sellers of either die instant programmer 300 or the custom programmer 1100.
  • the initial setup programma could be programmed with the local channd tables for the cable systems and die television calendars that publish G-codes in the vicinity of die sell ⁇ .
  • the sell ⁇ can inquire where the custom ⁇ lives and which television calendar the custom ⁇ uses and use the initial setup programm ⁇ 1200 to download die appropriate local channd table for that custom ⁇ . Furth ⁇ , the initial semp programma 1200 can also set the clock, VCR brand and modd, and cable box brand and modd for die custom ⁇ 's instant programma 300 or custom programma 1100.
  • the initial setup programma 1200 includes a keyboard 1202, a display 1204, an enclosure 1206, and a lid 1208, witii hinges 1209 at the top that allow the lid to open to reveal a depression 1210 for holding instant programmers 300 and custom programmers 1100 and two dectrical contact pins 1212 as shown in FIG 46.
  • the initial setup programmer 1200 includes a modular phone jack 1230 and a serial port 1232 as shown in FIG. 47 for transferring data to and from computers, eith ⁇ directly or ov telephone lines.
  • FIG. 48 shows two access holes 1213 in die bottom of the instant programm ⁇ 300 that allow access to two contact points on the to the circuit board (not shown) inside the instant programmer 300.
  • FIG. 49 shows die initial setup programm ⁇ 1200 with an instant programmer 300 fit into die depression 1210 with die two contact pins 1212 extending upwards through die access holes 1213 in die bottom of the instant programmer 300.
  • FIG. 50 shows die initial setup programma 1200 with a custom programm ⁇ 1100 fit into the depression 1210 witii die two contact pins 1212 extending upwards through the access holes 1136 in the bottom of the instant programm ⁇ 300.
  • FIG. 51 is a schematic that shows circuitry included in the initial setup programma 1200.
  • the initial setup programma includes a microcontroller (NEC ⁇ PD7530x) 1214, a liquid crystal display 1216, a keypad 1218, static random access memory (static RAM) 1220, computer port 1222 and programming pins 1224.
  • Local channd tables can be transferred from a computer to die initial setup programm ⁇ 1200 and stored in static RAM 1220.
  • FIG. 52 is a schematic showing the data transf ⁇ connection between a personal computer 1226 and initial setup programm ⁇ 1200.
  • Local channd table data is output from personal computer 1226 through a s ⁇ ial RS-232 port with + 12 and -12 volt signals.
  • the + 12 and -12 volt signals are transformed to TTL compatible 0 and 5 volt signals by level shifter 1228 which are input into microcontroller 1214.
  • Level shifter 1228 can be either external or internal to initial setup programmer 1200.
  • local channel table data can be transferred to die initial semp programmer 1200 by audio signals carried over telephone lines. Further, local channel tables may be entered into die initial semp programm ⁇ through keyboard 1202 in the same manner used to program this information into either instant programmers 300 or custom programmers 1100.
  • keyboard 1202 Included in keyboard 1202 are "SEND CLK”, “SEND CH”, “SEND CAB” and “SEND VCR", which set the clock, download die local channel table, select the protocol for the cable box brand and modd and sdect the protocol for the VCR brand and model, respectivdy when they are pressed. If die information is successfully transferred to die instant programm ⁇ 300 or custom programma 1100 connected to die initial semp programma 1200, display 1204 displays the message “Tr OK", otherwise the message “Tr Err” is displayed on display 1204. Data is transferred to instant programma 300 and custom programm ⁇ 1100 through the two contact pins 1212. The first of these pins is the ground pin. The second pin connects with test point 392 as shown in FIG. 22.
  • Test point 392 is connected to both an interrupt pin and one input/output (I/O) pin of microcomputer 380.
  • the two pins are tied together witii an open collector method so that both input and output can be accomplished with one pin.
  • the two contact pins 1212 connect to the same functional pins of the microcomputer 1150 of the custom programmer 1100. Data is transferred serially through these pins at a 4800 baud rate using TTL voltage levds.
  • the instant programm ⁇ 300 and custom programm ⁇ 1100 return a low pulse of a predetermined length to the initial setup programm ⁇ 1200 when they have received all of transferred data.
  • the invention as shown in the preferred embodiments of the custom programmer 1100 and die initial setup programm ⁇ 1200 can be readily included within televisions, video cassette recorders, cable boxes, or satellite receivers. It would not be complicated to embed eith ⁇ the custom programma 1100 or the initial semp programm ⁇ 1200 in televisions, video cassette recorders, cable boxes, and satellite receivers by adding suitable cabling or other transmission means between various video devices being used.
  • Anoth ⁇ embodiment of the invention is the custom controll ⁇ 1300 shown in FIGS. 53-58.
  • the custom controll ⁇ contains the same circuitry and performs the same functions as the custom programm ⁇ 1100, but also perform e functions of a complete universal remote control that can be setup automatically.
  • the custom controll ⁇ includes on its main control surface 1302 and its auxiliary control surface 1304, buttons that perform the same functions as buttons 1102-1112, 1156 of the custom programm ⁇ , a display 1306 that p ⁇ forms the same functions as display 1134, 1154 and IR transmitters 1314 which perform the same functions as IR transmitters 1131, 1158.
  • the custom controller can also be equipped with a lid (not shown) that covers hidden keys (not shown) used to setup the custom controller like lid 1114 on die custom programmer 1100 and lid 316 and keys 316-330 on die instant programmer 300.
  • the keys under die lid could include SAVE, ENTER, CLOCK, CH, ADD TIME, VCR, CABLE and TEST keys like die instant programmer and die custom programm ⁇ .
  • the custom controll ⁇ includes a microphone 1308, which performs the same functions as microphone 1140 of the custom programma and is accessible through die microphone access hole 1309. Through the microphone, the custom controll ⁇ is programmed with all of the semp information needed to function as an instant or custom programm ⁇ (i.e., channel map, current time of day, modd/brand of cable box and VCR). Alternatively, die custom controll ⁇ can be programmed by die initial setup programm ⁇ 1200 shown in FIGS. 45-47 and 49-51 in the identical mann ⁇ described above in connection with these figures for the instant and custom programmers. Accordingly, the custom controll ⁇ includes access holes 1310 through which contact can be made with die contact pins 1212 of the semp programm ⁇
  • Custom controll ⁇ 1300 also includes additional buttons on its control surfaces 1302 and 1304 that can used to operate any home dectronic device that can be controlled by an infrared remote control. These standard infrared remote controls work by transmitting diff ⁇ ent IR codes for each diff ⁇ ent function to be performed by die device being controlled.
  • Each button of the custom controller triggers the transmission of an IR code that would ordinarily be transmitted by another remote control.
  • the actual make up of these IR codes used to control the various home dectronic equipment are described in more detail in United States Patent No. 4,623,887 to Wdles, II which is h ⁇ eby incorporated by reference.
  • the custom controll ⁇ will be used to control televisions, VCRs, cable boxes, satellite receivers and hi-fi audio equipment. It is noted that both the instant programm ⁇ 300 and me custom programm ⁇ 1100 already functioned as universal remote controllers with respect to video recorders, cable boxes, televisions and satellite receivers as they can control diverse brands and modds of these devices.
  • FIGS. 58 and 59 show block diagram schematics for two alternate embodiments of the custom controller. It is noted these two schematics contain the same basic components, but die utilization and minimum size of the RAMs 1324 and 1330 and ROMs 1326, 1332 are different.
  • the custom controller's complete universal remote feature operates as follows.
  • Each button on the keyboard 1320 which is mounted on control surfaces 1302, 1304 of the custom controll ⁇ , is hard wired with a button code or a memory address, which is gen ⁇ ated each time the button is pressed.
  • the microcomputer 1322 receives the code or address generated by die pressed button and, if die button gen ⁇ ates a code, consults a look-up table to retrieve an address for the button code. This look up table, as well as the instructions that control the operation of the microprocessor are stored in ROM 1326 and 1332. in the embodiment of FIG. 58, the microprocessor retrieves an IR code from RAM
  • the minimum size for the ROM is very small as the ROM only needs to store die button code look up table and microprocessor instructions. Howev ⁇ , the size of the RAM needs to be large enough to store an IR code for each button on the keyboard.
  • die microprocessor consults a look-up table in RAM
  • ROM 1330 which contains address to ROM 1332, which contains die actual IR codes.
  • the ROM address is retrieved from RAM at the address derived from the pressed button on keyboard 1320.
  • the IR code is then retrieved from ROM at the address retrieved from RAM.
  • This embodiment allows the ROM to be preprogrammed with the IR codes for a large numb ⁇ of home electronic devices. This increases the minimum size of the ROM substantially, but reduces die minimum size of die RAM because ROM addresses are generally shorter than IR codes.
  • die IR code retrieved from eith ⁇ ROM or RAM is sent by die microprocessor to IR transmitters 1328 and is transmitted.
  • die custom controll ⁇ Before die custom controll ⁇ can be used as a complete universal remote control, it must be programmed with die IR codes for the functions and the brand and models of home dectronic equipment it is going to control. Traditionally this has been done in two diff ⁇ ent ways. First, die custom controll ⁇ can "learn" the IR codes for the products that it is to control from me remote controls that come with each product.
  • the custom controll ⁇ would then also include an IR receiv ⁇ (not shown) that would receive IR codes from oth ⁇ remote controls and store these codes and which button on the custom controll ⁇ each code is associated with into RAM.
  • This type of "learning" controll ⁇ usually employs the schematic of FIG. 58.
  • the second traditional programming method involves providing a ROM that contains the IR codes for most functions of most brands and models of home electronic equipment. The user thai enters into the custom controlla what brand/modd of each type of home dectronic device that die us ⁇ plans to use the custom controll ⁇ with.
  • die custom controll ⁇ will also include in ROM the associations between the IR codes for d e equipment and the keys on the custom controller that will trigger the sending of die IR codes.
  • a controller utilizing this second programming method usually employs the schematic of FIG. 59.
  • the custom controller can be programmed by either of both of these methods.
  • IR codes that are "learned" from oth ⁇ remote controllers are stored in RAM 1324 shown in FIG. 58.
  • ROM 1332 shown in FIG. 1332 includes IR codes for most VCRs, cable boxes, satellite receivers, televisions and stereo components and die ability to program which brand/model of these device he or she is using.
  • the embodiments shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 can be combined by including a flag bit in die data stored in RAM 1324 or 1330. If the flag bit is set, the rest of the data at that address is a ROM address which points to the location of the IR code in ROM 1332. If the flag bit is not set, the rest of the data at that address contains acmal IR code data.
  • IR codes are programmed into the memory of the custom controll ⁇ through the microphone 1308 mat is used for die semp of die channd map, cable box and VCR brand/modd and die current time of day.
  • the usa calls eith ⁇ a special phone numb ⁇ which could be a toll-free 800 number, a pay-p ⁇ -minute 900 number, or a standard telephone numb ⁇ with standard toll charges applying.
  • die consum ⁇ speaks on the telephone to a custom ⁇ service representative (representative) located at a remote site who orally inquires from me consum ⁇ the information regarding die brand and model of each home dectronic device with which die consum ⁇ wants to use custom controll ⁇ .
  • die consum ⁇ also has the opportunity to tell the representative which functions each button of die control surfaces 1302 and 1304 is to perform.
  • the representative enters this information into a computer at die remote site. If the consum ⁇ does not have preferences regarding which button of the custom controll ⁇ is used to perform which functions, in block 1352, die representative does not enter any pref ⁇ ences into the computer and die computer rdies on default associations between the buttons and functions that are previously stored in die computer.
  • the computer programs the custom programm ⁇ in at least two diff ⁇ ent ways, depending on wheth ⁇ die embodiment of FIG. 58 or 59 is used. If die embodiment of FIG. 58 is used, die computer downloads, through microphone assembly 1334 in eith ⁇ manner described above in connection witii die custom programm ⁇ and shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, all of the necessary
  • IR codes into RAM 1324 at die addresses associated with the buttons on the keyboard 1320 according to the consumer's expressed wishes. If this method is used, no IR codes need be stored in the ROM of the custom controller when it is manufactured.
  • die ROM 1332 installed into die custom controller at manufacture is programmed with the IR codes of many different brands, models and types of home electronic devices.
  • the computer downloads, through microphone assembly 1334, the addresses of the ROM for all of the necessary IR codes into RAM 1330 instead of downloading die IR codes themselves.
  • the ROM 1332 contains default associations between IR codes and buttons of the custom controll ⁇ , so that these associations need not be downloaded unless the consum ⁇ has requested associations between buttons and IR codes that are different from die default associations.
  • This method reduces die amount of data that needs to be sent ova die telephone lines from the remote site to the custom controlla, but can increase the size and cost of die ROM installed in die custom controll ⁇ .
  • die computer would just download die IR codes themsdves for that device as in the first programming method described above with reference to FIG. 58.
  • the microphone and decoding assemblies from eith ⁇ FIG. 43 or FIG. 44 may be used.
  • the microphone and decoding assembly in FIG. 44 is used as it is less expensive than die assembly in FIG. 43 that uses a DTMF decod ⁇ 1166.
  • the system shown in FIG. 44 utilizes just two single frequency signals rath ⁇ than many dual frequency signals as in a DTMF system.
  • the first signal a tone of approximately 3000 Hz
  • die second signal a tone of approximately 500 Hz
  • the bandwidth of die 1000-5000 Hz high pass filter 1168 from FIG. 44 will have to be broadened to include 500 Hz when included in the microphone and decod ⁇ assembly 1334.
  • a series of these two tones are transmitted ova die telephone line, representing a binary series.
  • a short period of no signal is included between each tone in me series of tones so that two consecutive 500 Hz or two consecutive 3000 Hz signals are interpreted as two sequential signals and not one long signal.
  • the series of signal tones are sent at a predetermined clock speed.
  • a decod ⁇ (not shown) is included between the microphone assembly 1334 and die microprocessor 1322 that converts the 3000 Hz signals to high electrical signals and converts the 500 Hz signals to low dectrical signals that are sent to a serial input into the microprocessor.
  • a clock signal is simultaneously sent to the microprocessor with each high or low signal.
  • the initial setup programmer 1200 could be used to perform the IR code programming of the custom controller 1300 instead of using the microphone/telephone interface.
  • the custom controller has several additional features.
  • the rear surface 1312 of the custom controll ⁇ is large enough so that custom controller can be set on the rear surface as shown in FIG. 61 and resist tipping ova.
  • the advantage of being able to stand die custom controll ⁇ in this upright position is that IR transmitters 1314 are then at a substantial height above the surface on which the custom controll ⁇ is set. This lessens die probability that pillows, newspapers, magazines or oth ⁇ debris will be inadvertently placed on top of die custom controll ⁇ as it will be difficult for debris to balance on die top of the custom controll ⁇ wh ⁇ i while in the upright position.
  • stacks of pillows, magazines and other debris placed next to die custom controll ⁇ must be rath ⁇ high before they will block the IR transmissions of the custom controller.
  • This feature is extremely important because, unlike the instant programma which can have a permanent hold ⁇ next to die cable box and VCR, away from magazines and pillows, die custom controller, having full universal remote capabilities, is designed to be used some distance away from me video equipment. Yet, to function properly as an automatic video record ⁇ controll ⁇ , the IR transmitters of the custom controll ⁇ need to have a direct line of sight to the ER receivers of the video equipment to be controlled.
  • the degree of enlargement of the rear surface 1312 needs to be enough so that the custom controll ⁇ is stable and resistant to being tipped ova when it is put in the upright position shown in FIG. 58. Determining an acceptable size of rear portion is based on several factors. First, it usually desirable for die length and the widtii of the rear surface to be approximately equal. If die length is significantly greater than die width (as is the case with traditional prior art universal remote controls), the controll ⁇ can be easily tipped over along die axes that span the widdi of the rear surface. Next, die proportion of die height of die controller to die length and widdi of die rear surface cannot be too great.
  • a ratio of the length of die rear face to the height of the controll ⁇ and of die widdi of die rear face to the height of the controll ⁇ of approximately 3 to 1 or less is usually sufficient. Howev ⁇ , this ratio depends on die uniformity of the density of die custom controller and thus the cent ⁇ of gravity. If the upp ⁇ portions of die custom controll ⁇ (when it is in die upright position) are more dense than the lower portions, die center of gravity will be high and die ratio of the widdi and length of the rear surface will need to be reduced. On die oth ⁇ hand, if die lower portions are more dense, the center of gravity will be low ⁇ and die ratio can be safely increased.
  • One way die center of gravity is iow ⁇ ed in the custom controll ⁇ is by placing the batteries 1316, which are comparativdy very dense, very near die rear surface. Another factor in the stability of the custom controller in the lateral location of the custom controller's center of gravity. The closer the center of gravity is to being directly above the center of the rear surface when the custom controller is in the upright position, the more stable the custom controll ⁇ will be. It is noted that the upper portion of embodiment of the custom controll ⁇ shown in FIGS. 53-58 is off center. This moves the center of gravity away from the center of rear surface slightly, but adds to die aesthetic appearance of the custom controll ⁇ .
  • the shape of the rear surface is not particularly relevant, but rath ⁇ the shortest distance across the rear surface.
  • die shape of the back surface of the custom controll ⁇ is significant.
  • the back surface is semicircular or substantially semicircular. The clos ⁇ the back surface is to a semicylindrical shape, the more comfortable the custom controll ⁇ is for a consum ⁇ to hold, as the cylindrical shape fits better into human hands.
  • Anoth ⁇ feature of die custom controll ⁇ is its two control surfaces 1302 and 1304.
  • Auxiliary control surface 1304 is designed to include buttons that will be used most often when the custom controll ⁇ is in its upright position, such as volume up and down controls.
  • the angle between the rear surface and die auxiliary control surface is less than or equal to 45°. Keeping the angle less than or equal to 45° directs at least half of die force needed to press button on the auxiliary control surface downwards into me table or oth ⁇ surface the custom controll ⁇ is resting on instead of sideways, which would tend to topple die custom controll ⁇ when it is in the upright position.
  • FIGS. 65-70 and FIGS. 71-76 Two alternative embodiments of the custom controll ⁇ 1300 are shown in FIGS. 65-70 and FIGS. 71-76. These controllers indude control faces that are at angles from the rear face of less than or equal to 45°, substantially circular bottom faces and rear races that are larger relative to prior art remote controls.
  • buttons would be assigned to a specific television or cable chaimd such as HBO, ESPN, CNN or MTV. For example, if a button is assigned to CNN, when die CNN button is pressed, die custom controll ⁇ transmits IR codes to change the chaimd on a television, VCR, cable box or satellite receiv ⁇ to die channd number on which CNN is broadcast.
  • the consum ⁇ sets up die custom controll ⁇ , he or she tells the representative what channels he or she watches die most and die representative directs die computer to have selected keys on die custom controll ⁇ be programmed to tune these channds.
  • the consum ⁇ tells the representative which keys on the custom controll ⁇ he or she wishes to tune which channels or die representative can sdect the keys. Aft ⁇ the keys and channels have been selected, die consum ⁇ then writes the channd names next to the keys that tune them or labels with diff ⁇ ent channd names can be supplied which are then applied to die custom controll ⁇ next to the appropriate buttons.
  • These one touch tuning buttons are particularly well suited to being programmed as buttons on the auxiliary control surface, so that the consum ⁇ can operate these buttons without having to pick up the custom controller.
  • Anoth ⁇ embodiment, shown in FIGS. 77-78 is an alternative embodiment to the embodiment shown in FIG. 33.
  • An initial semp routine must be performed on die VCR in the embodiment in FIG. 33 similar to that that must be performed on the instant programmer 300. This consists of entering, into the VCR, die local channd map, the current time and an identification of die cable box, television or satellite receiv ⁇ that is to be controlled by die VCR. In the embodiment of FIG. 33, this initial setup is performed manually by the us ⁇ in the same mann ⁇ as for the instant programma by pressing a series of keys on eith ⁇ die
  • VCR remote includes a CPU 1402, RAM 1404, ROM 1406, keyboard 1408 and an IR transmitter 1410 that are typical for IR remote control units.
  • die VCR remote includes a microphone 1412 and an audio signal decod ⁇ 1414. The microphone and decod ⁇ can be eith ⁇ of die embodiments 1166 or 1168-1170 shown in FIGS. 43 and 44. As with the custom controll ⁇ described above, howev ⁇ , die decoders 1168-1170 in FIG. 44 and 1334 in FIGS.
  • me alternative VCR remote 1400 is a also a universal remote such as custom controller 1300 with all of die structure and functions of die custom controll ⁇ .
  • die VCR remote is capable of controlling me cable box 1428, VCR 1416, television 1432 and any oth ⁇ auxiliary home dectronic equipment that is IR remote controllable 1434.
  • a significant advantage of die VCR remote control is that the data required to be entered into the VCR 1416 for the initial setup can initially be downloaded from a remote site by telephone to me VCR remote control. To do this, the consum ⁇ calls the remote site in the telephone, orally gives the information necessary to perform the initial semp to a person at die remote site. The person at die remote site men instructs the consum ⁇ to place the microphone of the VCR remote to the telephone earpiece and die initial setup is downloaded.
  • the user easily causes die data to be downloaded by IR transmission, from the VCR remote control to die VCR itsdf by pressing a "send" key or a "send” sequence of keys.
  • the VCR receives the initial soup data, stores it in its memory 1420 and tiien is ready to be used as an instant programma.
  • the structural dements of the custom programm ⁇ 1100 shown in FIGS. 40-44, including a microphone 1450 and decoding assembly 1452 are be embedded within a VCR 1454 instead of embedding me structural elements of the instant programma 300 into the VCR as shown in FIG. 33.
  • the user would hold the earpiece of their telephone 1456 to the microphone embedded in the VCR to download die initial setup data directly from die remote site into the VCR.
  • the difficulty witii this embodiment is that often a user's VCR and telephone are not located close enough together to position the telephone earpiece near the VCR. Further, correction of this problem, which would involve adding an extension cord to die telephone or disconnecting and relocating the VCR near ⁇ the telephone are not convenient.
  • the microphone in the VCR with custom programma embedded is replaced with a modular phone jack 1458 that leads directly to the decod ⁇ assembly 1452 in the VCR.
  • a standard telephone line 1460 would then connect the
  • VCR to a modular T-connector 1462 so that both die VCR and an independent telephone 1464 are connected to die telephone line 1466.
  • the consum ⁇ then uses die telephone to call and talk to the remote site, but die data is transmitted directly to die VCR.
  • the transfer of data by this method may be more accurate than transmission by audible tones.
  • this embodiment suffers from the same problem of the proximity of the consum ⁇ 's phone outlets to the VCR.
  • die proximity of the VCR to a consum ⁇ 's telephone or telephone jack are not important.
  • the consum ⁇ simply carries the remote to his or h ⁇ phone and gets die initial setup data downloaded into the VCR remote.
  • the consum ⁇ thai carries the remote to a location near die VCR and downloads die initial
  • Anoth ⁇ embodiment, shown in FIG. 81, is to install a modular jack 1466 into the VCR remote 1400.
  • the VCR remote is connected to die telephone by a T-connector 1468 and operates in die same way as me VCR witii a built in modular jack described above and shown in FIG. 80 except that after die initial setup data is transferred to die VCR remote, die VCR remote is placed near the VCR and die initial semp data is downloaded by IR transmission to me VCR .
  • One advantage that this embodiment has ov the VCR witii a built in modular jack is that die VCR remote can be taken to the telephone whereas die VCR may be located far from the telephone.
  • VCR remote it is also possible to add a DTMF generator to the VCR remote so that the keypad 1408 of die VCR remote can be used to dial the telephone number of the remote site.
  • telephone numbers for the remote site are stored in the memory of me VCR remote so that the consumer may dial die remote site by pressing a minir-inn- number of keys.
  • the consum ⁇ places a telephone call on eith ⁇ an 800, 900 or normal toll call line to a custom ⁇ service representative.
  • the representative inquires from the consum ⁇ information necessary to perform the initial setup, such as the consum ⁇ 's ZIP code or die name of the consumer's cable company, the television guide that consum ⁇ uses, the brand and model of die consumer's cable box (it is sometimes possible to deduce this data from the ZIP code or cable company name data) and die brand and model of die consumer's VCR.
  • the channel map and cable box IR codes can be determined from this data.
  • the VCR remote control is also a universal remote control
  • the representative inquires as to the brands and models of any oth ⁇ IR controllable home dectronic equipment that the consumer may wish to control with die VCR remote control.
  • die initial setup data including die channd map, IR code data and the current time, including die date, is downloaded over die telephone line to the VCR remote control.
  • die initial setup data is generated by a computer at or connected to die representative's location, transmitted ov telephone lines in die fo ⁇ n of audio signals, received by die VCR remote control's microphone or modular phone jack and decod ⁇ , and stored into RAM 1404 by CPU 1402.
  • the consum ⁇ presses a "send" key or a sequence of keys that triggers the transmission of the initial setup data through die IR transmitter to me VCR's IR receiv ⁇ .
  • the VCR remote control is a universal remote
  • the IR codes for IR controllable devices oth ⁇ than die cable box are preferably not be transmitted to die VCR as tiiey are used by the VCR remote control itsdf, not die VCR.
  • the data is stored by die VCR's CPU into me
  • VCR's RAM VCR's RAM
  • me VCR remote control's IR transmitter is not a multi ⁇ directional or wide angle IR transmitter.
  • the more expensive multi-directional or wide angle IR transmitters are not necessary because the IR transmitter is not used to transmit IR signals when die VCR remote control is set on a table or on top of die cable box or VCR.
  • a multi-directional or wide angle IR transmitter is retained to increase die likdihood of the successful downloading of all of the initial setup data.
  • die quantity of die initial setup data is not tremendous, it is substantial.
  • an uninterrupted IR stream of a significant duration is required to reach the VCR from me VCR remote control.
  • the more diverse die radiation of IR signals is, the more likdy it is that all of a stream of IR signals will reach the IR receiv ⁇ in the VCR, eith ⁇ directly or by reflection.
  • VCR remote control For preexisting VCRs with a built in instant programm ⁇ and IR transmitter that were made before die present VCR remote control, that can also have their initial setup performed through die use of a remote control, the VCR remote control can be programmed, either with a program stored in ROM at manufacture or by telephone into RAM, to use the preexisting VCRs own protocol for initial setup using a remote control. In oth ⁇ words, die VCR remote control is programmed to mimic a consumer using the VCR's original remote control to perform the initial semp.
  • part of this special protocol includes using a receipt confirmation signal combined witii known error detection and/or error correction schemes to assure the reception of the entire stream of initial setup data by die VCR.
  • Known error detection schemes include a using parity check bit in every byte of data and embedding a code at some point in die data stream that indicates die length of the entire data stream. The use of these and oth ⁇ known error detection and correction schemes allows the VCR to verify wheth ⁇ die complete stream of error free initial setup data was received.
  • the VCR can produce an indication, eith ⁇ audio or visual, that the initial semp data was successfully received. If it is not verified that the data received is correct and complete, the VCR eith ⁇ gives no indication or produces a second indication to indicate an unsuccessful transmission. Upon an unsuccessful transmission, the consum ⁇ adjusts die position of the VCR remote control relative to die VCR and retransmits the initial semp data.
  • Anoth ⁇ alternative is to provide modular telephone jacks in botii die VCR and the VCR remote control for downloading die initial semp data from the VCR remote control to the VCR.
  • This embodiment provides for more ror free transmission of me initial semp data, but forces the consum ⁇ to connect, disconnect and store die cable that links the VCR remote control and die VCR.
  • Yet another alternative is to include in the VCR a microphone and decod ⁇ assembly similar to the microphone and decod ⁇ assembly 1412-1414 in the VCR remote control.
  • An encod ⁇ and speak ⁇ (not shown) are then added to die VCR remote control.
  • me initial semp data is transmitted from the VCR remote control to the VCR using me same type of audio signals as used to download die initial semp data ova die telephone lines to the VCR remote control.
  • die consuma is ready to transmit the initial setup data from me VCR remote control to the VCR, he or she simply holds up die speaker of die VCR remote control to die microphone of me VCR and pressed die keys necessary to trigger transmission.
  • the speak ⁇ and microphone on the VCR remote control can be combined into a single micropbone/speak ⁇ component.
  • die channd map data and IR code data for the VCR is transmitted and stored into die RAM of the VCR remote control first.
  • Th ⁇ eafter die data is retransmitted to die VCR and stored into me RAM of die VCR.
  • the channd map and IR code data for die VCR is erased from the RAM in the VCR remote control. If IR code data for use by the VCR remote itself is initially downloaded with the channd map data and IR code data for the VCR, this data is, of course, not erased from the RAM in the VCR remote control.
  • die IR codes for control of the cable box and oth ⁇ remote controllable dectronic equipment that are downloaded ov a telephone line to the video record ⁇ , eith ⁇ directly or via a VCR remote, are stored in different ways in diff ⁇ ent alternative embodiments.
  • IR codes for numerous cable boxes and oth ⁇ devices can be stored in the ROMs of die video record ⁇ and die VCR remote with the addresses of the
  • IR codes for a particular cable box or oth ⁇ device being downloaded to die RAM of the video record ⁇ or VCR remote. Alternativdy, the IR codes themsdves can be downloaded to die RAM of the video record ⁇ or VCR remote.
  • die VCR remote 1400 can be readily be used witii televisions, cable boxes, satellite receivers or oth ⁇ audio-visual components that contain remote control transmitters.
  • the only differences in op ⁇ ation in these alternate configurations are die IR codes and downloading protocols that the VCR remote uses. Howev ⁇ , the VCR remote as described above is capable of having these codes and protocols downloaded by telephone along witii die initial setup data.
  • die example given of die type of data being downloaded to die custom programma 1100, initial setup programm ⁇ 1200, custom controll ⁇ 1300, VCR witii built in IR transmitter and direct telephone input (FIGS.
  • VCR remote 1400 (collectively, the "telephone downloadable programmers") is initial setup data.
  • This initial setup data includes IR codes or IR code addresses for die remote control of oth ⁇ electronic equipment, local channel maps and die current time.
  • data representing programs that are desired to be recorded or viewed may be downloaded to die various telephone downloadable programmers.
  • the downloaded data representing a program to be recorded is in die form of e acmal values of the channd, date, time-of-day and length of die program.
  • die data downloaded representing a program to be recorded or viewed, is in the form of a con ⁇ ressed code or G-code, which contains the channd, date, time-of-day and length of die program.
  • G-code contains the channd, date, time-of-day and length of die program.
  • FIG. 82 shows a flow diagram of the process of selecting and downloading program information according to this embodiment.
  • the user calls a custom ⁇ service representative 1520 located at a remote site on the telephone, either on a pay-p ⁇ -minute or pay-p ⁇ -call 900 numb ⁇ , toll-free 800 numb ⁇ or regular toll number.
  • the us ⁇ orally tells the representative eith ⁇ specific shows that the user wants to record or a more gen ⁇ al description of a type of show to be recorded or viewed.
  • gen ⁇ al descriptions include die type of show, such as simation comedies, dramas, action shows, ceremonies, police or detective shows, real life rescue, emergency or police shows, game shows, news magazines, daily news programs, documentaries, sports events, movies, etc.
  • the gen ⁇ al descriptions furth ⁇ include more specific descriptions such as movies or shows starring a particular actor or actress or directed by a certain director (e.g., "all Humphrey Bogart movies"), sporting events involving a particular team and/or a particular sport (e.g., "all U.C.L.A. basketball games”), a show that may be on multiple time a week on diff ⁇ ent channds (e.g., "all episodes of 'I Love Lucy' on this week”).
  • die representative enters the information given by die us ⁇ in block 1502 into a computer 1522.
  • the computer includes a large database of television programs to be broadcast in the future, stored in mass storage 1526, such as a hard disk.
  • the computer searches die database for television programs that match me information altered by die representative and retrieves die channd, date, time-of-day and length data for each program matching me information entered.
  • the computer automatically checks the date, time-of-day and length data for all die programs retrieved in me database search for time conflicts between programs that ov ⁇ lap each oth ⁇ .
  • die computer alerts the representative tiiat there is a time conflict and die programs that are involved.
  • die representative informs the us ⁇ - of the time conflict and die programs that are conflicting. The user then decides which of die conflicting programs he or she wishes to record or view. Alternatively, die user chooses to have only die non-conflicting portion of a program mat partially conflicts with anoth ⁇ program recorded to avoid die conflict. For example, if two programs are selected that both begin at 8:00pm on Sunday, but one last one hour and die oth ⁇ lasts two hours, die us ⁇ can choose to record die one hour program and die second hour of die two hour program.
  • the user tells die representative how to resolve the conflict and, in block 1510, the representative enters this information into the computer, which adjusts die selected programs accordingly, in block 1512.
  • the computer converts the channel, date, time-of-day and length of each of die programs remaining aft ⁇ the search of the database and after resolving time conflicts, if any, into G-codes for use be downloadable programmers that perform the functions of the instant programma 300.
  • Such a programmer is representatively shown by dotted line 1524 with the programm ⁇ 1524 having a CPU 1526, a microphone and high pass filter 1528 (similar to programm ⁇ 1100 as shown in FIG.
  • a random access memory (RAM) 1532 which includes a stack memory for storing the CDTL information, and a ROM 1530.
  • the computer downloads die G-codes ova a telephone line to a telephone downloadable programma that p ⁇ forms the functions of the instant programmer 300.
  • the blocks 1514 and 1516 are replaced by a block (not shown) in which die computer downloads data representing the channd, date, time-of-day and length of each of die programs sdected by the search of the database and modified to resolve time conflicts, if any, ova a telephone line to any telephone downloadable programm ⁇ 1524.
  • Aft ⁇ program data is downloaded to a telephone downloadable programm ⁇ , and decoded into channd, date, time-of-day and lengtii if G-codes w ⁇ e downloaded, die CDTL data is stored into the memory of any of die telephone downloadable programmers, such as stack memory of RAM 1532, in die same mann such program data is stored into the stack memory, such as stack memory 76 of FIG. 12, of die instant programm ⁇ 300 after it is decoded from a G-code as described above. After die program data is stored in memory, e control of the recording of die programs according to this data is performed in same mann ⁇ as performed by die various telephone downloadable programmers described above.
  • me program data is downloaded to die telephone downloadable programmers for control of a tdevision or cable box only, rath ⁇ than for control of a video recorder.
  • die user is able to use a telephone downloadable programmer to simply change die channd of his or her television or cable box to assure that an important show is not missed because die user forgets what time it is or becomes engrossed in another show or simply because die user does not want to both ⁇ having to change channels manually.
  • the format of the database file to die store the great amount of information about the future tdevision broadcasts of television programs and me database program used manipulate and search die database file can be any well known database format and corresponding database engine.
  • me database format used consists of a series of records, each consisting of a predetermined set of fidds that is die same as the set of fields in every oth ⁇ record in the database.
  • Each television program corresponds to one record of die database.
  • Each record would contain fidds for die title, channd, date, starting time-of-day and die lengtii of die program.
  • each record indudes a series of boolean fidds, each fidd representing a certain category of television program, such as situation comedy, romantic movie, sports program, etc.
  • the advantage of this embodiment is that many different categories may be easily represented and searched, while taking up little space.
  • This embodiment takes up little space because even though th ⁇ e may be ova a hundred different category fidds, a boolean fidd usually takes up only one bit or at most one byte of space for each record in most database file formats.
  • the small size of each category field also facilitates rapid searching through the database for all die programs in a certain category.
  • This embodiment also allows for multiple ov ⁇ lapping categories.
  • the database may have separate category fidds for crime subject matter, comedy, and fiction.
  • One television program may be a fictional comedy about crime, thus containing a "true” value in all three categories fidds.
  • a program On die otii ⁇ hand, a program may be a real life drama about crime which only would contain a "true” value in one of these categories fields, die crime subject matter fidd.
  • each record includes several "people" fields.
  • the contents of the "people" fidds indude characters in e program, actors and actresses, directors and writers involved with die creation of die program.
  • the computer can search die "people" fields for this information.
  • th ⁇ e can be separate fidds for characters, actors and actresses, and creators of programs.
  • Each record also indudes fidds devoted to die violence and sexual content of die television program.
  • fidds devoted to die violence and sexual content of die television program.
  • a fidd for die rating by the Motion Picture Association is utilized.
  • boolean fidds for such descriptions as mild violence, explicit violence, brief nudity, nudity, profanity, adult situations, and sexual theme are included.
  • programs can be sdected or excluded from a search based on such general content information.
  • Each record of die database also indudes an abstract that contains a brief description of die program. This allows a more detailed and extensive search, albeit more time consuming, of specific program content by searching all of die abstract fields for certain keywords or combinations of keywords.

Abstract

Encoded video recorder/player timer preprogramming information listed in a television calendar allows a timer preprogramming feature on a video cassette recorder VCR to be programmed using a compressed code of as few as 1 to 8 digits, which are decoded by a decoder built into a video recorder to convert the compressed code into channel, date, time and length information. The channel, date, time and length information is used to select channels, start recording, and stop recording at the appropriate time. A remote control transmitter mounted in the video recorder transmits signals to an external channel selection device to select channels for recording. A local channel map is stored so that the channel information from the compressed codes can be utilized to tune the correct channel even though channel numbers in different localities may be different. A remote for controlling the video recorder is included and may be a universal remote control capable of storing infrared code protocols for commanding different brands and model of video devices. The programming of infrared codes and protocols in the remote control is performed by transmissions over telephone lines. The programming of local channel map data and infrared codes and protocols in the video recorder are performed by transmissions over telephone lines to the remote control followed by transmissions from the remote control to the video recorder.

Description

5
r
-1- 10
APPARATUS AND METHOD USING COMPRESSED CODES FOR TELEVISION PROGRAM RECORD SCHEDULING
Field of the Invention 15 This invention relates generally to video cassette recorder systems and particularly to an apparatus and method for using encoded information to shorten the time required to perform timer preprogramming and for remotely controlling various home electronic devices and for easily performing an initial setup routine of such an apparatus.
20 Prior Art
The video cassette recorder (VCR) has a number of uses, including playing back of tapes filmed by a video camera, playing back of pre-recorded tapes, and recording and playing back of broadcast and cable television programs.
To record a television program in advance of viewing it, a two-step process is often used:
25 (1) obtain the correct channel, date, time and length (CDTL) information from a television program guide, and (2) program this CDTL information into the VCR. Depending on the model, year and type of the VCR, the CDTL information can be programmed in various ways including: (i) pushing an appropriate sequence of keys in the console according to instructions contained in the user's manual, (ii) pushing an appropriate sequence of keys in a remote
30 hand-held control unit according to instructions contained in the user's manual (remote programming), and (iii) executing a series of keystrokes in the remote hand-held control unit in response to a menu displayed on the television screen (on-screen programming). Other techniques for timer preprogramming have been suggested including: (iv) reading in certain bar-code information using a light pen (light pen programming), and (v) entering instructions
35 through a computer or telephone modem. These various methods differ only in the physical means of specifying the information while the contents, being CDTL and certain power/clock/timer on-off commands are generally common although the detailed protocol can vary with different model VCRs. Methods (i) and (ii) described above can require up to
100 keystrokes, which has inhibited the free use of the timer preprogramming feature of VCRs. To alleviate this, new VCR models have included an "On-Screen Programming" feature, which permits remote input of CDTL information in response to a menu displayed on the television screen. Generally on screen programming of CDTL information requires an average of about 18 keystrokes, which is less than some of the prior methods but still rather substantial. Some of the other techniques such as (iv) above, require the use of special equipment such as a bar code reader.
In general die present state of die art suffers from a number of drawbacks. First, the procedure for setting the VCR to record in advance can be quite complex and confusing and difficult to learn; in fact, because of this many VCR owners shun using the timer preprogramming record feature. Second, die transcription of die CDTL information to the VCR is hardly ever error-free; in fact, many users of VCR's timer preprogramming features express concern over die high incidence of programming errors. Third, even for experienced users, die process of entering a lengthy sequence of information on the channel, date, time and length of desired program can become tedious. Fourth, techniques such as reading in bar-code information or using a computer require special equipment These drawbacks have created a serious impedance in die use of a VCR as a recording device for television programs. The effect is that time shifting of programs has not become as popular as it once was thought it would be. Accordingly, there is a need in die art for a simpler system for effecting VCR timer preprogramming which will enable a user to take advantage of the recording feature of a VCR more fully and freely.
Summary of the InYention A principal feature of the invention is providing an improved system for the selection and entering of channel, date, time and length (CDTL) information required for timer preprogramming of a VCR which is substantially simpler, faster and less error-prone than present techniques. Another principal feature of the invention is providing televisions having an embedded capability for timer programming control. in accordance with the invention, to program the timer preprogramming feature of a video system, mere is an apparatus and method for using encoded video recorder/player timer preprogramming information. The purpose is to significandy reduce die number of keystrokes required to set up die timer preprogramming feature on a VCR. In accordance with this invention it is only necessary for the user to enter a code with 1 to 8 digits or more into the VCR. His can be done either remotely or locally at die VCR. Built into either the remote controller or d e VCR is a decoding means which automatically converts the code into the proper CDTL programming information and activates the VCR to record a given television program with the corresponding channel, date, time and length. Generally multiple codes can be entered at one time for multiple program selections. The code can be printed in a television program guide in advance and selected for use with a VCR or remote controller with the decoding means. A product embodying these features is now commercially available and has enjoyed great commercial success. This instant programmer, sold under die VCRPlus+* trademark, consists of a handheld unit into which compressed codes (each 1 to 8 digits long) for television programs to be recorded are entered. The compressed codes are most commonly found in printed television listings. The instant programmer decodes die compressed codes into channel, date, time-of-day and length commands which are then stored in the programmer's memory. When date and time of the program in the memory that is scheduled die nearest to the current time coincides with d e current time, as determined by an internal clock, the instant programmer, using an infrared transmitter and universal remote technology, sends infrared remote control signals to a cable box or a video recorder to change die channel to the correct channel and infrared remote control signals to a video recorder to turn die recorder on and begin recording. After the length for the program, stored in memory, has elapsed, an infrared remote control signal to stop recording is sent to die video recorder.
Before the VCRPlus+ programmer can be used, the user must perform an initial setup procedure. This procedure includes entering the brands and models of die user's video recorder and cable box into e programmer, setting the clock in the programmer, and entering a local channel map which maps "national" channel numbers for certain networks and cable channels into the actual channel numbers used for these channel by die user's cable system. The instant programmer is manufactured with the infrared codes necessary to remotely control a wide variety of cable boxes and video recorders stored in ROM. The model and brands of die cable box and video recorder must be entered so that the instant programmer will use die correct ones of the infrared codes stored in ROM for the user's particular video recorder and cable box.
In a parent application to the present application, an alternate embodiment is disclosed in which die decoder, memory and infrared transmitter of me instant programmer are embedded in a video recorder. The 1 to 8 digit compressed codes are entered direcdy into the video recorder, eidier through keys oα the video recorder or through a remote for the video recorder. The compressed codes are decoded by die video recorder into channel, date, time-of-day and length commands and stored into the video recorder's memory. When the time and date of a program in memory coincide! with the real time as supplied by d e clock i the video recorder, die video recorder transmits, using its infrared transmitter and universal remote technology, infrared remote control signals to a cable box that change the channel tuned by die cable box to the desired channel. The video recorder then internally signals itself to begin recording the television signal received from the now correctly tuned cable box.
When the length, stored in memory, has elapsed, the video recorder turns itself off.
Like with die VCRPlus+ instant programmer, before the video recorder with a built in instant programmer and remote control transmitter can be used, an initial setup procedure must be performed. The brand and model of cable box and die local channel map must be manually entered into the video recorder.
The present invention includes an improvement to the video recorder with a built in instant programmer and remote control transmitter. The invention involves downloading data over telephone lines from a remote site to the video recorder. In several embodiments the information downloaded is initial setup data that otherwise would have to be manually keyed in by the user. Instead, die user can call a customer service representative on the telephone and orally give d e representative the information necessary to perform the initial setup. The representative then enters the necessary information into a computer which, in turn, downloads die data over d e telephone line to the video recorder which has been connected to die telephone line. In various embodiments, die video recorder is connected to die telephone line by a modular phone jack in the video recorder or through the telephone's earpiece which is held in the proximity a microphone connected to the video recorder. In other embodiments, data is downloaded first over a telephone line into a VCR remote control, instead of into me video recorder direcdy, in any of the ways that the data can be transmitted to the video recorder. Thereafter, die data is retransmitted from the VCR remote control to the video recorder through infrared remote control signals transmitted by the VCR remote and received by d e video recorder.
In any of these embodiments, the initial setup data is transferred and stored into the video recorder without d e user having to key the information manually. Another principal object of the invention is to embed the decoding means into a television. The television would then at the appropriate time distribute die proper commands to a VCR and a cable box to record d e desired program. The user would use die television remote or controls on die television to enter the code that signifies the program to be recorded. The same television remote and controls on the television would also be used to perform normal television control functions, such as channel selection. When the codes are entered they are transmitted to die television and die decoder in the television, which decodes d e codes into CDTL information and then the codes diemselves and die CDTL information could be displayed "on screen" so that die user can verify that the proper codes have been entered. Then at die appropriate time the television would transmit the proper commands to a VCR and a cable box, if necessary, to command e recording of the selected program.
This control function can be carried out by using an infrared link by placing infrared transmitters on the television cabinet, preferably at me corners. The television circuitry would include d e capability of storing or learning the infrared code protocols for the VCR and die cable box.
Another principal object of the invention is to embed d e decoding means into various equipments associated witii television, such as a video cassette recorder, cable box or satellite receiver. In any system the decoding means would only have to be present in one of the equipments, such as the cable box, which would tiien at the appropriate time distribute the proper commands to the otiier equipments such as a VCR and a satellite receiver to record die desired program. The user would use die television remote or controls on the equipment with die decoder to enter the code that signifies the program to be recorded. The same television remote would also be used to perform normal television control functions, such as channel selection. When die codes are entered they are transmitted to e equipment with d e decoder, which decodes die codes into CDTL information. Then at the appropriate time the equipment with die decoder would transmit the proper commands to a die otiier equipment such as a VCR, satellite receiver and a cable box to command die recording of the selected program. This control function can be carried out by using an infrared link by coupling infrared transmitters on the equipment with die decoder. The infrared transmitter can be placed in a infrared dome on me equipment, mounted behind die front panel, attached to a mouse coupled via a cable to the equipment with the decoder with die mouse placed near die receiver, or attached to a stick on miniature mouse coupled via a cable to the equipment with the decoder witii die miniature mouse attached to the device with die receiver. The equipment with die decoder would include e capability of storing or learning die infrared code protocols for the other equipment, such as a VCR, satellite receiver and a cable box.
Another embodiment of die invention includes a full function universal remote control capable of controlling various home electronic devices. The functions of die buttons of the remote control and the infrared codes needed to perform the functions are programmed remotely, such as by transmissions over telephone lines received by a microphone in the remote control.
Other objects and many of me attendant features of this invention will be more readily appreciated as die same becomes better understood by reference to the following detailed descriptions and considered in connection with die accompanying drawings in which like reference symbols designate like parts throughout die figures. Brief Descrintion of the Drawings
FIG. 1 is a schematic showing apparatus according to this invention with the code decoder means embedded in die video cassette recorder;
FIG. 2 is a schematic of die VCR embedded processors for command control and code decoding;
FIG. 3 is a schematic showing a preferred embodiment according to is invention with the code decoder means embedded in a remote controller;
FIG. 4 is a schematic of the processor embedded in the remote controller; FIG. 5 is a schematic of a universal remote controller with the code decoder means embedded in die universal remote controller;
FIG. 6 is a flow graph of the G-code decoding technique; FIG. 7 is a flow graph of the G-code encoding technique; FIG. 8 is an illustration of part of a television calendar according to this invention; FIG. 9 is a flow chart for decoding for cable channels; FIG. 10 is a flow chart for encoding for cable channels;
FIG. 11. is a flow graph of die G-code decoding for cable channels including conversion from assigned cable channel number to local cable carrier channel number; FIG. 12 is a means for decoding including a stack memory; FIG. 13 is a flow chart for program entry into stack memory; FIG. 14 is an operation flow chart for sending programs from remote control to main unit VCR;
FIG. 15 is a perspective view of an apparatus for using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of me invention;
FIG. 16 is a front view of the apparatus of FIG. 15 showing a forward facing light emitting diode;
FIG. 17 is a perspective view of die apparatus of FIG. 15 placed in a mounting stand; FIG. 17A is a front elevational view of the apparatus of FIG. 15 placed in the mounting stand as shown in FIG. 17;
FIG. 18 is a detail of the LCD display of the apparatus of FIG. 15; FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing a manner of placing the apparatus of FIG. 15 relative to a cable box and a VCR;
FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a manner of placing the mounting stand with the apparatus of FIG. 15 mounted thereon near a cable box and VCR;
FIG. 21 is a schematic showing apparatus for using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of d e invention;
FIG. 22 is a detailed schematic showing a preferred embodiment of apparatus implementing the schematic of FIG. 21; FIG. 23 is a flow graph for program entry into the apparatus of FIG. 15;
FIG. 24 is a flow graph for review and program cancellation of programs entered into the apparatus of FIG. 15;
FIG. 25 is a flow graph for executing recorder preprogramming using compressed codes according to a preferred embodiment of die invention;
FIG. 26 is a flow graph for encoding program channel, date, time and length information into decimal compressed codes;
FIG. 27 is a flow graph for decoding decimal compressed codes into program channel, date, time and length information; FIG. 28 is an embodiment of an assigned channel number/local channel number table;
FIG. 29 block diagram of a system including a television having a G-code decoder; FIG. 30 is a schematic of a television having a G-code decoder; FIG. 31 is a schematic showing apparatus for a G-code decoder in a television having G-code decoding; FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a system including a television having a G-code decoder, a VCR, a cable box and a satellite receiver;
FIG. 33 is a block diagram of a system including a VCR having a G-code decoder, a television, a cable box and a satellite receiver;
FIG. 34 is a block diagram of a system including a cable box having a G-code decoder, a television, a VCR, and a satellite receiver;
FIG. 35 is a block diagram of a system including a satellite receiver having a G-code decoder, a television, a VCR, and a cable box;
FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing a cable box placed on top of a VCR having an infrared transmitter behind die front panel which communicates to the cable box infrared receiver via reflection;
FIG. 37 is a perspective view showing a cable box placed on top of a VCR having an infrared transmitter inside a infrared dome on the top of die VCR which communicates to the cable box infrared receiver;
FIG. 38 is a perspective view of a VCR having an infrared transmitter inside a mouse coupled via a cable to die VCR with die mouse placed near the cable box infrared receiver; and
FIG. 39 is a perspective view of a VCR having an infrared transmitter inside a miniature mouse coupled via a cable to the VCR with the miniature mouse stuck onto die cable box near die infrared receiver. FIG. 40 is a perspective view of a second apparatus for using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of die invention. FIG. 41 is a bottom view of the apparatus of FIG. 41 showing a microphone hole and two electrical contact holes.
FIG. 42 shows the apparatus of FIG. 40 being used in conjunction with a telephone. FIG. 43 is a schematic showing second apparatus for using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of die invention.
FIG. 44 is an alternate schematic showing second apparatus for using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of the invention. FIG. 45 is a perspective view of an apparatus for programming remote controls with memories according to a preferred embodiment of the invention. FIG. 46 is a perspective view of die apparatus of FIG. 45 with die hinged lid in the open position.
FIG. 47 is a rear view of the apparatus of FIG. 45 showing telephone and computer input/output ports.
FIG. 48 is a bottom view of the apparatus of FIG. 15 showing electrical contact access holes.
FIG. 49 is a perspective view of die apparatus of FIG. 45 coupled to an apparatus according to FIG. 15.
FIG. 50 is a perspective view of die apparatus of FIG. 45 coupled to an apparatus according to FIG. 40. FIG. 51 is a schematic showing apparatus for programming remote controls with memories according to a preferred embodiment of the invention.
FIG. 52 is a schematic showing die electronic connection between apparatus for programming remote controls witii memories according to a preferred embodiment of the invention and a personal computer. FIG. 53 is a perspective view of a complete universal remote control capable of using conφressed codes for recorder preprogramming according to a preferred embodiment of die invention.
FIG. 54 is a front view of the apparatus of FIG. 53.
FIG. 55 is a side view of die apparatus of FIG. 53 showing a microphone opening and an electrical contact access hole.
FIG. 56 is a rear view of the apparatus of FIG. 53.
FIG. 57 is a back view of the apparatus of FIG. 53 showing electrical contact access holes.
FIG. 58 is a block schematic of an embodiment of die apparatus of FIG. 53. FIG. 59 is a block schematic of an alternative embodiment of the apparatus of
FIG. 53. FIG. 60 is a flow chart of the process of remotely programming the apparatus of
FIG. 53 over telephone lines.
FIG. 61 shows the apparatus of FIG. 53 in its upright position, resting on a coffee table on the apparatus' rear surface. FIG. 62 is a cross sectional view taken along line 7-7 of FIG. 53.
FIG. 63 is a cross sectional view taken along line 8-8 of FIG. 53. FIG. 64 is a cross sectional view taken along line 9-9 of FIG. 53. FIG. 65 is a perspective view of an alternative embodiment of the remote control of FIG. 53. FIG. 66 is a top view of the remote control of FIG. 65.
FIG. 67 is a side view of die remote control of FIG. 65. FIG. 68 is a front view of the remote control of FIG. 65. FIG. 69 is a rear view of the remote control of FIG. 65. FIG. 70 is a bottom view of the remote control of FIG. 65. FIG. 71 is a perspective view of a second alternative embodiment of the remote control of FIG. 53.
FIG. 72 is a top view of die remote control of FIG. 71. FIG. 73 is a side view of die remote control of FIG. 71. FIG. 74 is a rear view of die remote control of FIG. 71. FIG. 75 is a front view of the remote control of FIG. 71.
FIG. 76 is a bottom view of the remote control of FIG. 71. FIG. 77 is a block diagram of a system for downloading initial setup data from a remote site, through a remote control, to a video recorder capable of controlling other devices, according to a preferred embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flow diagram of a method for downloading initial setup data from a remote she, through a remote control, to a video recorder, according to a preferred embodiment.
FIG. 79 is a block diagram for an alternative embodiment of the system shown in FIG. 77. FIG. 80 is a block diagram for an alternative embodiment of die system shown in
FIG. 77.
FIG. 81 is a block diagram for an alternative embodiment of the system shown in FIG. 77.
FIG. 82 is a diagram of a system for downloading television program data to a telephone downloadable programmer for control of video recorders and channel selectors.
FIG. 83 is a flow diagram showing the operation of die system shown in FIG. 82. Detailed Description
Referring now to the drawings, and more particularly, to FIG. 1, there is shown an apparatus for using encoded video recorder/player timer preprogramming information 10 according to this invention. The primary components include a remote controller 12 and a video cassette recorder/player witii G-code decoder 14, which can be controlled by remote controller 12 via a command signal 16. The remote controller 12 can have a number of keys, which include numerical keys 20, G-code switch 22, function keys 24, program key 26 and power key 27. There are means in the remote controller 12 that interprets each key as it is pressed and sends die proper command signal 16 to the VCR via an infrared light emitting diode 28. Except for the G-code switch 22 on die remote controller 12 in FIG. 1, the remote controller 12 is essentially the same as any other remote controller in function. The G-code switch 22 is provided just to allow the user to lock die remote controller 12 in the G-code mode while using a G-code, which is the name given to the compressed code which is the encoded CDTL information, to perform timer preprogramming. A G-code consists of 1 to 7 digits, although more could be used, and is associated with a particular program. A user would look up die G-code in a program guide and just enter the G-code on die remote controller 12, instead of die present state of the art, which requires that the user enter the actual channel, date, time and length (CDTL) commands.
In order to understand die advantages of using a G-code, it is helpful to describe the best of die current state of die art, which is "on screen programming" with direct numerical entry. This technique involves about 18 keystrokes and die user has to keep switching his view back and forth between the TV screen and die remote controller while entering the CDTL information. This situation may be akin to a user having to dial an 18 digit telephone number while reading it from a phone book. The number of keys involved and die switching back and forth of die eye tend to induce errors. A typical keying sequence for timer recording using on-screen CDTL programming is as follows:
PROG 2 1 15 07 30 2 08 002 04 PROG
The first program (PROG) key 26 enters the programming mode. Then a sequence of numerical keys 20 are pushed. The 2 means it is timer recording rather than time setting. The 1 means the user is now entering the settings for program 1. The 15 is the date. The
07 is starting hour. The 30 is a starting minute. The 2 means pm. The next sequence
08 00 2 is the stopping time. The 04 is channel number. Finally, the PROG is hit again to exit the program mode.
By contrast, this command could have been "coded" and entered in a typical G-code sequence as follows: PROG 1138 PROG. To distinguish that the command is a coded G-code, die G-code switch 22 should be turned to the "ON" position. Instead of having a switch, a separate key "G" can be used. The G-code programming keystroke sequence would then be: G 1138 PROG.
The use of a G-code does not preclude "on-screen" confirmation of the program information mat has been entered. When die keystrokes "PROG 1138 PROG" are entered with die G-code switch in the "ON" position, the G-code would be decoded and die television could display the following message:
PROGRAM DATE START TIME STOP TIME CHANNEL
1138 15 7:30 PM 8:00 PM 4
In order for the G-code to be useful it must be decoded and apparatus for that purpose must be provided. Referring to FIG. 1, a video cassette recorder/player with G-code decoder 14 is provided to be used in conjunction with remote controller 12. The command signal 16 sent from the remote controller 12 is sensed by the photodiode 32 and converted to electrical signals by command signal receiver 30. The electrical signals are sent to a command controller 36, which interprets the commands and determines how to respond to die commands. As shown in FIG. 1, it is also possible for the command controller 36 to receive commands from the manual controls 34 that are normally built into a VCR. If the command controller 36 determines that a G-code was received then the G-code will be sent to the
G-code decoder 38 for decoding. The G-code decoder 38 converts the G-code into CDTL information, which is used by die command controller 36 to set the time/channel programming 40. Built into the VCR is a clock 42. This is normally provided in a VCR and is used to keep track of the date and time. The clock 42 is used primarily by the time channel programming 40 and the G-code decoder 38 functions. The time/channel programming 40 function is set up with CDTL information by the command controller 36. When die proper date and time is read from clock 42, then the time/channel programming 40 function turns die record/playback 44 function "ON" to record. At die same time the tuner 46 is tuned to die proper channel in the television signal 18. Later die user can command die record/playback 44 function to a playback mode to watch the program via the television monitor 48.
An alternate way to control the recorder is to have the command controller 36 keep all die CDTL information instead of sending it to die time/channel programming 40. The command controller would also keep track of the time by periodically reading clock 42. The command controller would then send commands to die time/channel programming 40 to turn on and off the recorder and to tuna 46 to cause it to tune to the right channel at the right time according to the CDTL information. The clock 42 is also an input to G-code decoder 38, which allows the G-code decoding to be a function of the clock, which lends a measure of security to the decoding technique and makes it harder to copy. Of course this requires that the encoding technique must also be a function of the clock. A possible realization of the command controller 36 and die G-code decoder 38 is shown in FIG. 2. The command controller 36 function can be realized with a microprocessor 50, a random access memory 52 and a read only memory 54, which is used for program storage. The input/output 56 function is adapted to receive commands from the command signal receiver 30, the manual controls 34 and die clock 42, and to output signals to a display 35, the clock 42, and die time/channel programming 40 function. If die microprocessor 50 interprets that a G-code has been received, then the G-code is sent to microcontroller 60 for decoding. The microcontroller 60 has an embedded random access memory 62 and an embedded read only memory 64 for program and table storage. The clock 42 can be read by both microprocessor 50 and microcontroller 60. An alternative to having microcontroller 60 perform the G-code decoding is to build die G-code decoding directly into me program stored in read only memory 54. This would eliminate the need for microcontroller 60. Of course, othα hardware to perform the G-code decoding can also be used. The choice of which implementation to use is primarily an economic one. The blocks in FIGS. 1 and 2 are well known in the prior art and are present in the following patents: Fields, Patent No. 4,481,412; Scholz, Patent No. 4,519,003; and Brugliera, Patent No. 4,631,601. For example, clock 42 is analogous to element 7 in Scholz and dement 17 in Brugliera. Other analogous elements are: command signal receiver 30 and Scholz 14 and Brugliera 12; tuner 46 and Scholz 6 and Brugliera 10; time channel programming 40 and Scholz 8, 11 and Brugliera 16; record & playback 44 and Scholz 1,
2, 4; command controller 36 and Scholz 11, 10 and Brugliera 12; microprocessor 50 and Fields 27; RAM 52 and Fields 34; ROM 54 and Fields 33; manual controls 34 and Scholz 15, 16; and remote controller 12 and Scholz 26 and Brugliera 18.
FIG. 3 illustrates an alternate preferred embodiment of this invention. In FIG. 3 a remote controller witii embedded G-code decoder 80 is provided. The remote controller with embedded G-code decoder 80 is very similar to remote controller 12, except for the addition of die G-code decoder 82. Note that it is also possible in any remote controller to provide a display 84. The remote controller with embedded G-code decoder 80 would be used in conjunction with a normal video cassette recorder/player 70, which would not be required to have an embedded G-code decoder. The numerals for the subelements of video cassette recorder/player 70 are die same as described above for the video cassette recorder/player with G-code decoder 14 and have the same function, except for die absence of G-code decoder 38. This preferred embodiment has the advantage that it can be used in conjunction with VCRs that are presently being used. These do not have a G-code decoding capability. Replacing their remote controllers with ones that have this capability built-in can vastly improve the capability to do timer preprogramming for a modest cost. FIG. 4 illustrates a possible realization of die G-code decoder 82 built into die remote controller with embedded G-code decoder 80. A microcontroller 60 can be used as before to decode die G-code, as well as interface with die display 84, a clock 85, the keypad 88 and die light emitting diode 28. Alternately, other hardware implementations can be used to perform the G-code decoding. The clock 85 is provided in the remote controller 80 so that the G-code decoder 82 can be made to have die clock 85 as one of its inputs. This allows the G-code decoding to be a function of die clock 85, which lends a measure of security to the decoding technique and makes it harder to copy.
The remote controller with embedded G-code decoder as described above would send channel, date, time and length information to die video cassette recorder/player 70, which would use die CDTL information for tuning into the correct channel and starting and stopping the recording function. The remote controller may have to be unique for each different video cassette recorder/player, because each brand or model may have different infrared pulses for each type of information sent such as the channel number keys and start record and stop record keys. The particular infrared pulses used for each key type can be called the vocabulary of die particular remote controller. Each model may also have a different protocol or order of keys that need to be pushed to accomplish a function such as timer preprogramming. The protocol or order of keys to accomplish a function can be called sentence structure. If there is a unique remote controller built for each model type, then die proper vocabulary and sentence structure can be built directly into die remote controller. An alternate to having the remote controller with embedded G-code decoder send channel, date, time and length information to die video cassette recorder/player 70, is to have the remote controller with embedded G-code decoder perform more operations to simplify the interfacing problem with existing video cassette recorder/players. In particular, if die remote controller not only performs the G-code decoding to CDTL, but also keeps track of time via clock 85, then it is possible for the remote controller to send just channel, start record and stop commands to die video cassette recorder/player. The channel, start and stop are usually basic one or two key commands, which means there is no complicated protocol or sentence structure involved. Thus, to communicate with a diverse set of video cassette recorder/player models it is only necessary to have memory within the remote controller, such as ROM 64 of FIG. 4, for storing the protocol for all die models or at least a large subset. The G-code would be entered on die remote controller as before and decoded into channel, date, time and length information, which would be stored in the remote controller. Via dock 85, the time would be checked and when the correct time arrives the remote controller would automatically send out commands to die VCR unit for tuning to the correct channel and for starting and stopping the recording. It is estimated mat only two (2) bytes per key for about 15 keys need to be stored for the vocabulary for each video cassette recorder/player model. Thus, to cover 50 models would only require about 30*50 = 1500 bytes of memory in the remote controller. It would be necessary to position die remote controller properly with respect to the VCR unit so that the infrared signals sent by die remote controller are received by the umt.
Another preferred embodiment is to provide a universal remote controller 90 with an embedded G-code decoder. Universal remote controllers provide the capability to mimic a number of different remote controllers. This reduces die number of remote controllers that a user needs to have. This is accomplished by having a learn function key 94 function on die universal remote controller, as shown in FIG. 5. If die learn function key 94 is pushed in conjunction with another key, the unit will enter into the learn mode. Incoming infrared (IR) pulses from the remote controller to be learned are detected by die infrared photodiode 96, filtered and wave-shaped into recognizable bit patterns before being recorded by a microcontroller into a battery-backed static RAM as the particular IR pulse pattern for that particular key. This is done for all the individual keys.
An example of more complex learning is die following. If the learn function key 94 in conjunction with die program key 26 are pushed when die G-code switch is "ON" , the unit will recognize that it is about to record die keying sequence of a predetermined specific example of timer preprogramming of the particular VCR involved. The user will then enter the keying sequence from which die universal remote controller 90 can then deduce and record die protocol of die timer preprogramming sequence. This is necessary because different VCRs may have different timer preprogramming command formats.
If keys are pushed without die learn function key 94 involved, die microcontroller should recognize it is now in the execute mode. If me key is one of die direct command keys, die microcontroller will read back from its static RAM die stored pulse sequence and send out command words through die output paralld I/O to pulse the output light emitting diode 28. If the key is the PROG key and the G-code switch is "OFF", then the microcontroller should recognize the following keys up to die next PROG key as a timer preprogramming CDTL command and send it out through die light emitting diode 28. If die G-code switch 22 is set to "ON" and die program key 26 is pushed, die microcontroller should recognize the following keys up to die next PROG key as a G-code command for timer preprogramming. It will decode die G-code into channd, date, start time and length
(CDTL) and the microcontroller will then look up in it's static RAM "dictionary" die associated infrared pulse patterns and concatenate them togedier before sending them off through the output parallel I/O to pulse the light emitting diode 28 to send die whole message in one continuous stream to the VCR.
FIG. 4 illustrates a possible realization of the G-code decoder 92 that could be built into the universal remote controller with embedded G-code decoder 90. A microcontroller 60 can be used as before to decode the G-code, as well as for interfacing with die input/output functions including die photodiode 96. Alternately, the G-code decoding can be performed with other hardware implementations.
The universal remote controller can also be used in another manner to simplify the interfacing problem with existing video cassette recorder/players. In particular, if die universal remote controller performs not only the G-code decoding to CDTL, but also keeps track of time via clock 85 in FIG. 4, then it is possible for die universal remote controller to send just channel, start record and stop commands to die video cassette recorder/player, which as explained before, are usually basic one key commands, which means there is no complicated protocol or sentence structure involved. Thus, to communicate with a divαse set of video cassette recorder/player models it is only necessary for the universal remote controller to "learn" each key of the remote controller it is replacing. The G-code would be entered on die universal remote controller as before and decoded into channel, date, time and length information, which would be stored in die universal remote controller. Via clock 85, the time would be checked and when die correct time arrives the universal remote controller would automatically send out commands to the VCR unit for tuning to the correct channel and for starting and stopping the recording. It would be necessary to position the universal remote controller properly with respect to the VCR unit so that the signals sent by the universal remote are received by the VCR unit.
There are a number of ways mat the G-code decoding can be performed. The most obvious way is to just have a large look up table. The G-code would be the index.
Unfortunately, this would be very inefficient and result in a very expensive decoder due to die memory involved. The total storage involved is a function of die number of total combinations. If we allow for 128 channds, 31 days in a month, 48 on the hour and on die half hour start times in a twenty four hour day, and 16 length selections in half hour increments, then die total number of combinations is 128x31x48x16 = 3,047,424. This number of combinations can be represented by a 7 digit number. The address to the table would be die 7 digit number. In the worst case, this requires a look up table that has about 4,000,000 rows by 15 to 16 digital columns, depending on die particular protocol. These digital columns would correspond to die CDTL information required for "on screen programming". Each digit could be represented by a 4 bit binary number. Thus, die total storage number of bits required for die look up table would be about 4,000,000x16x4 = 256,000,000. The present state of the art has about 1 million bits per chip. Thus, G-code decoding using a straightforward table look up would require a prohibitively expensive number of chips.
Fortunately, there are much more clever ways of performing the G-code decoding.
FIG. 6 is a flow diagram of a preferred G-code decoding technique. To understand G-code decoding, it is easiest to first explain die G-code encoding technique, for which FIG. 7 is the flow chart. Then the G-code decoding technique, which is the reverse of the G-code encoding will be explained.
The encoding of die G-codes can be done on any computer and is done prior to preparation of any program guide mat would include G-codes. For each program that will be printed in the guide, a channd, date, time and length (CDTL) code 144 is entered in step
142. Step 146 separately reads die priority for the channel, date, time and length in die priority vector storage 122, which can be stored in read only memory 64. The priority vector storage 122 contains four tables: a priority vector C table 124, a priority vector D table 126, a priority vector T table 128 and a priority vector L table 130. The channd priority table is ordered so that the most frequently used channels have a low priority number. An example of the data that is in priority vector C table 124 follows.
channd 4 7 2 3 5 6 11 13 priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Generally the dates of a month all have an equal priority, so the low number days in a month and die low number priorities would correspond in the priority vector D table as in the following example.
date 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
The priority of die start times would be arranged so that prime time would have a low priority number and programs in the dead of the night would have a high priority number. For example, the priority vector T table would contain:
time 6:30pm 7:00pm 8:00pm 7:30pm priority 0 1 2 3 ... An example of die data that is in the priority vector L table 130 is the following:
length of program (hours) 0.5 1.0 2.0 1.5 3.0 priority 0 1 2 3 4 ...
Suppose die channd date time length (CDTL) 144 data is 5 10 19.00 1.5, which means channel 5, lOtii day of die month, 7:00 PM, and 1.5 hours in length, then for die above example the Cp,Dp,TF,Lp data 148, which are the result of looking up the priorities for channel, date, time and length in priority tables 124, 126, 128 and 130 of FIG. 7, would be 4 9 1 3. Step 150 converts C-,OT,Tr,Lr data to binary numbers. The number of binary bits in each conversion is determined by die number of combinations involved. Seven bits for C,, which can be denoted as C, C6 C- C Cj C„ would provide for 128 channels. Five bits for D., which can be denoted as D3 D4 D3 D2 D„ would provide for 31 days in a month. Six bits for Tp, which can be denoted as Tβ T, T4 T3 T2 T„ would provide for 48 start times on each half hour of a twenty four hour day. Four bits for length, which can be denoted as
L4 Lj Lj L„ would provide for a program length of up to 8 hours in half hour steps. Together there are 7+5+6+4 = 22 bits of information, which correspond to 2**22 = 4,194,304 combinations.
The next step is to use bit hierarchy key 120, which can be stored in read only memory 64 to reorder the 22 bits. The bit hierarchy key 120 can be any ordering of die 22 bits. For example, the bit hierarchy key might be:
L, Cj ... T2 Cj T, C, L, D3 D4 D3 D2 D, 22 21 ... 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Ideally the bit hierarchy key is ordered so that programs most likely to be the subject of timer preprogramming would have a low value binary number, which would eliminate keystrokes for timer preprogramming the most popular programs. Since all the date information has equal priority, then the D5 D4 D3 D2 D, bits are first. Next T, Ct L, are used, because for whatever date it is necessary to have a time channd and length and T, C, L, are the most probable in each case due to the ordering of die priority vectors in priority vector storage 122. The next bit in the hierarchy key is determined by die differential probabilities of die various combinations. One must know the probabilities of all the channels, times and lengths for this calculation to be performed. For example, the probability for channels may be:
channel 4 7 2 3 5 6 11 13 priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 probability(%) 5 4.3 4 3 2.9 2.1 2 1.8
The probabilities for times might be:
time 6:30pm 7:00pm 8:00pm 7:30pm priority 0 1 2 3 probability( ) 8 7.8 6 5
And, die probabilities for lengths might be:
length of program (hours) 0.5 1.0 2.0 1.5 3.0 priority 0 1 2 3 4 ... probability(%) 50 20 15 5 4
The probabilities associated with each channel, time and length, as illustrated above, are used to determine die proper ordering. Since the priority vector tables are already ordαed by die most popular channd, time, and length, the ordα in which to select between the various binary bits for one table, for example selecting between the C, C- C3 C j
Cj bits, is already known. The C, bit would be selected first because as die lowest ordα binary bit it would sdect between the first two entries in the channd priority table. Then the Cj bit would be sdected and so on. Similarly, the T, and Lt bits would be used before any of the other time and length bits. A combination of die C„ T„ L, and D3 D4 D, D2 D, bits should be used first, so that all the information is available for a channd, date, time and length. The D3 D4 D, D2 D, bits are all used because die date bits all have equal priority and all are needed to specify a date even if some of the bits are binary zαo. At this point the bit hierarchy key could be:
T, C, L, D3 D4 D, D2 D,
The first channd binary bit C, by itsdf can only sdect between 21 = 2 channds, and die first two channels have a probability percent of 5 and 4.3, respectively. So die differential probability of C, is 9.3. Similarly, the diffαential probability of T, is 8 + 7.8 = 15.8, and the diffαential probability of L, is 50 + 20 = 70. If the rules for ordering the bit hierarchy key are strictly followed, then die first 8 bits of die bit hierarchy key should be ordered as:
C, T, L, D3 D D3 D2 D„
because L, has the highest diffαential priority so it should be next most significant bit after D3, followed by Tt as the next most significant bit, and then C, as die next most sigmficant bit. Notice that the bit hierarchy key starts with the least significant bit D„ and then is filled in with die highest differential probability bits. This is for the purpose of constructing the most compact codes for popular programs.
The question at this point in e encoding process is what should die next most significant bit in the hierarchy key be: T2, C2, or L**.. This is again determined by die differential probabilities, which can be calculated from the above tables for each bit. Since we are dealing with binary bits, the C^ in combination with C, selects between 22 = 4 channds or 2 more channds ov C, alone. The diffαential probability for C_ is then the additional probabilities of these two additional channels and for die example this is: 4 + 3 = 7. In a similar manner C, in combination with C, and C_ selects between 23 = 8 channels or 4 = 2(M> more channds ov the combination of C, and . So the diffαential probability of C, is the additional probabilities of these four additional channels and for die example this is: 2.9 + 2.1 + 2 + 1.8 = 8.8. In a similar mann , the diffαential probabilities of T2 and
Lj can be calculated to be 6 + 5 = 11 and 15 + 5 = 20, respectively. Once all the differential probabilities are calculated, die next step is determining which combinations of bits are more probable.
Now for the above example, which combination is more probable: T2 with L„ or C-. with T, L„ or L*, witii T, C,. This will determine the next bit in the key. So, which is greater: 11x9.3x70= 7161; 7x15.8x70= 7742; or 20x15.8x9.3= 2938.8? In this case the combination with the greatest probability is 7x15.8x70= 7742, which corresponds to * with T, L,- So, is selected as die next bit in the bit hierarchy key.
The next bit is selected in the same way. Which combination is more probable: C- with Ti L,, or T2 with or C- and -[-,, or L- with C, or Cz and T,. For die example shown, which has the greatest probability: 8.8x15.8x70= 9732.8; llx(9.3+7)x70= 12551; or 20x(9.3+7)xl5.8= 5150.8? In this case the combination with die greatest probability is llx(9.3+7)x70= 12551, which corresponds T2 witii or and L,. So, T2 is selected as the next bit in the bit hiαarchy key. This procedure is repeated for all die differential probabilities until the entire key is found.
Alternately, die bit hierarchy key can be just some arbitrary sequence of the bits. It is also possible to make the priority vectors interdependent, such as making the leng h priority vector dependent on different groups of channels. Another technique is to make the bit hiαarchy key 120 and the priority vector tables 122, a function of clock 42, as shown in FIG. 7. This makes it very difficult for die key and therefore the coding technique to be duplicated or copied. For example it is possible to scramble the date bits in the bit hierarchy key 120 as a function of the clock. Changing the order of the bits as a function of the clock would not change the effectiveness of die bit hiαarchy key in reducing the number of binary bits for the most popular programs, because the date bits all are of equal priority. This could be as simple as switching the D, and D3 bits periodically, such as every day or week. Thus the bit hierarchy key 120 would switch between
Figure imgf000022_0001
Clearly other permutations of die bit hiαarchy key as a function of the clock are possible.
The priority vector tables could also be scrambled as a function of the clock. For example, the first two channds in the priority channd table could just be swapped periodically. If this technique is followed, then the C, of 148 in FIG. 7 would change as a function of die clock 42. For example,
channd 4 7 2 3 5 6 11 13 priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
would change periodically to:
channd 7 4 2 3 5 6 11 13 priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
This would be a fairly subtle security technique, because a decodα that was otherwise correct would only fail if those first two channels wαe being used. Other clock dependencies are also possible to provide security for the coding technique.
Howevα it is derived, die bit hiαarchy key 120 is determined and stored. In step 154 the binary bits of Cr,Dp,Tp,L are rearranged according to die bit hierarchy key 120 to create one 22 bit binary numbα. Then die resulting 22 bit binary numbα is converted to decimal in the convert binary number to decimal G-code step 156. The result is G-code 158. If the priority vector and die bit hierarchy key are well matched to die viewing habits of the general population, then it is expected that the more popular programs would require no more than 3 or 4 digits for die G-code.
Now that the encoding technique has been explained die decoding technique is just reversing the coding technique. This is done according to the flow chart of FIG. 6. This is the preferred G-code decoding that can be built into G-code decoder 38 in VCR 14 or the remote controller G-code decoders 82 and 92 in FIGS. 3 and 5.
The first step 102 is to entα G-code 104. Next the G-code 104 is converted to a 22 bit binary numbα in step 106. Then the bits are reordαed in step 108 according to the bit hierarchy key 120 to obtain the reordαed bits 110. Then the bits are grouped togedier and converted to decimal form in step 112. As this point we obtain C^D^T^L, data 114, which are the indices to the priority vector tables. For the above example, we would have at this step the vector 4 9 1 3. This Crrr,Lr data 114 is then used in step 116 to look up channd, date, time, and length in priority vector storage 122. The CDTL 118 for the example above is 5 10 19.00 1.5, which means channd 5, 10th day of die month, 7:00 PM, and 1.5 hours in length.
If die coding technique is a function of die clock men it is also necessary to make the decoding technique a function of die clock. It is possible to make the bit hierarchy key 120 and die priority vector tables 122, a function of clock 42, as shown in FIG. 6. This again makes it very difficult for the key and thαefore the coding technique to be duplicated or copied. It is also possible to have die decoding and encoding techniques dependent on any other predetermined or preprogrammable algorithm.
Although the above G-code encoding and decoding technique is a preferred embodiment, it should be understood that thαe are many ways to perform the intent of die invention which is to reduce die numbα of keystrokes required for timer preprogramming.
To accomplish this goal tiiαe are many ways to perform die G-code encoding and decoding. Thαe are also many ways to make me encoding and decoding technique more secure besides just making the encoding and decoding a function of the clock. This security can be the result of any predetermined or preprogrammed algorithm. It is possible in me G-code coding and decoding techniques to use mixed radix numbα systems instead of binary numbers. For example, suppose that there are only 35 channels, which would require 6 binary bits to be represented; howevα, 6 binary bits can represent 64 channels, because 26 = 64. The result is that in a binary numbα system there are 29 unnecessary positions. This can have the effect of possibly making a particular G-code longα than it really needs to be. A mixed radix numbα system can avoid this result. For example, for the case of 35 channds, a mixed radix numbα system with die factors of 71 and 5° can represent 35 combinations without any empty space in the code. The allowed numbers for the 7' factor are 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. The allowed numbers for the 5° factor are 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, and 6. For example, digital 0 is represented in the mixed radix number system as 00. The digital number 34 is represented in the mixed radix number system as 46, because 4*7' +6*5° = 34. The major advantage of a mixed radix number system is in prioritizing the hiαarchy key. If the first 5 channels have about equal priority and the next 30 are also about equal, then the mixed radix numbα system allows the two tiers to be accurately represented. This is not to say that a mixed radix number system is necessarily preferable. Binary numbers are easiα to represent in a computer and use of a fixed radix number system such as binary numbers allows a pyramid of prioritization to be easily represented in the hierarchy key.
Anothα feature that is desirable in all of the embodiments is the capability to key in the G-code once for a program and then have die resulting CDTL information used daily or weekly. Ordinarily die CDTL information is discarded once it is used. In the case of daily or weekly recording of die same program, the CDTL information is stored and used until it is cancelled. The desire to repeat the program daily or weekly can be performed by having a "WEEKLY" or "DAILY" button on die remote controllα or built into the VCR manual controls. Anothα way is to use one key, such as the PROG key and push it multiple times within a certain period of time such as twice to specify daily or thrice to specify weekly. For example, if the G-code switch is "ON" and die G-code for die desired program is 99 then daily recording of the program can be selected by the following keystrokes:
"PROG 99 DAILY PROG" or by
"PROG 99 PROG PROG"
The G-code 99 would be converted to CDTL information, which would be stored and used daily in this case. The recording would begin on the date specified and continue daily after that using die same channd time and length information. A slight twist is that daily recording could be automatically suspended during the weekends, because most daily programs are diffαent on Saturday and Sunday.
Once a daily or weekly program is set up, then it can be used indefinitely. If it is desired to caned a program and if there is a "CANCEL" button on the remote controller or manual control for the VCR, then one way to cancel a program (whethα it is a normal
CDTL, daily or weekly entry) is to key in die following:
"PROG xx CANCEL", whαe xx is die G-code
Again as before thαe are alternate ways of accomplishing this. If "on screen programming" is available, then the programs that have been selected for timer preprogramming could be reviewed on die screen. The daily and weekly programs would have an indication of their type. Also the G-codes could be displayed along with die corresponding CDTL information. This would make it quite easy to review the current "menu" and either add more programs or cancel programs as desired.
A television calendar 200 according to this invention is illustrated in FIG. 8. As shown, the television calendar has multiple day of year sections 202, multiple day sections 204, multiple time of day sections 206, channd identifiers 208, and descriptive program identifiers 210, including the name of the program, arranged in a mann that is common in television guide publications. Arranged in relation to each channd identifiα is a compressed code indication 212 or G-code containing the channel, date, time and length information for that entry in the television calendar. FIG. 8 shows how easy it is to perform timer programming. All one needs to do is find die program one wants to watch and enter die compressed code shown in the compressed code indication. This is in contrast to having to deal with all the channd, date, time and length entries separately. At least the channd, date and time are explicitly stated in the television guide. The length is usually only available by searching the guide to find die time of day section 206 whαe a new program begins and then performing some arithmetic to find the length of die program. Using die compressed G-code avoids all these complications. For cable television programs, thαe is an additional issue that needs to be addressed for die compressed G-code to be useful. In a normal television guide, CDTL information is available for all die normal broadcast channds in the form of numbers including die channel numbers, such as channd 4 or 7. Howevα, for cable channds like HBO, ESPN etc., only the names of the channds are provided in most television listings. The reason for this is that in some metropolitan areas, such as Los Angeles, ihαe may be only one (1) edition of television guide, but thαe may be quite a few cable carriers, each of which may assign HBO or ESPN to different cable channd numbers. In ordα for a compressed code such as the G-code to be applicable to the cable channds as published by a wide area television guide publication, die following approach can be used. First, all die cable channds would be permanently assigned a unique number, which would be valid across the nation. For example, we could assign ESPN to cable channd 1, HBO as cable channd 2, SHO as cable channd 3, etc. This assignment would be published by die television guide publications.
The video cassette recordα apparatus, such as the remote controllα, the VCR unit or both, could then be provided with two (2) extra modes: "set" and "cable channd" . One way of providing the user interface to these modes would be to provide two (2) extra buttons: one called SET and one called CABLE CHANNEL. The buttons could be located on the video cassette recorder unit itself or located on a remote controller, as shown in FIGS. 1, 3 and 5, whαe SET is element 168 and CABLE CHANNEL is element 170. Of course, other user interfaces are possible.
Next, the television viewer would have to go through a one-time "setting" procedure of his VCR for all the cable channels that he would likely watch. This "setting" procedure would relate each of the assigned numbers for each cable channd to the channd number of the local cable carriα. For example, suppose that the local cable carrier uses channel 6 for ESPN, then cable channd number 1 could be assigned to ESPN, as shown in the following table.
Cable Channel Assigned Cable Channel Numhα in
Name Channel Numbα the Local Cable Carriα
ESPN 1 6
HBO 2 24
SHO 3 23
DIS 8 25
The usα could perform the "setting" procedure by pushing the buttons on his remote controllα as follows:
SET 06 CABLE CHANNEL 1 PROGRAM SET 24 CABLE CHANNEL 2 PROGRAM
SET 23 CABLE CHANNEL 3 PROGRAM
SET 25 CABLE CHANNEL 8 PROGRAM
The "setting" procedure would create a cable channel address table 162, which would be loaded into RAM 52 of command controller 36. For the above example, the cable channel address table 162 would have die following information.
CABLE CHANNEL ADDRESS TABLE 162
1 6
2 24
3 23
• •
8 25
After die "setting" procedure is performed, die TV viewα can now sdect cable channds for viewing by the old way: e.g., pushing the key pad buttons 24 will sdect HBO.
He can also do it die new way: e.g., by pushing CABLE CHANNEL 2, which will also sdect HBO. The advantage of die new way is that the television guide will publish [C2] next to the program description, so die viewα will just look up the assigned channel numbα identifiα instead of having to remember mat HBO is local cable channd 24. When the CABLE CHANNEL button is pushed, command controllα 36 knows that it will look up the local cable channd number in cable channd address table 162 to tune the VCR to the correct channd.
For timer preprogramming and for using the conφressed G-code, a way to differentiate between broadcast and cable channds is to add an eighth channd bit, which would be set to 0 for normal broadcast channds and 1 for cable channds such as HBO. This eighth channd bit could be one of the low ordα bits such as the third bit C, out of the eight channd bits, so that die number of bits to specify popular channds is minimized, whether they be normal broadcast or cable channels. For a normal broadcast channd, die 7 othα bits can be decoded according to priority vector C table 124. For a cable channd, the 7 othα bits can be decoded according to a separate cable channd priority vector table 160, which could be stored in ROM 54 of microcontrollα 36. The cable channd priority vector table can be set ahead of time for the entire country or at least for an area covered by a particular wide area television guide publication. A television guide that carries the compressed code known as the G-code will now print the cable channel information as follows:
6:30 pm [C2] HBO xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx (4679) xxxxxxxxxx(program description)xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
The [C2] in front of HBO rαninds die viewα tiiat he needs only to push CABLE CHANNEL 2 to select HBO. The (4679) is the G-code indication for this particular program.
FIG. 8 shows a section of a television guide. The cable channels all have an assigned cable channd number 188 in front of the cable channd mnemonic. Othα than that the cable channd information is arranged die same as the broadcast channels with a compressed G-code 212 associated witii die channel. For timα preprogramming, the viewα need only enter the numbα 4679 according to the unit's G-code entry procedure, e.g., PROG 4679 PROG. The G-code decodα unit will decode this G-code into "cable channd 2" and will also signal die command controllα 36 with a cable channd signal 164, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, because die extra channd bit will be "1" which distinguishes that the G-code is for a cable channd; then, since the association of "cable channd 2" with channd 24 has been established earliα in the "setting" procedure, die command controllα, if it has received a cable channd signal, will immediately look up 2 in the cable channd address table 162 to translate it to cable channd 24, which will be used as the recording channd at the appropriate time. By associating the G-code with the assigned cable channd number rathα than the local cable channd number, the G-code for that program will be valid in die whole local area, which may have many different cable carriers each of which may have different local cable channd numbers.
To include die cable channd compressed G-code feature, die decoding and encoding algorithms are as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, respectivdy. The encoding should be explained first before die decoding. The primary change in FIG. 10 from FIG. 7 is that a cable channel priority vector table 160 has been added and is used in look up priority step 180 if a cable channd is being encoded. Also if a cable channd is being encoded tiien die cable channel bit is added in the correct bit position in the convert CJD.T-L. to binary numbers step 182. This could be bit Ca, as discussed before. The bit hierarchy key could be determined as before to compress the number of bits in the most popular programs; howevα, it needs to be 23 bits long to accommodate die cable channd bit. The maximum compressed G-code length could still be 7 digits, because 223= 8,388,608. The decoding is shown in FIG. 9 and is just the reverse of the encoding process.
After step 108, test cable channel bit 174 is added and effectively tests the cable channel bit to determine if it is a " 1 " . If so then die command controller 36 is signaled via cable channel signal 164 of FIGS. 1 and 2 that the CDTL 118 that will be sent to it from G-code decoder 38 is for a cable channel. Then the command controller knows to look up die local cable carriα channd numbα based on die assigned cable channel numbα. In step 176 of FIG. 9, the priority vector tables including die cable channel priority vector table 160 are used to look up die CDTL 118 information.
An alternate to having the command controllα receive a cable channel signal 164 is for the G-code decodα to perform all of the decoding including die conversion from assigned cable channd number to local cable carrier numbα. This would be die case for the remote controllα implementation of FIG. 3. FIG. 11 shows the implementation of me entire decode algorithm if mis step is included. All that needs to be added is convert assigned channd to local cable carriα channd step 166, which performs a look up in cable channd address table 162, if the cable channd bit indicates that a cable channd is involved. Step 166 effectivdy replaces step 174 in FIG. 9.
Anothα issue that needs addressing is the number of programs that can be preprogrammed. Since die G-code greatly simplifies the process of entering programs, it is likely that die user will quickly learn and want to enter a large numbα of programs; however, some existing VCRs can only store up to four (4) programs, while some can store as many as eight. Thus, die user may get easily frustrated by die programming limitations of the VCR.
One approach to this problem, is to perform the compressed G-code decoding in the remote controllα and provide enough memory thαe to store a large number of programs, e.g., 20 or 40. The remote controllα would have the capability of transferring periodically several of these stored programs at a time to the VCR main unit. To provide this capability, extra memory called stack memory 76 is required inside the remote unit, as shown in FIG. 12, which othα than that is identical to FIG. 4. Stack memory 76 can be implemented with a random access memory, which may in fact reside in the microcontrollα itself, such as RAM 62.
The stack memory 76 is whαe new entry, insertion & ddetion of timer preprogramming information is carried out. It is also whαe editing takes place. The top memory locations of die stack, for example the first 4 locations, correspond exactly to the available tirnα preprogramming memory in the VCR main unit. Whenevα the top of the stack memory is changed, die new information will be sent ov to the VCR main umt to update it. FIG. 13 shows the sequence of events when the user enters a G-code program on the keypad of die remote controller. For illustration purposes, suppose the VCR main unit can only handle four (4) programs. Suppose also that die stack memory capacity is 20 timer preprograms. Referring to the flow chart in FIG.13, when the user enters a G-code in step 230, the microcontrollα 60 first decodes it into the CDTL information in step 234 and displays it on die display unit with die additional word "entered" also displayed. The microcontrollα men enters the decoded program into the stack memory in step 236.
If this is the first program entered, it is placed at the top location of the stack memory . If there are already programs in the stack memory, the newly entered program will first be provisionally placed at die bottom of the stack memory. The stack memory will then be sorted into the correct temporal ordα in step 240, so that the earliest program in time will appear in the top location and die last program in time will be at the bottom. Notice that the nature of the temporally sorted stack memory is such that if stack memory location n is altered, then all die locations below it will be altered. For example, suppose die stack memory has six (6) entries already temporally ordαed, and a new entry is entered whose temporal ordering places it in location 3 (1 being the top location). If this entry is placed into location 3, information which was in location 3, 4, 5, 6 will be shifted to locations 4, 5, 6, and 7. Locations 1 and 2 will remain unchanged.
The microcontrollα 60, after doing die temporal ordering, checks in step 242 whether the first n entries have changed from before, whαe for die current example n equals 4. In this case, since a new program has been entered into location 3, what used to be in location 3 now moves to location 4. Since the VCR's main unit program menu of 4 entries should correspond exactly to location 1 through 4 of die stack memory, entries 3 and 4 on die VCR main unit must now be revised. The microcontrollα thαefore sends out die new entries 3 and 4 to die main unit, in step 244 of FIG. 13. If the newly entered program, aftα temporal ordering, gets entered into location 5, then entries 1 through 4 have not changed from before and die microcontrollα will not send any message to the VCR main unit and die microcontrollα will just resume monitoring the clock 85 and die keyboard 88 as per step 246. It is assumed mat when die usα enters the G-code in step 230, the remote controllα is pointed at the VCR main unit. The odier steps of FIG. 13 happen so fast that the changes are sent in step 244 while the remote controllα is still being pointed at die VCR main unit.
If the user decides to delete a program in step 232, the ddetion is first carried out in the stack memory. If the first 4 entries are affected, the microcoπtrollα will send the revised information ova to die VCR main un . If die first 4 entries are not affected, then again the remote controllα unit will not send anything. The deletion will only change the lowα part of the stack (lowα meaning location 5 to 20). This new information will be sent over to the VCR main unit at the appropriate time. In the meantime, the VCR main unit will be carrying out its timer programming function, completing its timing preprogramming entries one by one. By the time all 4 recording entries have been completed, die stack in the remote must send some new entries over to "replenish" the VCR main unit (if the stack has more than 4 entries). The real time clock 85 in the remote controller unit is monitored by the microcontrollα to determine when die programs in the main unit have been used up. Referring to the flow chart in FIG. 14, the microcontrollα periodically checks the clock and die times for die programs at the top of the stack in step 250 (say the first 4 entries), which are identical to the VCR's main unit's menu. If on one of the periodic checks, it is determined that the recording of die main unit's menu is complete, then if there are more entries in the stack, which is tested in step 252, the display unit will be set to a blinking mode or display a blinking message in step 258 to alert the usα to send more programs. Next time the usα picks up the remote unit, the blinking will remind him that the VCR main unit's program menu has been completed and it is time to replenish the VCR main umt with program entries stored in the remote. The usα simply picks up die remote and points it towards die VCR main unit and presses "ENTER". This will "pop" the top of die stack memory in step 260, i.e., pop all the entries in the stack up by four locations. The microcontrollα will then send die new "top of die stack" (i.e., top four entries) ov to the VCR main unit in step 262. This process will repeat until die whole stack has been emptied. Anothα preferred embodiment of an apparatus for using compressed codes for recordα preprogramming is die instant programmα 300 of FIG. 15. The instant programmer 300 has number keys 302, which are numbered 0 through 9, a CANCEL key 304, a REVIEW key 306, a WEEKLY key 308, a ONCE key 310 and a DAILY (M-F) key 312, which are used to program die instant programmα 300. A lid normally covers othα keys, which are used to setup the instant programmα 300. When lid 314 is lifted, die following keys are revealed: SAVE key 316, ENTER key 318, CLOCK key 320, CH key 322, ADD TIME key 324, VCR key 326, CABLE key 328, and TEST key 330. Othα features of instant programmα 300 shown on FIG. 15 are: liquid crystal display 350 and red warning light emitting diode 332. The front devation view FIG. 16 of instant programmα 300 shows front infrared (IR) diode 340 mounted on the front side 338. By placing instant programmα
300 in front of the equipment to be programmed such as video cassette recordα 370, cable box 372, and television 374, as shown in FIG. 19, die front infrared QR) diode 340 can transmit signals to control program recording. An IR transparent cover 336 covers additional IR transmission diodes, which are explained bdow. FIG. 18 shows a detail of die liquid crystal display 350. Certain text 354 is at various times visible on die display and tiiαe is an entry area 356. Time bars 352 are displayed at die bottom of die display and their function is described below. A companion dement to the instant programmer 300 is the mounting stand 360, shown in FIG. 17, which is designed to hold instant programmer 300 between left raised side 362 and right raised side 364. The instant programmα 300 is slid between left raised side 362 and right raised side 364 until coming to a stop at front alignment flange 365, which is at the front of mounting stand 360 and connected across left raised side 362 and right raised side
364, as shown in FIG. 17A. Together elements 362, 364 and 365 provide alignment for instant programmα 300 so that IR transparent covα 336 and the IR diodes 342, 344, 46 and 348, shown in FIG. 17 are properly aligned for transmission, when the instant programmer is used as shown in FIG. 20. The mounting stand 360 has an alignment flange 366, which has die purpose of aligning die back edge of mounting stand 360, which is defined as the edge along which alignment flange 366 is located, along die front side of a cable box or VCR, or similar umt as shown in FIG. 20. When aligned as shown in FIG. 20, the mounting stand 360 aligns the instant programmα 300 so tiiat die left IR diode 342, down IR diode 344, two back IR diodes 346 and right IR diode 348, as shown in FIG. 17, are in position to transmit signals to video cassette recordα 370 and cable box 372, as necessary. If die VCR and/or cable box functions are located within the television 374 itsdf, tiien die instant programmα 300 could be positioned to transmit to me television 374, eithα in me mann of FIG. 19 or by placing the mounting stand on top of die television in me manner of FIG. 20.
By using mounting stand 360, die usα only need to align die mounting stand 360, and the instant programmα 300 once with die equipment to be programmed rathα than having die usα remember to keep me instant programmα 300 in the correct location to transmit via front infrared (IR) diode 340, as shown in FIG. 19. Current experience with various remote controllers shows that it is difficult at best to keep a remote controllα in a fixed location, for example, on a coffee table. The mounting stand 360 solves this problem by locating the instant programmα 300 with die equipment to be controlled. The left IR diode 342, down
IR diode 344, two back IR diodes 346 and right IR diode 348 are positioned to transmit to the left, downward, backward, and to die right. The downward transmitter assumes that mounting stand 360 will be placed on top of die unit to be programmed. The left and right transmission allows units to die left or right to be programmed. The backward transmission back IR diodes 346 are provided so that signals can bounce off walls and otiiα objects in me room. The front IR diode 340, die left IR diode 342, die right IR diode 348 and die down IR diode 344 are implemented witii 25 degree emitting angle diodes. Two back IR diodes are provided for greater enαgy in that direction and are implemented witii 5 degree emitting angle diodes, which focus die enαgy and provide for greater reflection of die IR energy off of walls or objects in die room.
Most VCRs and cable boxes can be controlled by an infrared remote controllα; howevα, different VCRs and cable boxes have diffαent IR codes. Although tiiαe are literally hundreds of different models of VCRs and cable boxes, there are fortunately only tens of sets of IR codes. Each set may have a few tens of "words" that represent the diffαent keys required, e.g., "power", "record", "channel up", "channel down", "stop", "0", "1", "2" etc. For die purpose of controlling the VCR and cable box to do recording, only the following "words" are required: "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", "power",
"record", "stop". The IR codes for these words for all the sets are stored in the memory of the instant programmα 300, which is located in microcomputer 380 of FIGS. 21 and 22. During setup of the instant programmα 300, the usα interactively inputs to the instant programmα 300 the type and modd of his VCR and cable box. The correct set of IR codes will be recalled from memory during die actual control process. In the case whαe the usα only has a VCR, the infrared (IR) codes for that particular VCR will be recalled to control the VCR. In die case whαe die usα has a VCR and a cable box, the IR codes "powα", "record", "stop" will be recalled from the set that corresponds to die VCR whereas the IR codes for "0" through "9" will be recalled from the set that corresponds to die cable box. The reason is that in mis case, the cable box controls the channd switching. Hence the channd switching signals "0" through "9" must be sent to die cable box instead of die VCR.
Initially, die usα performs a setup sequence. First, the usα looks up the numbα corresponding to die modd/brand of VCR to be programmed in a table, which lists the VCR brand name and a two digit code. Then witii the VCR tuned to Channd 03 or Channd 04, whichever is normally used, die user turns the VCR "OFF". Thai die usa presses the VCR key 326. When die display shows VCR, die user presses die two-digit code looked up in the VCR modd/brand table (for example 01 for RCA). Hie user points the instant programmer 300 at the VCR and then presses ENTER key 318. The red warning light emitting diode 332 will flash while it is sending a test signal to the VCR. If the VCR turned "ON" and changed to Channd 09, me usα presses the SAVE key 316 and proceeds to die set clock step. If the
VCR did not turn "ON" or turned "ON" but did not change to Channd 09 the usα presses ENTER key 318 again and waits until red warning light emitting diode 332 stops flashing. The instant programmα 300 sends die next possible VCR code, while the red warning light emitting diode 332 is flashing. If the VCR turns "ON" and changed to Channd 09 the usα presses SAVE key 316, otherwise the usα presses ENTER key 318 again until the VCR code is found that works for die VCR. The display shows "END" if all possible VCR codes for that brand are tried. If so, die usα presses VCR key 326 code 00 and then ENTER key 318 to try all possible codes, for all brands, one at a time.
Once die proper VCR code has been found and saved, die next setup step is to set the dock on instant programmα 300. First, the usα presses the CLOCK key 320. When the display shows: "YR:", die user presses the year (for exanφle 90), then presses ENTER key 318. Then the display shows "MO:", and the usα presses the month (for example 07 is July), and tiien presses ENTER key 318. This is repeated for "DA:" date (for example 01 for the 1st), "Hr:" hour (for example 02 for 2 o'clock), "Mn:" minute (for example 05 for 5 minutes), and "AM/PM:" 1 for AM or 2 for PM. After this sequence, the display will show "SAVE" for a few seconds and then the display will show the current time and date that have been entered. It is no longer necessary for die user to set the clock on his/her VCR.
Next, if the instant programmer 300 is also to be used as a cable box controller, then die setup steps are as follows. First, the number corresponding to die model/brand of cable box (converter) to be controlled is looked up in a cable box model brand table, that lists cable box brands and corresponding two digit codes. The VCR is tuned to Channd 03 or 04 and turned "OFF". Then the cable box is tuned to Channd 02 or 03, whichevα is normal, and left "ON". Then die CABLE key 328 is pressed. When die display shows: "CA B-:" the usα alters the two digit code looked up in cable box modd brand table, points the instant programmer 300 at the cable box (convαter) and presses ENTER key 318. The red warning light emitting diode 332 will flash while it is sending a test signal to the cable box. If the cable box changed to Channd 09: then die usα presses SAVE key 316; howevα, if the cable box did not change to Channd 09 the usα presses ENTER key 318 again and waits until red warning light emitting diode 332 stops flashing, while the next possible code is sent. This is repeated until me cable box changes to Channd 09 and when it does die usα presses SAVE key 316. If the display shows "END" then the usα has tried all possible cable box codes for that brand. If so, the usα presses cable code 00 and tiien ENTER key 318 to try all possible brand's codes, one at a time.
For some people (probably because they have cable or satellite), the channels listed in their television guide or calendar are diffαent from the channels on their television or cable. If they are different, the usα proceeds as follows. First, the usα presses the CH key 322. The display will look like this: "Guide CH TV CH". Then the user presses the channd printed in the television guide or calendar (for example, press 02 for channel 2), and then die usα presses the channd numbα mat die printed channd is received on through his/h local cable company. Then the usα presses ENTER key 318. This is repeated for each channd listing mat is on a diffαent channel than the printed channd. When this procedure is finished die user presses SAVE key 316.
Typically die television guide or calendar in the area will have a chart indicating the channd numbα that has been assigned to each Cable and broadcast channel, for example: HBO, CNN, ABC, CBS, NBC, etc. This chart would correspond, for example, to die left two columns of FIG. 28. For example, suppose the television guide or calendar has assigned channd 14 to HBO but die usα's cable company delivers HBO on channd 18. Since the channd numbers are diffαent, die user needs to use the CH key 322. The usα will press the CH button (the two blank spaces under die display "Guide CH" will flash). The user then presses 14. (now the two blank spaces under die display "TV CH" will flash). The user then presses 18 and then ENTER key 318. This is repeated for each channel that is different. When finished, the user presses SAVE key 316.
After the channel settings have been saved, die user may review die settings by pressing CH key 322 and tiien REVIEW key 306. By repeated pressing of die REVIEW key
306 each of the set channels will scroll onto the display, one at a time.
Then the user can test to make sure that the location of die instant programmer 300 is a good one. First, the usα makes sure that the VCR is turned "OFF" but plugged in and makes sure that the cable box (if there is one) is left "ON". Then the user can press the TEST key 330. If thαe is only a VCR, then if the VCR turned "ON", changed to channel
09 and started recording, and then turned "OFF", then die VCR controllα is located in a good place.
If thαe is also a cable box, then if the VCR turned "ON", die cable box turned to channel 09 and die VCR started recording, and then the VCR stopped and turned "OFF", then die instant programmα 300 is located in a good place.
To operate the instant programmα 300, the VCR should be left OFF and die cable box ON. The usα looks up in the television guide die compressed code for die program, which he/she wishes to record. The compressed code 212 is listed in the television guide, as shown in FIG. 8. The television guide/calendar that would be used with this embodiment would have die same elements as shown on FIG. 8 except that element 188 of FIG. 8 is not required. The compressed code 212 for die program selected by die usα is entered into the instant programmα 300 by using the numbα keys 302 and tiien die usα selects how often to record die program. The usα presses the ONCE key 310 to record die program once at the scheduled time, or the usα presses the WEEKLY key 308 to record die program every week at the same scheduled time until cancdled or the user presses the DAILY (M-F) key
312 to record die program each day Monday through Friday at die same scheduled time until cancdled. This is most useful for programs such as soapbox operas that air daily, but not on die weekend. To confirm the entry, die instant programmα 300 will immediately decode die compressed code and display the date, channd and start time of the program entered by the usα. The length of die entered program is also displayed by time bars 352 that run across die bottom of me display. Each bar represents one hour (or less) of program.
Then the usα just needs to leave die instant programmα 300 near die VCR and cable box so that commands can be transmitted, and at die right time, the instant programmer 300 will turn "ON" the VCR, change to the correct channel and record die program and then turn the VCR "OFF". The usα must just make sure to insert a blank tape.
The REVIEW key 306 allows the usα to step through the entered programs. These are displayed in chronological ordα, by date and time. Each time the REVIEW key 306 is pressed, the next program is displayed, until "END" is displayed, when all the entered programs have been displayed. If the REVIEW key 306 is pressed again the display will return to the current date and time.
If the user wishes to cancel a program, then the user presses REVIEW key 306 until the program to cancel is displayed, tiien the user presses CANCEL key 304. The display will say "CANCELLED". Also, any time the user presses a wrong number, pressing die CANCEL key 304 will allow the usα to start ova.
Certain television programs, such as live sports, may run over the scheduled time slot. To ensure that the entire program is recorded, die usα may press the ADD ΗME key 324 to increase the recording length, even while the program is being recorded. The usα presses die REVIEW key 306 to display die program, then presses ADD ΗME key 324. Each time ADD TIME key 324 is pressed, 15 minutes is added to the recording length.
When the current time and date is displayed, die amount of blank tape needed for the next 24 hours is also displayed by die time bars 352 that run across the bottom of the display. Each bar represents one hour (or less) of tape. The usα should check this before leaving the
VCR unattended to ensure that tiiαe is enough blank tape.
Each time a program code is entered, the instant programmer 300 automatically checks through all the entries to ensure that thαe is no ovαlap in time between the program entries. If the usα attempts to enter a program that ovαlaps in time with a program previously entered, then the message "CLASH" appears. Then, as summarized by step 432 of FIG. 23, the usα has the following options: 1) if die usα wishes to leave the program previously entered and forget about the new one, die usα does nothing and after a short time delay, die display will return to show die current time and date; 2) if die user wishes the program which starts first to be recorded to its end, and tiien to record die remainder of the second program, then the usα presses ONCE key 310, DAILY (M-F) key 312, or WEEKLY key 308 again
(whichevα one the user pushed to enter the code). If die programs have the same starting time, then die program most recendy entered will be recorded first. If on being notified of die "CLASH", the usα decides die new program is more important than die previously entered program, then die user can caned the previously entered program and then re-enter the new one.
In some locations, such as in some parts of Colorado, die cable system airs some channels three (3) hours later/earliα than the times listed in the local television guide. This is due to time differences depending on whether die channel is received on a east or west satellite feed. For die usα to record die program 3 hours later than the time listed in the television guide die procedure is as follows. First the usα enters the code for die program and thai presses SAVE key 316 (for +) and then presses ONCE key 310, DAILY (M-F) key 312, or WEEKLY key 308, as desired. For die user to record die program 3 hours earlier than the time listed in the television guide die procedure is as follows. First the user enters the code for the program and then presses ENTER key 318 (for -) and tiien presses ONCE key 310, DAILY (M-F) key 312, or WEEKLY key 308, as desired. The instant programmer 300 will display die time that the program will be recorded, not die time shown in the television guide.
There are certain display messages to make the instant programmer 300 more usα friendly. The display "LO BATT" indicates that the batteries need replacement. "Err: ENTRY" indicates an invalid entry during setup. "Err: CODE" indicates tiiat die program code numbα entered is not a valid number. If this is displayed die usα should check the television guide and reenter the numbα. "Err: DATE" indicates the user may have: tried to sdect a daily recording (Monday to Friday) for a Saturday or Sunday program; tried to select weekly or daily recording for a show more than 7 days ahead, because the instant programmα 300 only allows the weekly or daily recording option to be used for the current weeks' programs (±7 days); or tried to entα a program that has already ended. "FULL" indicates that die stack storage of the programs to be recorded, which is implemented in random access memory (RAM) inside die instant programmα 300 has been filled. The usα could tiiαi caned one or more programs before entering new programs. "EMPTY" indicates thαe are no programs entered to be recorded. The number of programs to be recorded mat can be stored in the instant programmα 300 varies depending on die density of RAM available and can vary from 10 to more.
FIG. 21 is a schematic of me circuitry needed to implement die instant programmα 300. The circuity consists of microcomputer 380, oscillator 382, liquid crystal display 384, key pad 386, five way IR transmitters 390 and red warning light emitting diode 332. The microcomputer 380 consists of a CPU, ROM, RAM, I/O ports, timers, counters and clock. The ROM is used for program storage and die RAM is used among otiier purposes for stack storage of the programs to be recorded. The liquid crystal display 384 is display 350 of FIGS. 15 and 18. The key pad 386 implements all the previously discussed keys. The five way IR transmitters 390 consists of front infrared (ER) diode 340, left IR diode 342, down IR diode 344, two back IR diodes 346 and right IR diode 348. FIG. 22 shows die detailed schematic of die instant programmα 300 circuitry and previously identified dements are identified by die same numbers. The microcomputer can be implemented with a NEC μPD7530x part, which can interface directly witii the display, die keypad, the light emitting diodes and die oscillator. The 25 degree IR diodes can be implemented with NEC 313AC parts and die 5 degree IR diodes can be implement witii Litton 2871C IR diodes. The flow charts for the program that is stored in the read only memory (ROM) of the microcomputer 380 mat executes program entry, review and program cancellation, and record execution are illustrated in FIGS. 23, 24, and 25, respectively. The FIG. 23 for program entry, which process was described above, consists of die following steps: display current date, time and time bars step 402, which is the quiescent state of instant programmer 300; scan keyboard to determine if numeric decimal compressed code entered step 404; display code as it is entered step 406; usα checks if correct code entαed step 408 and user presses CANCEL key 304 step 428; usα advances or retards start time by three hours by pressing
SAVE key 316 or ENTER key 318 step 410; user presses ONCE key 310, WEEKLY key 308 or DAILY key 312 key step 412; microcomputer decodes compressed code into CDTL step 414; test if conflict with stored programs step 416, if so, display "CLASH" message step 420, usα presses ONCE key 310, WEEKLY key 308 or DAILY key 312 step 422, then accommodate conflicting entries step 432, as described above in die discussion of die
"CLASH" options, and entry not saved step 424; set display as date, channd, start time and duration (time bars) for ONCE, or DA, channd, start time and duration for DAILY, or day of week, channd, start time and duration for WEEKLY step 418; user presses ADD ΗME key 324, which adds 15 minutes to record time step 426; usα checks display step 430; enter program on stack in chronological ordα step 434 whαein die stack is a portion of die RAM of microcontrollα 380; and calculate length of tape required and update time bars step 436.
The FIG. 24 flow chart for review and cancdlation, which process was described above, consists of the following steps: display current date, time and time bars step 402;
REVIEW key 306 pressed step 442; test if stack empty step 444, display "EMPTY" step 446, and return to current date and time display step 448; display top stack entry step 450; user presses ADD ΗME key 324 step 452 and update time bars step 460; usα presses REVIEW key 306 step 454 and scroll stack up one entry step 462; user presses CANCEL key 304 step 456 and display "CANCELLED" and caned program step 464; and usα does nothing step 458 and wait 30 seconds step 466, whαein die 30 second timeout can be implemented in the timers of microcomputer 380.
The FIG. 25 flow chart for record execution, which is die process of automatically recording a program and which was described above, consists of the following steps: compare start time of top program in stack memory with current time step 472; test if three minutes before start time of program step 474; start red warning LED 332 blinking for 30 seconds step 476; display channd, start time and blinking "START" message step 478, is correct start time reached step 480 and send powα ON signal to VCR and display "REC" message step 482; test if a cable box is input to VCR step 484, send channd switching signals to VCR step 486 and send channd switching signals to cable box step 488; send record signals to VCR step 490; compare stop time with current time step 492, test if stop time reached step 494 and display "END" message step 496; send stop signals to VCR step 498; send power OFF signal to VCR step 500; and pop program stack step 502. FIG. 26 is a flow chart of the method for encoding channel, date, time and length
(CDTL) into decimal compressed code 510. This process is done "off-line" and can be implemented on a general purpose computer and is done to obtain die compressed codes 212 that are included in the program guide or calendar of FIG. 8. The first step in the encoding method is the enter channel, date, time and length (CDTL) step 512 wherein for a particular program the channd, date, start time and length CDTL 514 of the program are entered. The next step is the look up assigned channd number step 516, which substimtes an assigned channel numbα 522 for each channel 518. Often, for example for network broadcast channds, such as channd 2, die assigned channd numbα is die same; howevα, for a cable channd such as HBO a channd numbα is assigned and is looked up in a cable assigned channd table 520, which would essentially be the same as the first two columns of the table of FIG. 28. Next, the look up priority of channd, date and time/length in priority vector tables step 524 performs a look up in priority vector channd (C) table 526, priority vector date (D) table 528 and priority vector time/length (TL) table 530 using die indices of channd, date and time/length, respectivdy, to produce the vector C,, Dr, TL, 532. The use of a combined time/length (TL) table to set priorities recognizes that thαe is a direct rdationship between these combinations and die popularity of a program. For example, at 6:30 PM, a short program is more likely to be popular than a 2 hour program, because it may be the dinnα hour. The channd priority table is ordαed so that die most frequently used channels have a low priority number. An example of the data diat is in the priority vector C table 526 follows.
channd 4 7 2 3 5 6 11 13 priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Generally the dates of a month all have an equal priority or equal usage, so the low number days in a month and die low numbα priorities would correspond in the priority vector D table 528 as in the following example.
date 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
The priority of die start times and length of the programs could be arranged in a matrix that would assign a priority to each combination of start times and program lengths so that more popular combinations of start time and length would have a low priority number 1 and less popular combinations would have a high priority number. For example, a partial priority vector T/L table 530 might appear as follows.
Priority TL Table
TIME 6:30pm 7:00pm 7:30pm 8:C Length (hrs)
.5 8 4 7 10
1.0 12 15 13 18
1.5 20 19 17 30
10
Suppose the channd, date, time and length (CDTL) 514 data is channel 5,
February 10, 1990, 7:00PM and 1.5 hours in length, then the C,,Dr,ll-, data 532 for the above example would be 4 9 19. The next step is the convert C,, Dp, TL-, to binary numbers and concatenate them into one binary numbα step 534, resulting in the data word j5 ...TL2TL,...C2C,...D2D1 536. For the example given above, converting the
...TL2TL1...C2C,...D2Dj 536 word to binary would yield the three binary numbers: ...0010011, ...0100, ...01001. The number of binary bits to use in each conversion is determined by die numbα of combinations involved. This could vary depending on die implementation; howevα one preferred embodiment would use eight bits for C,, denoted as 0 C, C, C6 Cj C Cj Cj C„ which would provide for 256 channels, five bits for D,, which can be denoted as D3 D D3 D2 D„ would provide for 31 days in a month, and fourteen bits for TL→, denoted as TL,4... TL, TLj TL,, which would provide for start times spaced every 5 minutes ova 24 hours and program lengths in increments of 5 minute lengths for programs up to 3 hours in length and program length in increments of 15 minute lengths for programs 5 from 3 to 8 hours in length. This requires about 288*(36+20) = 16,128 combinations, which are provided by die 2**14 = 16,384 binary combinations. Altogethα thαe are 8+5+ 14 = 27 bits ofiιιforπ-ationTL,4...TL3TLICl...C2C1Ds...D2D1. For die above example padding each number with zeros and then concatenating them would yield die 27 bit binary number: 000000000100110000010001001. Q The next step is to use bit hierarchy key 540, which can be stored in read only memory 64 to perform the reordα bits of binary number according to bit hierarchy key step 538. As described previously, a bit hierarchy key 540 can be any ordering of die ...TL2TL,...C2C,...D2D1 536 bits and in general will be selected so that programs most likely to be the subject of timα preprogramming would have a low value compressed code 212, 5 which would minimize keystrokes. The ordαing of the bit hiαarchy key can be determined by die differential probabilities of die various bit combinations as previously discussed. The details of deriving a bit hiαarchy key 540 wαe described relative to bit hierarchy key 120 and die same method can be used for bit hierarchy key 540. For example, the bit hierarchy key might be:
TL, C3 ... TL,o C2 TL, C, L, D5 D D3 D2 D, 27 26 ... 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
The next step is the combine groups of bits and convert each group into decimal numbers and concatenate into one decimal numbα step 542. For example, after reordering according to the bit hiαarchy key, die code may be 000000001010010000010001001, which could be grouped as 00000000101001000,0010001001. If these groups of binary bits are converted to decimal as 328, 137 and concatenated into one decimal numbα, then die resulting decimal numbα is 328137. The last encoding step is the permute decimal numbα step 546, which permutes the decimal numbα according to permutation function 544 that is dependent on die date 548 and in particular die montii and year and provides a security feature for the codes. Aft the permute decimal number step 546, the decimal compressed code G,...G2G* 550 may, for example, be 238731. These encoded codes are then included in a program guide or calendar as in the compressed code indication 212 of FIG. 8.
FIG. 27 is a flow chart of die method for decoding a decimal compressed code into channel, date, time and length 560, which is step 414 of FIG. 23. Once the decimal compressed code G,...G2G, 564 is entered in step 562, it is necessary to invert the permutation function of steps 544 and 546 of FIG. 26. The first step is die extract day code step 566, which extracts the day code for die program in e decimal compressed code and passes the day code to step 568, which also receives the current day 574 from me clock 576, which is implemented by microcomputer 380 in FIGS. 21 and 22. The clock 576 also sends die current month and year to die permutation function 570, which is dependent on die month and year. Then step 568 performs the function: if day code is same or greatα than current day from clock, then use permutation function for month/year on clock, otherwise use permutation function for next month aftα the month on the clock and use next year if the month on the clock is Decembα. In otiiα words, since thαe is provision for preprogramming recording for one month or 31 days ahead, if die day for die program is equal to or greater than the current day of die month, men it refers to a day in die present month; otherwise, if the day for the program is less than die current day of die month, it must refer to a program in die next montii. The extract day code step 566, which must be performed before the invert permutation of decimal compressed code step 580, is accomplished by a prior knowledge of how die permute decimal numbα step 546 of FIG. 26 is performed rdative to the day code information. The selected permutation method 578 is used in the invert permutation of decimal compressed code step 580. For the example given above, the output of step 580 would be: 328137. The next step is the convert groups of decimal numbers into groups of binary numbers and concatenate binary groups into one binary number step 584, which is the inverse of step 542 of FIG. 26 and for die above example would result in the binary code:
000000001010010000010001001. Then the bit hierarchy key 588 is used in the reorder bits of binary numbα according to bit hierarchy key step 586, which inverts step 538 of FIG. 26 to obtain 000000000100110000010001001 for the above example, which is ...TL2TL,...C2C,...D2D1 582 corresponding to 536 of FIG. 26. The next step is to group bits to form three binary numbers TLv, Ck, D^ and convert to decimal numbers step 590 resulting in C,, D,, TL, 592, which for the example above would be: 4, 9, 19, and which are priority vectors for channd, day and time length, which in turn are used to look up channel, day, time and lαigth 604 in priority vector channel (C) table 598, priority vector date (D) table 600, and priority vector time/length (TL) table 602, respectively. The look up local channd numbα step 606 looks up die local channel 612 given the assigned channd numbα 608, in the assigned local channd table 610, which is setup by the usα via the CH key 322, as explained above. An example of the assigned/local channd table 610 is the right two columns of me assigned/local channd table 620 of FIG. 28. The correspondence between die assigned channd numbers, such as 624 and 628, and die local channd numbers, such as 626 and 630 is established during setup by the user. For the example, FIG. 28 shows an exact correspondence between the assigned channd numbα 5 and the local channd number 5. The last step is the append montii and year to day to form date step 614. The correct month and year are obtained from step 568 and are again dependent on whethα die day code is equal to or greater than the day from the clock or less than the day from the clock. If the day code is equal to or greater than the day from the clock, the month and year as shown on die dock are used, otherwise the next month is used and die next year is used if die clock month is Decembα. The result is the channd, date, time and length (CDTL) 618, which for the above example would be channel 5, February 10, 1990, 7:00PM and 1.5 hours in length. Anothα preferred embodiment is to embed die decoding means into a television receivα witii G-code decoder 950, as shown in FIG. 29, which is a block diagram of a system including a television receivα having a G-code decodα. The usα would use die television remote controllα 956 or controls on the television receivα to enter the code that signifies die program to be recorded. The same television remote and controls on the television would also be used to perform normal television control functions, such as channel sdection. When a G-code is entered, die television remote would send die G-code to die television with G-code decodα 950 via infrared transmitter 958. An infrared receivα 960 on the television receiver 950 would receive die transmission and send die code to d e G-code decodα 954, which would decode die code into CDTL and use this information along with a clock, which would also be embedded in the television receiver 950, to send die proper commands to die VCR 964 and cable box 966 at the appropriate time so that the selected program will be recorded at the propα time. The transmission from the television 950 would be via infrared transmitters 962, which can be placed at strategic points on the television cabinet, such as at the corners. The transmission is then received by the VCR 964 via infrared receivα 968 and die cable box 966 via infrared receivα 969.
FIG. 30 is a schematic of a television receivα having a G-code decoder. The television receivα with G-code decodα 950 would receive signals from the television remote controllα 956 via infrared receivα 960, which would send the signals to eithα command controllα 974 or directly to G-code decodα 954. The command controllα 974 may be present in the television receiver to control othα items in the television, including "on screen" functions such as displaying die channd numbα when die channd is changed. The G-code decodα 954 would decode a sent G-code and using die date and time from clock 976 would send the propα commands to die VCR 964 and cable box 966 via infrared transmitters 962. The G-codes and othα commands could also be sent to die command controllα via manual control 975. When die G-code is decoded, then die G-code and die decoded CDTL information could be displayed "on screen" as shown in on screen display 978 on television display/monitor 952. The "on screen" display is not necessary and any format is optional.
FIG. 31 is a schematic showing apparatus for a G-code decoder in a television receivα having G-code decoding. The circuitry is very similar to mat described in FIGS. 21 and 22; howevα, tiiere are interfaces to an infrared receivα 960 and command controllα 974 rather than LCD 384 and Key Pad 386. The key dements are microcontrollα 980 and oscillator 982. The interface to command controllα 974 is one preferred embodiment; another embodiment could have direct interfaces between the manual control 975, the infrared receivα 960, die television display/monitor 952 and die G-code decodα 954 without going through die intermediary command controllα 974. The television circuitry would include die capability of storing or learning e infrared code protocols for die VCR and die cable box. The warning light emitting diode 984 would be mounted on die cabinet of the television to warn that recording was about to begin in ordα to alert the usα to have die VCR ready witii tape to record.
With die "on screen" display on television display/monitor 952, die operation of the television receivα with G-code decodα 950 can be essentially identical to that described in FIGS. 23, 24 and 25 for program entry, program review and program cancellation, and execution of recordα preprogramming using compressed codes, respectively. Every that was displayed on LCD 384 would instead be displayed on the television monitor 952. The only difference would be that "on screen" would only perform step 402 (display current date, time and time bars) when die user put television remote controller 956 into a mode for G-code entry and transmission, program review or program cancellation. The method of encoding program channel, date, time and length information into decimal compressed codes of FIG. 26, the method of decoding decimal compressed codes into program channel, date, time and length information of FIG. 27, and die method of assigning channel numbers to local channel numbers as illustrated in FIG. 28 would stay the same.
Another preferred embodiment of the invention is to embed die decoding means into various equipments associated with television, such as a video cassette recordα, cable box or satellite receiver. In any system the decoding means would only have to be present in one of the equipments, such as the cable box, which would tiien at the appropriate time distribute die proper commands to die othα equipments such as a VCR and a satellite receivα to record die desired program.
FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a system including a television having a G-code decoder 950, a VCR 964, a cable box 966 and a satellite receivα 986. This system would work identically to the system shown in FIG. 29, except that a satellite receiver is included, which could receive commands via infrared receivα 988 from infrared transmitters 962 mounted on television receivα with G-code decodα 950. The commands received by die satellite receivα could include on/off commands and channel sdect commands. The satellite receiver 986 could feed a television signal to VCR 964, which would record die program and/or relay it to television display/monitor 952.
FIG. 33 is a block diagram of a system including a VCR having a G-code decoder 991, a television 952, a cable box 966 and a satellite receivα 986. The usα would use die television remote controllα 956 or controls on die VCR 991 to enter the code that signifies the program to be recorded. When a G-code is entered, die television remote would send die
G-code to VCR 991 with G-code decodα 992 via infrared transmitter 958. An infrared receivα 990 on die VCR 991 would receive the transmission and send die code to die G-code decodα 992, which would decode die code into CDTL and use this information along with a clock, which would also be embedded in the VCR 991, to send die propα commands to the cable box 966 and die satellite receivα 986 at the appropriate time so that the selected program will be recorded at the propα time. The transmission from the VCR 991 would be via infrared transmitters 994, which can be placed at strategic points on the VCR. The transmission is tiien received by die cable box 966 via infrared receivα 969 and the satellite receivα 986 via infrared receivα 988. Anothα preferred embodiment of the transmission method and apparatus between equipments is shown in FIG. 36, which is a perspective view showing a cable box 372 placed on top of a VCR 370 having an infrared transmitter 1008 behind die front panel 1009 which communicates to the cable box infrared receiver 1010 via reflection from surrounding reflecting surfaces such as walls.
Anothα preferred embodiment of the transmission method and apparatus between equipments is shown in FIG. 37, which is a perspective view showing a cable box 372 placed on top of a VCR 370 having an infrared transmitter 1014 inside a infrared dome 1012 on the top of the VCR which communicates to the cable box infrared receiver 1010 via direct communication or reflection depending on placement of the infrared receivα 1010 relative to infrared dome 1012.
Anothα preferred embodiment of the transmission method and apparatus between equipments is shown in FIG. 38, which is a perspective view of a VCR 370 having an infrared transmitter 1022 inside a mouse 1020 coupled via a cable 1018, which is plugged via plug 1017 into receptacle 1016 on the VCR. The mouse 1020 is placed near die cable box infrared receiver 1010. This embodiment is most useful when the cable box is separated from die VCR by walls of a cabinet, for example, that would prevent eithα direct or reflective infrared transmission.
Anothα preferred embodiment of the transmission method and apparatus between equipments is shown in FIG. 39, which is a perspective view of a VCR 370 having an infrared transmitter 1026 inside a stick on miniature mouse 1024 coupled via a cable 1018, which is plugged via plug 1017 into receptacle 1016 on the VCR. The stick on miniature mouse 1024 is stock onto the cable box very near the infrared receiver 1010. This embodiment is also most useful when the cable box is separated from me VCR by walls of a cabinet, for example, mat would prevent eithα direct or reflective infrared transmission.
The transmission methods and apparatus of FIGS. 36, 37, 38 and 39 could also be used witii the system of FIG. 32 to transmit information from television receiver with G-code decodα 950 to VCR 964, cable box 966 and satellite receivα 986.
FIG. 34 is a block diagram of a system including a cable box having a G-code decodα 997, a television 952, a VCR 964, and a satellite receivα 986. The usα would use die television remote controller 956 or controls on the cable box 997 to enter the code that signifies die program to be recorded. When a G-code is entered, die television remote would send die G-code to cable box 997 with G-code decodα 998 via infrared transmitter 958. An infrared receivα 996 on the cable box 997 would receive die transmission and send die code to die G-code decodα 998, which would decode die code into CDTL and use this information along witii a clock, which would also be embedded in the cable box 997, to send die proper commands to me VCR 964 and die satellite receivα 986 at the appropriate time so that the sdected program will be recorded at the propα time. The transmission from the cable box
997 would be via infrared transmitters 1000, which can be placed at strategic points on the cable box. The transmission is then received by die VCR 964 via infrared receivα 968 and the satellite receiver 986 via infrared receiver 988. The transmission methods and apparatus of FIGS. 36, 37, 38 and 39 could also be used with the system of FIG. 34 to transmit information from cable box 997 to VCR 964 and satellite receiver 986.
FIG. 35 is a block diagram of a system including a satellite receiver 1005 having a G-code decoder, a television 952, a VCR 964, and a cable box 966. The user would use die television remote controller 956 or controls on the satellite receiver 1005 to enter the code that signifies the program to be recorded. When a G-code is entered, die television remote would send die G-code to satellite receivα 1005 with G-code decoder 1004 via infrared transmitter 958. An infrared receivα 1002 on die satellite receivα 1005 would receive the transmission and send die code to die G-code decoder 1004, which would decode die code into CDTL and use this information along with a clock, which would also be embedded in die satellite receiver 1005, to send die propα commands to the VCR 964 and die cable box 966 at the appropriate time so that the selected program will be recorded at the propα time. The transmission from the satellite receivα 1005 would be via infrared transmitters 1006, which can be placed at strategic points on the satellite receiver. The transmission is then received by die VCR 964 via infrared receivα 968 and die cable box 966 via infrared receivα 969. The transmission methods and apparatus of FIGS. 36, 37, 38 and 39 could also be used with the system of FIG. 35 to transmit information from satellite receivα 1005 to VCR 964 and cable box 966. Anothα preferred embodiment of an apparatus for using compressed codes for a recorder programming is the custom programmα 1100 of FIGS. 40 and 41. The custom programmα 1100 is similar to instant programmα 300 and has number keys 1102, which are numbered 0-9, a CANCEL key 1104, a REVIEW key 1106, a WEEKLY key 1108, a ONCE key 1110 and a DAILY (M-F) key 1112, which correspond directly to keys 302-312 of instant programmer 300, and which are used to program the custom programmα 1100. Like the instant programmα 300, a lid normally covers othα keys, which are used to semp the instant custom programmα 1100. When lid 1114 is lifted, die following keys are revealed, but not shown in the drawings: SAVE key, ENTER key, CLOCK key, CH key, ADD ΗME key, VCR key, CABLE key, and TEST key. These keys of die custom programmer 1100 correspond to and opαate substantially die same as keys 316-330 of instant programmα 300, respectively. Also included in the custom programmα 1100 shown in FIG. 40 are: liquid crystal display 1134, red warning light emitting diode 1132 and IR diodes 1134, which correspond to liquid crystal display 350, red warning light emitting diode 332 and IR diodes 342-348 as shown in FIG. 15. As discussed above, when using the instant programmer 300, the consumer initially performs a semp sequence, consisting of selecting a protocol for the model/brand of VCR, setting the current real time, sdecting a protocol for the model/brand of cable box, and ^5- entering a series of channel numbα assignments. Although the instant programmer 300 makes recording of television programs extremely simple, the initial setup sequence for the instant programmer 300 is more complex and deters die use of the instant programmer by some consumers. Custom programmer 1100 includes a microphone opening 1140 through which at least one microphone inside die custom programmer 1100 can receive electronically coded audio signals that contain the information necessary for the custom programmer's initial setop and commands to store this information into the custom programmer 1100.
In order to receive these audio signals, a user may call a special phone number which could be a toll-free 800 number, a pay-pα-minute 900 number, or a standard telephone number with standard toll charges applying. The consumα can speak to an operator who orally inquires from the consumα the information regarding die consumer's VCR modd and brand, zip code, modd and brand of cable box and the newspapα or othα publication which the consumer will use to obtain the compressed codes. This is all the information needed to perform the initial semp for the custom programmer 1100. From the zip code information, the operator can determine to which cable system the consumα is connected and can combine this data with die knowledge of which publication the consumα will use to select the correct local channel mapping table for die consumα.
The operator then directs the consumα to press a designated programming key which is, in me case of the preferred embodiment, the CH key located undα lid 1114. When die CH key is pressed, die display 1134 with display die message "PHONE1 KEY2". Pressing the "2" numeric key places the custom programmer into the manual local channd table programming mode that is implemented by instant programmα 300 when CH key 322 is pressed. Pressing me " 1 " numeric key initiates the remote programming mode. The custom programmer 1100 is then ready to receive an audio signal and display 1134 displays die message "WATT".
The opαator will then direct the consumer to place the earpiece 1142 of die telephone receivα 1144 ov die microphone opening 1140 of the custom programma 1100 as generally shown in FIG. 42. The earpiece need not be placed directly against the custom programmα 1100, but may be held more than an inch away from the microphone opening with generally satisfactory results. After a pause sufficient to allow the consumα to place the telephone receivα in die proper position, die operator will initiate the downloading of die initial semp data and initial setop programming commands transmitted over die telephone line 1146 using audio signals to die consumα's custom programma 1100.
If the initial setop data is successfully transferred to die custom programmer 1100, the display 1134 of die custom programmα 1100 will display the message "DONE". If the reception of die initial semp data is not successful within a predetermined time limit, red warning light emitting diode 1132 will blink to inform the consumα to adjust die position of the telephone earpiece before anothα download of the information is attempted. After a waiting period allowing this adjustment, the initial semp data and commands are retransmitted over the telephone line. If after a predetermined number of attempts to download the initial semp information are unsuccessful, the liquid crystal display 1134 displays die message "FAIL" and die operator is again connected to die consumer allowing the operator to speak to the consumer to provide additional assistance in the positioning of the telephone earpiece.
Alternatively, a live operator could be provided by die local cable company and die initial setup information downloaded to die custom programmα 1100 by telephone line, through the existing cable of the cable system, or any othα transmission means. If local cable companies supply the live operators, the only information they would need to gather from the consumα would be the VCR brand and modd and die publication containing compressed codes that the consumα plans on using, because the local cable company would know the modd and brand of cable box installed at die consumα's location and the necessary data regarding die local channd designations for that cable system. FIGS. 43 and 44 are schematics of die circuitry needed to implement alternative embodiments of the custom programmα 1100. The circuit consists of microcomputer 1150, oscillator 1152, liquid crystal display 1154, keypad 1156, five way IR transmitters 1158 and red warning light emitting diode 1160. These components directly correspond to microcomputer 380, oscillator 382, liquid crystal display 384, keypad 386, five way IR transmitters 388 and red warning light emitting diode 332, respectivdy of instant programmer
300 and perform in die same mannα. In both FIGS. 43 and 44, earpiece 1142 genαates serial audio signals which are received by microphone 1162.
As shown in FIG. 43 die audio signals received by microphone 1162 are passed through amplifier 1164 and forwarded through a DTMF decodα circuit and into a serial port of microcomputer 1150. In me alternative circuit shown in FIG. 44, the audio signals received by microphone 1162 are passed through amplifiα 1166, through a high pass filter 1166 with a cutoff at approximately 1-5 kHz, and through a second amplifiα 1170 to a serial port of microcomputer 1150.
Altαnativdy, a dual microphone system (not shown) may be employed to increase reliability, especially when the custom programmα 1100 is to be programmed in an environment with a high levd of background noise that could interfere with die transmission of data through die single microphone acoustic means. In this system, one microphone would be placed near die telephone earpiece and die second microphone would be placed some distance away from the earpiece in ordα to pick up background noise. A audio signal cancellation circuit is then used to effectively "subtract" the background noise picked up by the second microphone from the audio data signals combined with the background noise that is picked up from the first microphone resulting in solely clean audio data signals. Anothα preferred embodiment includes a separate initial setup programmer 1200 as shown in FIGS. 45. The initial setup programmer 1200 serves the same basic function as the telephonic audio signal programming capability of custom programma 1100, namely allowing the total setup of the instant programmα 300 or custom programmer 1100 with a minimum of effort on the part of the consumα. Normally, initial setup programmers 1200 would be maintained by sellers of either die instant programmer 300 or the custom programmer 1100. The initial setup programma could be programmed with the local channd tables for the cable systems and die television calendars that publish G-codes in the vicinity of die sellα. When a customα purchases an instant programmα 300 or custom programmα 1100, the sellα can inquire where the customα lives and which television calendar the customα uses and use the initial setup programmα 1200 to download die appropriate local channd table for that customα. Furthα, the initial semp programma 1200 can also set the clock, VCR brand and modd, and cable box brand and modd for die customα's instant programma 300 or custom programma 1100. The initial setup programma 1200 includes a keyboard 1202, a display 1204, an enclosure 1206, and a lid 1208, witii hinges 1209 at the top that allow the lid to open to reveal a depression 1210 for holding instant programmers 300 and custom programmers 1100 and two dectrical contact pins 1212 as shown in FIG 46. The initial setup programmer 1200 includes a modular phone jack 1230 and a serial port 1232 as shown in FIG. 47 for transferring data to and from computers, eithα directly or ov telephone lines.
FIG. 48 shows two access holes 1213 in die bottom of the instant programmα 300 that allow access to two contact points on the to the circuit board (not shown) inside the instant programmer 300. FIG. 49 shows die initial setup programmα 1200 with an instant programmer 300 fit into die depression 1210 with die two contact pins 1212 extending upwards through die access holes 1213 in die bottom of the instant programmer 300.
FIG. 50 shows die initial setup programma 1200 with a custom programmα 1100 fit into the depression 1210 witii die two contact pins 1212 extending upwards through the access holes 1136 in the bottom of the instant programmα 300.
FIG. 51 is a schematic that shows circuitry included in the initial setup programma 1200. The initial setup programma includes a microcontroller (NEC μPD7530x) 1214, a liquid crystal display 1216, a keypad 1218, static random access memory (static RAM) 1220, computer port 1222 and programming pins 1224. Local channd tables can be transferred from a computer to die initial setup programmα 1200 and stored in static RAM 1220.
FIG. 52 is a schematic showing the data transfα connection between a personal computer 1226 and initial setup programmα 1200. Local channd table data is output from personal computer 1226 through a sαial RS-232 port with + 12 and -12 volt signals. The + 12 and -12 volt signals are transformed to TTL compatible 0 and 5 volt signals by level shifter 1228 which are input into microcontroller 1214. Level shifter 1228 can be either external or internal to initial setup programmer 1200.
Alternatively, local channel table data can be transferred to die initial semp programmer 1200 by audio signals carried over telephone lines. Further, local channel tables may be entered into die initial semp programmα through keyboard 1202 in the same manner used to program this information into either instant programmers 300 or custom programmers 1100.
Included in keyboard 1202 are "SEND CLK", "SEND CH", "SEND CAB" and "SEND VCR", which set the clock, download die local channel table, select the protocol for the cable box brand and modd and sdect the protocol for the VCR brand and model, respectivdy when they are pressed. If die information is successfully transferred to die instant programmα 300 or custom programma 1100 connected to die initial semp programma 1200, display 1204 displays the message "Tr OK", otherwise the message "Tr Err" is displayed on display 1204. Data is transferred to instant programma 300 and custom programmα 1100 through the two contact pins 1212. The first of these pins is the ground pin. The second pin connects with test point 392 as shown in FIG. 22. Test point 392 is connected to both an interrupt pin and one input/output (I/O) pin of microcomputer 380. The two pins are tied together witii an open collector method so that both input and output can be accomplished with one pin. The two contact pins 1212 connect to the same functional pins of the microcomputer 1150 of the custom programmer 1100. Data is transferred serially through these pins at a 4800 baud rate using TTL voltage levds. The instant programmα 300 and custom programmα 1100 return a low pulse of a predetermined length to the initial setup programmα 1200 when they have received all of transferred data. The invention as shown in the preferred embodiments of the custom programmer 1100 and die initial setup programmα 1200 can be readily included within televisions, video cassette recorders, cable boxes, or satellite receivers. It would not be complicated to embed eithα the custom programma 1100 or the initial semp programmα 1200 in televisions, video cassette recorders, cable boxes, and satellite receivers by adding suitable cabling or other transmission means between various video devices being used.
Anothα embodiment of the invention is the custom controllα 1300 shown in FIGS. 53-58. The custom controllα contains the same circuitry and performs the same functions as the custom programmα 1100, but also perform e functions of a complete universal remote control that can be setup automatically. The custom controllα includes on its main control surface 1302 and its auxiliary control surface 1304, buttons that perform the same functions as buttons 1102-1112, 1156 of the custom programmα, a display 1306 that pαforms the same functions as display 1134, 1154 and IR transmitters 1314 which perform the same functions as IR transmitters 1131, 1158. The custom controller can also be equipped with a lid (not shown) that covers hidden keys (not shown) used to setup the custom controller like lid 1114 on die custom programmer 1100 and lid 316 and keys 316-330 on die instant programmer 300. The keys under die lid could include SAVE, ENTER, CLOCK, CH, ADD TIME, VCR, CABLE and TEST keys like die instant programmer and die custom programmα.
The custom controllα includes a microphone 1308, which performs the same functions as microphone 1140 of the custom programma and is accessible through die microphone access hole 1309. Through the microphone, the custom controllα is programmed with all of the semp information needed to function as an instant or custom programmα (i.e., channel map, current time of day, modd/brand of cable box and VCR). Alternatively, die custom controllα can be programmed by die initial setup programmα 1200 shown in FIGS. 45-47 and 49-51 in the identical mannα described above in connection with these figures for the instant and custom programmers. Accordingly, the custom controllα includes access holes 1310 through which contact can be made with die contact pins 1212 of the semp programmα
1200.
Custom controllα 1300 also includes additional buttons on its control surfaces 1302 and 1304 that can used to operate any home dectronic device that can be controlled by an infrared remote control. These standard infrared remote controls work by transmitting diffαent IR codes for each diffαent function to be performed by die device being controlled.
Each button of the custom controller triggers the transmission of an IR code that would ordinarily be transmitted by another remote control. The actual make up of these IR codes used to control the various home dectronic equipment are described in more detail in United States Patent No. 4,623,887 to Wdles, II which is hαeby incorporated by reference. Most of the time, the custom controllα will be used to control televisions, VCRs, cable boxes, satellite receivers and hi-fi audio equipment. It is noted that both the instant programmα 300 and me custom programmα 1100 already functioned as universal remote controllers with respect to video recorders, cable boxes, televisions and satellite receivers as they can control diverse brands and modds of these devices. Howevα, the instant and custom programmers only use their universal remote features to change or sdect channels on cable boxes, video recorders, televisions and satellite receivers, begin and end recording by video recorders and turning die powα on any of these devices on and off. Nonetheless, the schematic of die custom controllα will be die same as the schematics of the custom programmer shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 except that the custom controllα includes a keypad (see 1156) with more buttons and die size requirements for the ROM and RAM in the microcomputer (see 1150) are greater than in the custom programmα. FIGS. 58 and 59 show block diagram schematics for two alternate embodiments of the custom controller. It is noted these two schematics contain the same basic components, but die utilization and minimum size of the RAMs 1324 and 1330 and ROMs 1326, 1332 are different.
The custom controller's complete universal remote feature operates as follows. Each button on the keyboard 1320, which is mounted on control surfaces 1302, 1304 of the custom controllα, is hard wired with a button code or a memory address, which is genαated each time the button is pressed. The microcomputer 1322 receives the code or address generated by die pressed button and, if die button genαates a code, consults a look-up table to retrieve an address for the button code. This look up table, as well as the instructions that control the operation of the microprocessor are stored in ROM 1326 and 1332. in the embodiment of FIG. 58, the microprocessor retrieves an IR code from RAM
1324 at the address derived from the pressed button. In this embodiment, the minimum size for the ROM is very small as the ROM only needs to store die button code look up table and microprocessor instructions. Howevα, the size of the RAM needs to be large enough to store an IR code for each button on the keyboard. In the embodiment of FIG. 59, die microprocessor consults a look-up table in RAM
1330 which contains address to ROM 1332, which contains die actual IR codes. The ROM address is retrieved from RAM at the address derived from the pressed button on keyboard 1320. The IR code is then retrieved from ROM at the address retrieved from RAM. This embodiment allows the ROM to be preprogrammed with the IR codes for a large numbα of home electronic devices. This increases the minimum size of the ROM substantially, but reduces die minimum size of die RAM because ROM addresses are generally shorter than IR codes.
In both die embodiments of FIG. 58 and 59, die IR code retrieved from eithα ROM or RAM is sent by die microprocessor to IR transmitters 1328 and is transmitted. Before die custom controllα can be used as a complete universal remote control, it must be programmed with die IR codes for the functions and the brand and models of home dectronic equipment it is going to control. Traditionally this has been done in two diffαent ways. First, die custom controllα can "learn" the IR codes for the products that it is to control from me remote controls that come with each product. The custom controllα would then also include an IR receivα (not shown) that would receive IR codes from othα remote controls and store these codes and which button on the custom controllα each code is associated with into RAM. This type of "learning" controllα usually employs the schematic of FIG. 58. The second traditional programming method involves providing a ROM that contains the IR codes for most functions of most brands and models of home electronic equipment. The user thai enters into the custom controlla what brand/modd of each type of home dectronic device that die usα plans to use the custom controllα with. In this method, for each brand and modd of home electronic equipment, die custom controllα will also include in ROM the associations between the IR codes for d e equipment and the keys on the custom controller that will trigger the sending of die IR codes. A controller utilizing this second programming method usually employs the schematic of FIG. 59.
In an alternate embodiment, the custom controller can be programmed by either of both of these methods. IR codes that are "learned" from othα remote controllers are stored in RAM 1324 shown in FIG. 58. Alternatively, ROM 1332 shown in FIG. 1332 includes IR codes for most VCRs, cable boxes, satellite receivers, televisions and stereo components and die ability to program which brand/model of these device he or she is using. In yet anothα embodiment, the embodiments shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 can be combined by including a flag bit in die data stored in RAM 1324 or 1330. If the flag bit is set, the rest of the data at that address is a ROM address which points to the location of the IR code in ROM 1332. If the flag bit is not set, the rest of the data at that address contains acmal IR code data.
In the preferred embodiment of FIGS. 53-60, though, IR codes are programmed into the memory of the custom controllα through the microphone 1308 mat is used for die semp of die channd map, cable box and VCR brand/modd and die current time of day. Using the process shown in FIG. 60, a process similar to that described above in connection with the custom programma 1100, in block 1340, the usa calls eithα a special phone numbα which could be a toll-free 800 number, a pay-pα-minute 900 number, or a standard telephone numbα with standard toll charges applying. In block 1342, die consumα speaks on the telephone to a customα service representative (representative) located at a remote site who orally inquires from me consumα the information regarding die brand and model of each home dectronic device with which die consumα wants to use custom controllα. In blocks 1346 and 1348, die consumα also has the opportunity to tell the representative which functions each button of die control surfaces 1302 and 1304 is to perform. In block 1350, the representative enters this information into a computer at die remote site. If the consumα does not have preferences regarding which button of the custom controllα is used to perform which functions, in block 1352, die representative does not enter any prefαences into the computer and die computer rdies on default associations between the buttons and functions that are previously stored in die computer.
'Once this information has been entered into the computer, in block 1354 the computer programs the custom programmα in at least two diffαent ways, depending on whethα die embodiment of FIG. 58 or 59 is used. If die embodiment of FIG. 58 is used, die computer downloads, through microphone assembly 1334 in eithα manner described above in connection witii die custom programmα and shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, all of the necessary
IR codes into RAM 1324 at die addresses associated with the buttons on the keyboard 1320 according to the consumer's expressed wishes. If this method is used, no IR codes need be stored in the ROM of the custom controller when it is manufactured.
If die embodiment of FIG. 59 is used, die ROM 1332 installed into die custom controller at manufacture is programmed with the IR codes of many different brands, models and types of home electronic devices. In this case, the computer downloads, through microphone assembly 1334, the addresses of the ROM for all of the necessary IR codes into RAM 1330 instead of downloading die IR codes themselves.
In an alternative embodiment the ROM 1332 contains default associations between IR codes and buttons of the custom controllα, so that these associations need not be downloaded unless the consumα has requested associations between buttons and IR codes that are different from die default associations. This method reduces die amount of data that needs to be sent ova die telephone lines from the remote site to the custom controlla, but can increase the size and cost of die ROM installed in die custom controllα. In die rare case where the IR codes for the device that the consumα wants to control are not included in the ROM, die computer would just download die IR codes themsdves for that device as in the first programming method described above with reference to FIG. 58.
It is noted above that in eithα of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the microphone and decoding assemblies from eithα FIG. 43 or FIG. 44 may be used. Preferably, the microphone and decoding assembly in FIG. 44 is used as it is less expensive than die assembly in FIG. 43 that uses a DTMF decodα 1166. The system shown in FIG. 44 utilizes just two single frequency signals rathα than many dual frequency signals as in a DTMF system. The first signal, a tone of approximately 3000 Hz, is used to signify a binary "one" and die second signal, a tone of approximately 500 Hz, is used to signify "zero." Since a 500 Hz signal is being used in this embodiment, the bandwidth of die 1000-5000 Hz high pass filter 1168 from FIG. 44 will have to be broadened to include 500 Hz when included in the microphone and decodα assembly 1334.
A series of these two tones are transmitted ova die telephone line, representing a binary series. A short period of no signal is included between each tone in me series of tones so that two consecutive 500 Hz or two consecutive 3000 Hz signals are interpreted as two sequential signals and not one long signal. In an alternative embodiment, the series of signal tones are sent at a predetermined clock speed.
A decodα (not shown) is included between the microphone assembly 1334 and die microprocessor 1322 that converts the 3000 Hz signals to high electrical signals and converts the 500 Hz signals to low dectrical signals that are sent to a serial input into the microprocessor. A clock signal is simultaneously sent to the microprocessor with each high or low signal. Alternatively, the initial setup programmer 1200 could be used to perform the IR code programming of the custom controller 1300 instead of using the microphone/telephone interface.
The custom controller has several additional features. First, the rear surface 1312 of the custom controllα is large enough so that custom controller can be set on the rear surface as shown in FIG. 61 and resist tipping ova. The advantage of being able to stand die custom controllα in this upright position is that IR transmitters 1314 are then at a substantial height above the surface on which the custom controllα is set. This lessens die probability that pillows, newspapers, magazines or othα debris will be inadvertently placed on top of die custom controllα as it will be difficult for debris to balance on die top of the custom controllα whαi while in the upright position. Further, stacks of pillows, magazines and other debris placed next to die custom controllα must be rathα high before they will block the IR transmissions of the custom controller. This feature is extremely important because, unlike the instant programma which can have a permanent holdα next to die cable box and VCR, away from magazines and pillows, die custom controller, having full universal remote capabilities, is designed to be used some distance away from me video equipment. Yet, to function properly as an automatic video recordα controllα, the IR transmitters of the custom controllα need to have a direct line of sight to the ER receivers of the video equipment to be controlled. The degree of enlargement of the rear surface 1312 needs to be enough so that the custom controllα is stable and resistant to being tipped ova when it is put in the upright position shown in FIG. 58. Determining an acceptable size of rear portion is based on several factors. First, it usually desirable for die length and the widtii of the rear surface to be approximately equal. If die length is significantly greater than die width (as is the case with traditional prior art universal remote controls), the controllα can be easily tipped over along die axes that span the widdi of the rear surface. Next, die proportion of die height of die controller to die length and widdi of die rear surface cannot be too great. A ratio of the length of die rear face to the height of the controllα and of die widdi of die rear face to the height of the controllα of approximately 3 to 1 or less is usually sufficient. Howevα, this ratio depends on die uniformity of the density of die custom controller and thus the centα of gravity. If the uppα portions of die custom controllα (when it is in die upright position) are more dense than the lower portions, die center of gravity will be high and die ratio of the widdi and length of the rear surface will need to be reduced. On die othα hand, if die lower portions are more dense, the center of gravity will be lowα and die ratio can be safely increased. One way die center of gravity is iowαed in the custom controllα is by placing the batteries 1316, which are comparativdy very dense, very near die rear surface. Another factor in the stability of the custom controller in the lateral location of the custom controller's center of gravity. The closer the center of gravity is to being directly above the center of the rear surface when the custom controller is in the upright position, the more stable the custom controllα will be. It is noted that the upper portion of embodiment of the custom controllα shown in FIGS. 53-58 is off center. This moves the center of gravity away from the center of rear surface slightly, but adds to die aesthetic appearance of the custom controllα.
The shape of the rear surface is not particularly relevant, but rathα the shortest distance across the rear surface. On the othα hand, die shape of the back surface of the custom controllα is significant. Preferably, the back surface is semicircular or substantially semicircular. The closα the back surface is to a semicylindrical shape, the more comfortable the custom controllα is for a consumα to hold, as the cylindrical shape fits better into human hands.
Anothα feature of die custom controllα is its two control surfaces 1302 and 1304. Auxiliary control surface 1304 is designed to include buttons that will be used most often when the custom controllα is in its upright position, such as volume up and down controls. The angle between the rear surface and die auxiliary control surface is less than or equal to 45°. Keeping the angle less than or equal to 45° directs at least half of die force needed to press button on the auxiliary control surface downwards into me table or othα surface the custom controllα is resting on instead of sideways, which would tend to topple die custom controllα when it is in the upright position.
Two alternative embodiments of the custom controllα 1300 are shown in FIGS. 65-70 and FIGS. 71-76. These controllers indude control faces that are at angles from the rear face of less than or equal to 45°, substantially circular bottom faces and rear races that are larger relative to prior art remote controls.
Yet anothα feature of die custom controllα are one touch channd tuning buttons. These buttons would be assigned to a specific television or cable chaimd such as HBO, ESPN, CNN or MTV. For example, if a button is assigned to CNN, when die CNN button is pressed, die custom controllα transmits IR codes to change the chaimd on a television, VCR, cable box or satellite receivα to die channd number on which CNN is broadcast.
When the consumα sets up die custom controllα, he or she tells the representative what channels he or she watches die most and die representative directs die computer to have selected keys on die custom controllα be programmed to tune these channds. The consumα tells the representative which keys on the custom controllα he or she wishes to tune which channels or die representative can sdect the keys. Aftα the keys and channels have been selected, die consumα then writes the channd names next to the keys that tune them or labels with diffαent channd names can be supplied which are then applied to die custom controllα next to the appropriate buttons. These one touch tuning buttons are particularly well suited to being programmed as buttons on the auxiliary control surface, so that the consumα can operate these buttons without having to pick up the custom controller.
Anothα embodiment, shown in FIGS. 77-78 is an alternative embodiment to the embodiment shown in FIG. 33. An initial semp routine must be performed on die VCR in the embodiment in FIG. 33 similar to that that must be performed on the instant programmer 300. This consists of entering, into the VCR, die local channd map, the current time and an identification of die cable box, television or satellite receivα that is to be controlled by die VCR. In the embodiment of FIG. 33, this initial setup is performed manually by the usα in the same mannα as for the instant programma by pressing a series of keys on eithα die
VCR itsdf or the television remote control 956 used to control VCR. In this embodiment shown in FIG. 77, the television remote control from FIG. 33 is replaced with an auto- programming VCR remote control 1400 ("VCR remote"). The VCR remote includes a CPU 1402, RAM 1404, ROM 1406, keyboard 1408 and an IR transmitter 1410 that are typical for IR remote control units. Further, die VCR remote includes a microphone 1412 and an audio signal decodα 1414. The microphone and decodα can be eithα of die embodiments 1166 or 1168-1170 shown in FIGS. 43 and 44. As with the custom controllα described above, howevα, die decoders 1168-1170 in FIG. 44 and 1334 in FIGS. 58-59 are preferred as the more economical embodiment. In the preferred embodiment, me alternative VCR remote 1400 is a also a universal remote such as custom controller 1300 with all of die structure and functions of die custom controllα. Thus, die VCR remote is capable of controlling me cable box 1428, VCR 1416, television 1432 and any othα auxiliary home dectronic equipment that is IR remote controllable 1434. A significant advantage of die VCR remote control is that the data required to be entered into the VCR 1416 for the initial setup can initially be downloaded from a remote site by telephone to me VCR remote control. To do this, the consumα calls the remote site in the telephone, orally gives the information necessary to perform the initial semp to a person at die remote site. The person at die remote site men instructs the consumα to place the microphone of the VCR remote to the telephone earpiece and die initial setup is downloaded.
Thαeafter, the user easily causes die data to be downloaded by IR transmission, from the VCR remote control to die VCR itsdf by pressing a "send" key or a "send" sequence of keys. The VCR receives the initial soup data, stores it in its memory 1420 and tiien is ready to be used as an instant programma. in an alternative embodiment, shown in FIG. 79, the structural dements of the custom programmα 1100 shown in FIGS. 40-44, including a microphone 1450 and decoding assembly 1452, are be embedded within a VCR 1454 instead of embedding me structural elements of the instant programma 300 into the VCR as shown in FIG. 33. In this embodiment, the user would hold the earpiece of their telephone 1456 to the microphone embedded in the VCR to download die initial setup data directly from die remote site into the VCR. The difficulty witii this embodiment is that often a user's VCR and telephone are not located close enough together to position the telephone earpiece near the VCR. Further, correction of this problem, which would involve adding an extension cord to die telephone or disconnecting and relocating the VCR nearα the telephone are not convenient.
In anothα embodiment, shown in FIG. 80, the microphone in the VCR with custom programma embedded is replaced with a modular phone jack 1458 that leads directly to the decodα assembly 1452 in the VCR. A standard telephone line 1460 would then connect the
VCR to a modular T-connector 1462 so that both die VCR and an independent telephone 1464 are connected to die telephone line 1466. The consumα then uses die telephone to call and talk to the remote site, but die data is transmitted directly to die VCR. The transfer of data by this method may be more accurate than transmission by audible tones. However, this embodiment suffers from the same problem of the proximity of the consumα's phone outlets to the VCR.
With the embodiment shown in FIG. 77, though, die proximity of the VCR to a consumα's telephone or telephone jack are not important. The consumα simply carries the remote to his or hα phone and gets die initial setup data downloaded into the VCR remote. The consumα thai carries the remote to a location near die VCR and downloads die initial
Figure imgf000058_0001
Anothα embodiment, shown in FIG. 81, is to install a modular jack 1466 into the VCR remote 1400. In this embodiment, the VCR remote is connected to die telephone by a T-connector 1468 and operates in die same way as me VCR witii a built in modular jack described above and shown in FIG. 80 except that after die initial setup data is transferred to die VCR remote, die VCR remote is placed near the VCR and die initial semp data is downloaded by IR transmission to me VCR . One advantage that this embodiment has ov the VCR witii a built in modular jack is that die VCR remote can be taken to the telephone whereas die VCR may be located far from the telephone. It is also possible to add a DTMF generator to the VCR remote so that the keypad 1408 of die VCR remote can be used to dial the telephone number of the remote site. Alternativdy, telephone numbers for the remote site are stored in the memory of me VCR remote so that the consumer may dial die remote site by pressing a minir-inn- number of keys.
The details of die operation of the VCR remote are as follows. In die first step, shown in block 1440 of FIG. 78, the consumα places a telephone call on eithα an 800, 900 or normal toll call line to a customα service representative. In block 1442, the representative inquires from the consumα information necessary to perform the initial setup, such as the consumα's ZIP code or die name of the consumer's cable company, the television guide that consumα uses, the brand and model of die consumer's cable box (it is sometimes possible to deduce this data from the ZIP code or cable company name data) and die brand and model of die consumer's VCR. As with the initial semp of the custom programmα, the channel map and cable box IR codes can be determined from this data. If the VCR remote control is also a universal remote control, the representative inquires as to the brands and models of any othα IR controllable home dectronic equipment that the consumer may wish to control with die VCR remote control.
Once the channd map and IR code data to be downloaded have been identified in block 1442, die initial setup data, including die channd map, IR code data and the current time, including die date, is downloaded over die telephone line to the VCR remote control. In the preferred embodiment, die initial setup data is generated by a computer at or connected to die representative's location, transmitted ov telephone lines in die foπn of audio signals, received by die VCR remote control's microphone or modular phone jack and decodα, and stored into RAM 1404 by CPU 1402.
In block 1448, the consumα presses a "send" key or a sequence of keys that triggers the transmission of the initial setup data through die IR transmitter to me VCR's IR receivα. If the VCR remote control is a universal remote, the IR codes for IR controllable devices othα than die cable box are preferably not be transmitted to die VCR as tiiey are used by the VCR remote control itsdf, not die VCR. The data is stored by die VCR's CPU into me
VCR's RAM.
In an alternative embodiment, me VCR remote control's IR transmitter is not a multi¬ directional or wide angle IR transmitter. The more expensive multi-directional or wide angle IR transmitters are not necessary because the IR transmitter is not used to transmit IR signals when die VCR remote control is set on a table or on top of die cable box or VCR.
In any case, in the preferred embodiment, a multi-directional or wide angle IR transmitter is retained to increase die likdihood of the successful downloading of all of the initial setup data. Although die quantity of die initial setup data is not tremendous, it is substantial. Thus, an uninterrupted IR stream of a significant duration is required to reach the VCR from me VCR remote control. The more diverse die radiation of IR signals is, the more likdy it is that all of a stream of IR signals will reach the IR receivα in the VCR, eithα directly or by reflection.
For preexisting VCRs with a built in instant programmα and IR transmitter that were made before die present VCR remote control, that can also have their initial setup performed through die use of a remote control, the VCR remote control can be programmed, either with a program stored in ROM at manufacture or by telephone into RAM, to use the preexisting VCRs own protocol for initial setup using a remote control. In othα words, die VCR remote control is programmed to mimic a consumer using the VCR's original remote control to perform the initial semp.
In VCRs designed specifically for use with die VCR remote control, a special protocol, designed to reduce die length of the IR transmission sent to the VCR is used. In an alternative embodiment, part of this special protocol includes using a receipt confirmation signal combined witii known error detection and/or error correction schemes to assure the reception of the entire stream of initial setup data by die VCR. Known error detection schemes that can be used include a using parity check bit in every byte of data and embedding a code at some point in die data stream that indicates die length of the entire data stream. The use of these and othα known error detection and correction schemes allows the VCR to verify whethα die complete stream of error free initial setup data was received. If it is verified that the data received is correct and complete, the VCR can produce an indication, eithα audio or visual, that the initial semp data was successfully received. If it is not verified that the data received is correct and complete, the VCR eithα gives no indication or produces a second indication to indicate an unsuccessful transmission. Upon an unsuccessful transmission, the consumα adjusts die position of the VCR remote control relative to die VCR and retransmits the initial semp data.
Anothα alternative is to provide modular telephone jacks in botii die VCR and the VCR remote control for downloading die initial semp data from the VCR remote control to the VCR. This embodiment provides for more ror free transmission of me initial semp data, but forces the consumα to connect, disconnect and store die cable that links the VCR remote control and die VCR.
Yet another alternative is to include in the VCR a microphone and decodα assembly similar to the microphone and decodα assembly 1412-1414 in the VCR remote control. An encodα and speakα (not shown) are then added to die VCR remote control. With this alternative embodiment me initial semp data is transmitted from the VCR remote control to the VCR using me same type of audio signals as used to download die initial semp data ova die telephone lines to the VCR remote control. When die consuma is ready to transmit the initial setup data from me VCR remote control to the VCR, he or she simply holds up die speaker of die VCR remote control to die microphone of me VCR and pressed die keys necessary to trigger transmission. In die preferred embodiment of this alternative, with current speaker and microphone technology, the speakα and microphone on the VCR remote control can be combined into a single micropbone/speakα component.
In the downloading process of blocks 1446-1452, die channd map data and IR code data for the VCR is transmitted and stored into die RAM of the VCR remote control first.
Thαeafter die data is retransmitted to die VCR and stored into me RAM of die VCR. After transmission to me VCR of die channd map data and IR code data for die VCR is completed, the channd map and IR code data for the VCR is erased from the RAM in the VCR remote control. If IR code data for use by the VCR remote itself is initially downloaded with the channd map data and IR code data for the VCR, this data is, of course, not erased from the RAM in the VCR remote control. As described above in refαence to the custom controllα 1300, shown in FIGS. 53-76 and particularly FIGS. 58 and 59, die IR codes for control of the cable box and othα remote controllable dectronic equipment that are downloaded ov a telephone line to the video recordα, eithα directly or via a VCR remote, are stored in different ways in diffαent alternative embodiments. Thus, IR codes for numerous cable boxes and othα devices can be stored in the ROMs of die video recordα and die VCR remote with the addresses of the
IR codes for a particular cable box or othα device being downloaded to die RAM of the video recordα or VCR remote. Alternativdy, the IR codes themsdves can be downloaded to die RAM of the video recordα or VCR remote.
The invention as shown in die various embodiments of die VCR remote 1400 can be readily be used witii televisions, cable boxes, satellite receivers or othα audio-visual components that contain remote control transmitters. The only differences in opαation in these alternate configurations are die IR codes and downloading protocols that the VCR remote uses. Howevα, the VCR remote as described above is capable of having these codes and protocols downloaded by telephone along witii die initial setup data. In all of die embodiments presented in FIGS . 40-81 and die accompanying description, die example given of die type of data being downloaded to die custom programma 1100, initial setup programmα 1200, custom controllα 1300, VCR witii built in IR transmitter and direct telephone input (FIGS. 79-80) and VCR remote 1400 (collectively, the "telephone downloadable programmers") is initial setup data. This initial setup data includes IR codes or IR code addresses for die remote control of othα electronic equipment, local channel maps and die current time. In an alternative embodiment to all of the telephone downloadable programmers, shown in FIGS. 82-83, in addition to initial semp data, data representing programs that are desired to be recorded or viewed may be downloaded to die various telephone downloadable programmers. For any of the telephone downloadable programmers, the downloaded data representing a program to be recorded is in die form of e acmal values of the channd, date, time-of-day and length of die program. Alternatively, for those telephone downloadable programmers that also perform the functions of the instant programma 300, die data downloaded, representing a program to be recorded or viewed, is in the form of a conφressed code or G-code, which contains the channd, date, time-of-day and length of die program. The physical configuration of this embodiment for downloading program information is shown in FIG. 82. FIG. 83 shows a flow diagram of the process of selecting and downloading program information according to this embodiment. In block 1500, the user calls a customα service representative 1520 located at a remote site on the telephone, either on a pay-pα-minute or pay-pα-call 900 numbα, toll-free 800 numbα or regular toll number.
In block 1502, the usα orally tells the representative eithα specific shows that the user wants to record or a more genαal description of a type of show to be recorded or viewed. Such genαal descriptions include die type of show, such as simation comedies, dramas, action shows, mysteries, police or detective shows, real life rescue, emergency or police shows, game shows, news magazines, daily news programs, documentaries, sports events, movies, etc. The genαal descriptions furthα include more specific descriptions such as movies or shows starring a particular actor or actress or directed by a certain director (e.g., "all Humphrey Bogart movies"), sporting events involving a particular team and/or a particular sport (e.g., "all U.C.L.A. basketball games"), a show that may be on multiple time a week on diffαent channds (e.g., "all episodes of 'I Love Lucy' on this week").
In block 1504, die representative enters the information given by die usα in block 1502 into a computer 1522. The computer includes a large database of television programs to be broadcast in the future, stored in mass storage 1526, such as a hard disk. The computer then searches die database for television programs that match me information altered by die representative and retrieves die channd, date, time-of-day and length data for each program matching me information entered. In block 1506, the computer automatically checks the date, time-of-day and length data for all die programs retrieved in me database search for time conflicts between programs that ovαlap each othα.
If thαe is a time conflict, die computer alerts the representative tiiat there is a time conflict and die programs that are involved. In block 1508, die representative informs the usα- of the time conflict and die programs that are conflicting. The user then decides which of die conflicting programs he or she wishes to record or view. Alternatively, die user chooses to have only die non-conflicting portion of a program mat partially conflicts with anothα program recorded to avoid die conflict. For example, if two programs are selected that both begin at 8:00pm on Sunday, but one last one hour and die othα lasts two hours, die usα can choose to record die one hour program and die second hour of die two hour program. The user tells die representative how to resolve the conflict and, in block 1510, the representative enters this information into the computer, which adjusts die selected programs accordingly, in block 1512. in one embodiment, in block 1514, the computer converts the channel, date, time-of-day and length of each of die programs remaining aftα the search of the database and after resolving time conflicts, if any, into G-codes for use be downloadable programmers that perform the functions of the instant programma 300. Such a programmer is representatively shown by dotted line 1524 with the programmα 1524 having a CPU 1526, a microphone and high pass filter 1528 (similar to programmα 1100 as shown in FIG. 44), a random access memory (RAM) 1532, which includes a stack memory for storing the CDTL information, and a ROM 1530. In block 1516, the computer downloads die G-codes ova a telephone line to a telephone downloadable programma that pαforms the functions of the instant programmer 300.
In anothα embodiment, the blocks 1514 and 1516 are replaced by a block (not shown) in which die computer downloads data representing the channd, date, time-of-day and length of each of die programs sdected by the search of the database and modified to resolve time conflicts, if any, ova a telephone line to any telephone downloadable programmα 1524.
Aftα program data is downloaded to a telephone downloadable programmα, and decoded into channd, date, time-of-day and lengtii if G-codes wαe downloaded, die CDTL data is stored into the memory of any of die telephone downloadable programmers, such as stack memory of RAM 1532, in die same mann such program data is stored into the stack memory, such as stack memory 76 of FIG. 12, of die instant programmα 300 after it is decoded from a G-code as described above. After die program data is stored in memory, e control of the recording of die programs according to this data is performed in same mannα as performed by die various telephone downloadable programmers described above. In an alternative embodiment, me program data is downloaded to die telephone downloadable programmers for control of a tdevision or cable box only, rathα than for control of a video recorder. With this embodiment, die user is able to use a telephone downloadable programmer to simply change die channd of his or her television or cable box to assure that an important show is not missed because die user forgets what time it is or becomes engrossed in another show or simply because die user does not want to bothα having to change channels manually.
The format of the database file to die store the great amount of information about the future tdevision broadcasts of television programs and me database program used manipulate and search die database file can be any well known database format and corresponding database engine. In the preferred embodiment, me database format used consists of a series of records, each consisting of a predetermined set of fidds that is die same as the set of fields in every othα record in the database. Each television program corresponds to one record of die database. Each record would contain fidds for die title, channd, date, starting time-of-day and die lengtii of die program. Furthα, each record indudes a series of boolean fidds, each fidd representing a certain category of television program, such as situation comedy, romantic movie, sports program, etc. The advantage of this embodiment is that many different categories may be easily represented and searched, while taking up little space. This embodiment takes up little space because even though thαe may be ova a hundred different category fidds, a boolean fidd usually takes up only one bit or at most one byte of space for each record in most database file formats. The small size of each category field also facilitates rapid searching through the database for all die programs in a certain category. This embodiment also allows for multiple ovαlapping categories. For example, the database may have separate category fidds for crime subject matter, comedy, and fiction. One television program may be a fictional comedy about crime, thus containing a "true" value in all three categories fidds. On die otiiα hand, a program may be a real life drama about crime which only would contain a "true" value in one of these categories fields, die crime subject matter fidd.
In addition to die boolean category fields, each record includes several "people" fields. The contents of the "people" fidds indude characters in e program, actors and actresses, directors and writers involved with die creation of die program. Thus, if a usα desires to program all programs involving certain people, be they characters, actors or creators of the program, the computer can search die "people" fields for this information. Alternativdy, thαe can be separate fidds for characters, actors and actresses, and creators of programs.
Each record also indudes fidds devoted to die violence and sexual content of die television program. In die case of motion pictures, a fidd for die rating by the Motion Picture Association is utilized. In every record, boolean fidds for such descriptions as mild violence, explicit violence, brief nudity, nudity, profanity, adult situations, and sexual theme are included. Thus, programs can be sdected or excluded from a search based on such general content information.
Each record of die database also indudes an abstract that contains a brief description of die program. This allows a more detailed and extensive search, albeit more time consuming, of specific program content by searching all of die abstract fields for certain keywords or combinations of keywords.
It is thought tiiat die system and method of telephone downloading television program data according to sdection criteria provided by a user to a representative at a remote site of the present invention and many of its attendant advantages will be understood from the foregoing description and h will be apparent that various changes may be made in die form, construction and arrangement of the parts thαeof without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention or sacrificing all of its material advantages, die form hereinbefore described being mαdy a preferred or exemplary embodiment thαeof.

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A system for storing data into a video recordα comprising: a video recordα; and a remote control for receiving data and retransmitting such data to said video recorder, said remote control comprising: means for receiving said data, first mean for storing said data received by said means for receiving, and a first remote control transmitter for transmitting commands and said data to said video recorder; whαein said video recordα comprises: a remote control receivα for receiving said commands and said data transmitted by said first remote control transmitter, and second means for storing said data received by said remote control receivα.
2. The system of claim 1 wherein said video recordα comprises a video recorder which controls die channd tuning of an external channd sdection device, and further comprises: a second remote control transmitter for transmitting commands to said channd sdection device.
3. The system of claim 2 whαein said data comprises remote control communication protocol data for control of said channd sdection device.
4. The system of daim 1 whαein said means for receiving data is connected to a means for transferring data located at a remote site.
5. The system of daim 1 whαein said means for receiving data is connected through a telephone line to a means for transferring data located at a remote site.
6. The system of claim 1 whαein said means for receiving comprises a microphone and means for decoding audio signals.
7. The system of claim 1 whαein said means for receiving comprises a modular phone jack for connecting said remote control to a telephone outlet.
8. The system of claim 1 wherein said means for receiving comprises a modular phone jack for connecting said remote control to a tdephone outiet that is simultaneously connected to a telephone.
9. The system of claim 1 whαein said first remote control transmitter comprises an infrared remote control transmitter; and whαein said remote control receivα comprises an infrared remote control receivα.
io. The system of daim 1 whαein said data comprises channd map data.
11. A system for storing data into a video recordα comprising: a video recordα; and a remote control for receiving data and retransmitting such data to s&id video recordα, said remote control comprising: first means for receiving said data, first mean for storing said data received by said means for receiving, and means for transmitting said data to said video recorder; whαein said video recordα comprises: second means for receiving said data transmitted by said means for transmitting, and second means for storing said data received by said remote control receivα.
12. The system of claim 11 whαein said video recordα comprises a video recorder which controls the channel tuning of an external channd sdection device, and furthα comprises: a remote control transmitter for transmitting commands to said channd selection device.
13. The system of daim 12 whαein said data comprises remote control communication protocol data for control of said channd sdection device.
14. The system of claim 11 whαein said first means for receiving data is connected to a means for transferring data located at a remote site.
15. The system of claim 11 whαein said first means for receiving data is connected through a tdephone line to a means for transferring data located at a remote site.
16. The system of claim 11 wherein said means for transmitting comprises an audio speakα.
17. The system of claim 16 whαein said first means for receiving comprises a microphone and means for decoding audio signals; and whαein said means for transmitting comprises said microphone of said first means for receiving.
18. The system of claim 11 wherein said second means for receiving comprise a microphone and means for decoding audio signals.
19. The system of claim 11 whαein said first means for receiving comprises a microphone and means for decoding audio signals.
20. The system of daim 11 whαein said means for receiving comprises a modular phone jack for connecting said remote control to a telephone outiet.
21. The system of daim 11 wherein said means for receiving comprises a modular phone jack for connecting said remote control to a telephone outiet that is simultaneously connected to a telephone.
22. The system of daim 11 whαein said first remote control transmitter comprises an infrared remote control transmitter; and wherein said remote control receivα comprises an infrared remote control receivα.
23. The system of claim 11 whαein said data comprises channd map data.
24. A system for transferring and storing data into a video recordα comprising: a video recordα comprising: a remote control receivα, means for receiving data from a remote site, and means for storing said data distinct from said remote control receivα.
25. The system of claim 24 whαein said video recorder comprises a video recordα which controls the channel tuning of an external channd sdection device, and furthα comprises: a remote control transmitter for transmitting commands to said channel sdection device.
26. The system of claim 25 whαein said data comprises remote control communication protocol data for control of said channd sdection device.
27. The system of daim 24 whαein said means for receiving data is connected to a means for transferring data located at a remote site.
28. The system of claim 24 whαein said means for receiving data is connected through a telephone line to a means for transferring data located at a remote she.
29. The system of claim 24 whαein said means for receiving comprises a microphone and means decoding audio signals.
30. The system of daim 24 whαein said means for receiving comprises a modular phone jack for connecting said remote control to a telephone outiet.
31. The system of daim 24 whαein said means for receiving comprises a modular phone jack for connecting said remote control to a telephone outiet that is simultaneously connected to a telephone.
32. The system of daim 24 whαein said data comprises channd map data.
33. A method of storing data in a video recordα comprising: initiating a telephone connection with a representative at a remote site; communicating background information to said representative; converting said background information into data for downloading; transferring said data for downloading ov said telephone connection to a remote control; transmitting said data for downloading from said remote control to a video recordα; and storing said data for downloading in said video recordα.
34. The method of claim 33 furthα comprising, after the step of transmitting said download data, die steps of: determining if said step of transmitting was performed without error; and retransmitting said download data from said remote control to said video recordα if said step of determining determined that an αror occurred in said step of transmitting.
35. A method of storing data in a video recordα comprising: initiating a telephone connection witii a representative at a remote site; communicating background information to said representative; converting said background information into data for downloading; and transferring said data for downloading ov said telephone connection to a video recorder.
36. A system for using compressed codes for programs identified by user sdection criteria comprising: a device programmable from a telephone at a first end of a tdephone line, said programmable device controlling die recording on VCR of die identified programs; and a source of information to provide die compressed codes coupled to die telephone line at a location remote from me programmable device, die source induding a computer for applying in response to the sdection criteria compressed codes for die sdected programs to the telephone line.
37. A system for using compressed codes for programs identified witii sdection criteria comprising: a device programmable from a telephone at a first end of a telephone line, said programmable device controls apparatus for viewing me identified programs; and a source of information to provide die compressed codes coupled to die telephone line at a location remote from the programmable device, said source indudes a computer for applying in response to die sdection criteria compressed codes for die sdected programs.
38. A method of using compressed codes for tdevision program scheduling comprising the steps of: transmitting ova a telephone line to a remote location sdection criteria for TV programs; entering die sdection criteria at die remote location into a source of conφressed codes for die programs identified by die sdection criteria; transmitting die compressed codes from the remote location ov die telephone lines; and downloading die compressed codes from the telephone line into a memory of a controller for subsequent control of apparatus utilizing die programs identified by die compressed code.
PCT/US1994/001984 1993-03-05 1994-02-22 Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling WO1994021081A2 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP52005294A JP4472786B2 (en) 1993-03-05 1994-02-22 Method and system for communicating television program information
EP94910749A EP0688488A1 (en) 1993-03-05 1994-02-22 Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling
AU63528/94A AU6352894A (en) 1993-03-05 1994-02-22 Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US2720293A 1993-03-05 1993-03-05
US08/027,202 1993-03-05
US3124693A 1993-03-12 1993-03-12
US08/031,246 1993-03-12

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1994021081A2 true WO1994021081A2 (en) 1994-09-15
WO1994021081A3 WO1994021081A3 (en) 1994-11-10

Family

ID=26702197

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1994/001984 WO1994021081A2 (en) 1993-03-05 1994-02-22 Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (5) US6760537B2 (en)
EP (1) EP0688488A1 (en)
JP (7) JP4472786B2 (en)
CN (1) CN1071977C (en)
AU (1) AU6352894A (en)
CA (1) CA2157600A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1994021081A2 (en)

Cited By (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0840980A1 (en) * 1995-07-21 1998-05-13 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Automatic time set in a television system
WO1998056178A1 (en) * 1997-06-06 1998-12-10 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. System and method for recording pay tv programs
EP0975162A2 (en) * 1998-07-23 2000-01-26 Toshiba Video Products Japan Co., Ltd. Television program recording system
EP1085752A1 (en) * 1999-09-16 2001-03-21 Sagem S.A. TV receiver with a configurable remote control and the associated setting method
EP1111915A1 (en) * 1999-12-23 2001-06-27 Two Way TV Limited Control system
EP1133178A1 (en) * 1996-02-02 2001-09-12 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. System and method for interfacing multiple electronic devices
WO2002047379A1 (en) * 2000-12-07 2002-06-13 Right Hemisphere Pty Ltd Video recorder programming
US8266655B2 (en) 1995-04-17 2012-09-11 Starsight Telecast, Incorporated Multi-source switching in a television system
US8286207B1 (en) 1998-07-13 2012-10-09 Thomson Licensing System for processing programs and system timing information derived from multiple broadcast sources
US8495679B2 (en) 2000-06-30 2013-07-23 Thomson Licensing Method and apparatus for delivery of television programs and targeted de-coupled advertising
EP1331814B1 (en) * 1998-06-12 2016-03-09 Thomson Licensing Television program recording with user preference determination
US9860584B2 (en) 1998-06-16 2018-01-02 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive television program guide with simultaneous watch and record capabilities

Families Citing this family (194)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8352400B2 (en) 1991-12-23 2013-01-08 Hoffberg Steven M Adaptive pattern recognition based controller apparatus and method and human-factored interface therefore
CA2157600A1 (en) 1993-03-05 1994-09-15 Roy J. Mankovitz Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling
US5661787A (en) * 1994-10-27 1997-08-26 Pocock; Michael H. System for on-demand remote access to a self-generating audio recording, storage, indexing and transaction system
US20030213001A1 (en) * 1994-11-07 2003-11-13 Index Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting and downloading setup information
US5880768A (en) 1995-04-06 1999-03-09 Prevue Networks, Inc. Interactive program guide systems and processes
US6769128B1 (en) 1995-06-07 2004-07-27 United Video Properties, Inc. Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with data feed access
US6732369B1 (en) 1995-10-02 2004-05-04 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Systems and methods for contextually linking television program information
US6323911B1 (en) 1995-10-02 2001-11-27 Starsight Telecast, Inc. System and method for using television schedule information
US8850477B2 (en) 1995-10-02 2014-09-30 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Systems and methods for linking television viewers with advertisers and broadcasters
US6388714B1 (en) * 1995-10-02 2002-05-14 Starsight Telecast Inc Interactive computer system for providing television schedule information
US5940073A (en) 1996-05-03 1999-08-17 Starsight Telecast Inc. Method and system for displaying other information in a TV program guide
US6567606B2 (en) * 1996-07-05 2003-05-20 Starsight Telecast Incorporation On screen VCR programming guide
US5886995A (en) * 1996-09-05 1999-03-23 Hughes Electronics Corporation Dynamic mapping of broadcast resources
US20030005463A1 (en) * 1999-09-30 2003-01-02 Douglas B Macrae Access to internet data through a television system
US6049831A (en) * 1996-11-08 2000-04-11 Gte Laboratories Incorporated System for transmitting network-related information where requested network information is separately transmitted as definitions and display information
US20030066085A1 (en) * 1996-12-10 2003-04-03 United Video Properties, Inc., A Corporation Of Delaware Internet television program guide system
US5850218A (en) * 1997-02-19 1998-12-15 Time Warner Entertainment Company L.P. Inter-active program guide with default selection control
BRPI9812104B1 (en) 1997-07-21 2016-12-27 Guide E Inc method for navigating an interactive program guide
AU8913098A (en) 1997-09-18 1999-04-05 Prevue International, Inc. Electronic-mail reminder for an internet television program guide
US7185355B1 (en) 1998-03-04 2007-02-27 United Video Properties, Inc. Program guide system with preference profiles
US6243145B1 (en) * 1998-05-01 2001-06-05 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Method and apparatus for browsing television channel information by category
US6742183B1 (en) 1998-05-15 2004-05-25 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for advertising television networks, channels, and programs
US6536041B1 (en) * 1998-06-16 2003-03-18 United Video Properties, Inc. Program guide system with real-time data sources
CN1867068A (en) 1998-07-14 2006-11-22 联合视频制品公司 Client-server based interactive television program guide system with remote server recording
AR020608A1 (en) 1998-07-17 2002-05-22 United Video Properties Inc A METHOD AND A PROVISION TO SUPPLY A USER REMOTE ACCESS TO AN INTERACTIVE PROGRAMMING GUIDE BY A REMOTE ACCESS LINK
ES2188203T3 (en) 1998-07-17 2003-06-16 United Video Properties Inc GUIDE SYSTEM OF INTERACTIVE TELEVISION PROGRAMS THAT HAVE MULTIPLE DEVICES IN A PARTICULAR ADDRESS.
US6505348B1 (en) 1998-07-29 2003-01-07 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Multiple interactive electronic program guide system and methods
US6898762B2 (en) 1998-08-21 2005-05-24 United Video Properties, Inc. Client-server electronic program guide
US7694319B1 (en) 1998-11-02 2010-04-06 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive program guide with continuous data stream and client-server data supplementation
US6865746B1 (en) 1998-12-03 2005-03-08 United Video Properties, Inc. Electronic program guide with related-program search feature
US6792197B1 (en) 1998-12-07 2004-09-14 Index Systems, Inc. System and method for generating video taping reminders
US7966078B2 (en) 1999-02-01 2011-06-21 Steven Hoffberg Network media appliance system and method
US6223165B1 (en) 1999-03-22 2001-04-24 Keen.Com, Incorporated Method and apparatus to connect consumer to expert
US6757906B1 (en) 1999-03-30 2004-06-29 Tivo, Inc. Television viewer interface system
US8689265B2 (en) 1999-03-30 2014-04-01 Tivo Inc. Multimedia mobile personalization system
JP4046886B2 (en) * 1999-04-02 2008-02-13 キヤノン株式会社 Recording apparatus and recording apparatus control method
JP3335602B2 (en) * 1999-11-26 2002-10-21 株式会社クリエイティブ・ブレインズ Thinking system analysis method and analyzer
AU4711601A (en) 1999-12-10 2001-07-03 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for coordinating interactive and passive advertisement and merchandising opportunities
US7882520B2 (en) * 2000-12-20 2011-02-01 Tivo Inc. Broadcast program recording overrun and underrun scheduling system
DE60142774D1 (en) 2000-02-01 2010-09-23 United Video Properties Inc METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVING RECLAME
US20020021309A1 (en) * 2000-06-30 2002-02-21 Tara Burnhouse Future program action indication display
KR101399240B1 (en) 2000-10-11 2014-06-02 유나이티드 비디오 프로퍼티즈, 인크. Systems and methods for delivering media content
KR20070114325A (en) * 2000-10-11 2007-11-30 유나이티드 비디오 프로퍼티즈, 인크. Systems and methods for caching data in media-on-demand systems
JP2002135704A (en) * 2000-10-24 2002-05-10 Sony Corp Information processing device, its method, and program storage medium
US7877768B2 (en) * 2002-04-26 2011-01-25 Tivo Inc. Smart broadcast program recording padding and scheduling system
US8554617B2 (en) 2007-10-02 2013-10-08 Ingenio Llc Systems and methods to provide alternative connections for real time communications
CA2438947C (en) 2001-02-21 2016-03-22 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for interactive program guides with personal video recording features
US20020133402A1 (en) 2001-03-13 2002-09-19 Scott Faber Apparatus and method for recruiting, communicating with, and paying participants of interactive advertising
US6704403B2 (en) * 2001-09-05 2004-03-09 Ingenio, Inc. Apparatus and method for ensuring a real-time connection between users and selected service provider using voice mail
US20030084139A1 (en) * 2001-10-26 2003-05-01 Motorola, Inc. Method and apparatus for brokering of control instructions for an intelligent device
US6897904B2 (en) 2002-01-04 2005-05-24 Microsoft Corporation Method and apparatus for selecting among multiple tuners
EP1437889A1 (en) * 2003-01-06 2004-07-14 Thomson Licensing S.A. Method for inserting data into a timer for a video recording device
US7493646B2 (en) 2003-01-30 2009-02-17 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive television systems with digital video recording and adjustable reminders
KR100924776B1 (en) * 2003-04-23 2009-11-03 삼성전자주식회사 Hybrid device able to meditate priority of task-handler and user interface thereof
US8438601B2 (en) 2003-07-02 2013-05-07 Rovi Solutions Corporation Resource management for a networked personal video recording system
US7454120B2 (en) 2003-07-02 2008-11-18 Macrovision Corporation Methods and apparatus for client aggregation of television programming in a networked personal video recording system
US20070124207A1 (en) * 2003-10-06 2007-05-31 Utbk, Inc. Methods and Apparatuses to Provide Prompts in Connecting Customers to Advertisers
US8140392B2 (en) * 2003-10-06 2012-03-20 Utbk, Inc. Methods and apparatuses for pay for lead advertisements
US7428497B2 (en) 2003-10-06 2008-09-23 Utbk, Inc. Methods and apparatuses for pay-per-call advertising in mobile/wireless applications
US7366683B2 (en) 2003-10-06 2008-04-29 Utbk, Inc. Methods and apparatuses for offline selection of pay-per-call advertisers
US8069082B2 (en) * 2003-10-06 2011-11-29 Utbk, Inc. Methods and apparatuses to determine prices of communication leads
US9984377B2 (en) 2003-10-06 2018-05-29 Yellowpages.Com Llc System and method for providing advertisement
US8837698B2 (en) 2003-10-06 2014-09-16 Yp Interactive Llc Systems and methods to collect information just in time for connecting people for real time communications
US9208496B2 (en) * 2003-10-06 2015-12-08 Yellowpages.Com Llc Systems and methods to provide a communication reference in a representation of a geographical region
US8140389B2 (en) 2003-10-06 2012-03-20 Utbk, Inc. Methods and apparatuses for pay for deal advertisements
US9202217B2 (en) * 2003-10-06 2015-12-01 Yellowpages.Com Llc Methods and apparatuses to manage multiple advertisements
US7424442B2 (en) 2004-05-04 2008-09-09 Utbk, Inc. Method and apparatus to allocate and recycle telephone numbers in a call-tracking system
US7984468B2 (en) 2003-11-06 2011-07-19 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for providing program suggestions in an interactive television program guide
US20050147247A1 (en) * 2003-11-14 2005-07-07 Westberg Thomas E. Interactive television systems having POD modules and methods for use in the same
US20100153997A1 (en) * 2004-01-21 2010-06-17 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive television system with templates for managing vendor-specific video-on-demand content
US20050251750A1 (en) * 2004-05-10 2005-11-10 Robert Vallone Television viewer interface system
EP1624679A1 (en) * 2004-08-03 2006-02-08 Nagra France Sarl Device and method for controlling audio/video devices when a phone call is detected
US7743398B2 (en) * 2004-08-13 2010-06-22 Microsoft Corporation Video recording conflict management and user interface
US8806533B1 (en) 2004-10-08 2014-08-12 United Video Properties, Inc. System and method for using television information codes
US7657151B2 (en) * 2005-01-05 2010-02-02 The Directv Group, Inc. Method and system for displaying a series of recordable events
US7974962B2 (en) 2005-01-06 2011-07-05 Aptiv Digital, Inc. Search engine for a video recorder
US7979308B2 (en) 2005-03-03 2011-07-12 Utbk, Inc. Methods and apparatuses for sorting lists for presentation
US9973817B1 (en) 2005-04-08 2018-05-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. System and method for providing a list of video-on-demand programs
CN100499763C (en) * 2005-06-18 2009-06-10 深圳Tcl新技术有限公司 Device and method for television channel management
US20070022459A1 (en) * 2005-07-20 2007-01-25 Gaebel Thomas M Jr Method and apparatus for boundary-based network operation
US7788266B2 (en) 2005-08-26 2010-08-31 Veveo, Inc. Method and system for processing ambiguous, multi-term search queries
US7779011B2 (en) 2005-08-26 2010-08-17 Veveo, Inc. Method and system for dynamically processing ambiguous, reduced text search queries and highlighting results thereof
US20070049193A1 (en) * 2005-09-01 2007-03-01 Visteon Global Technologies, Inc. Satellite receiver for building selection list based on time
US8599832B2 (en) 2005-09-28 2013-12-03 Ingenio Llc Methods and apparatuses to connect people for real time communications via voice over internet protocol (VOIP)
US8582946B2 (en) 2005-11-04 2013-11-12 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for recording programs using a network recording device as supplemental storage
US20070106593A1 (en) * 2005-11-07 2007-05-10 Grant Lin Adaptive stochastic transaction system
US20070157246A1 (en) * 2005-12-23 2007-07-05 Sports Tv Insider, Llc Sports Broadcast Scheduler
US9015736B2 (en) 2005-12-29 2015-04-21 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for episode tracking in an interactive media environment
US8185437B2 (en) 2007-07-12 2012-05-22 Utbk, Inc. Systems and methods to provide communication connections via partners
US7835998B2 (en) 2006-03-06 2010-11-16 Veveo, Inc. Methods and systems for selecting and presenting content on a first system based on user preferences learned on a second system
US8316394B2 (en) 2006-03-24 2012-11-20 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive media guidance application with intelligent navigation and display features
US8069461B2 (en) 2006-03-30 2011-11-29 Verizon Services Corp. On-screen program guide with interactive programming recommendations
US20070245019A1 (en) * 2006-04-12 2007-10-18 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive media content delivery using a backchannel communications network
US9679602B2 (en) 2006-06-14 2017-06-13 Seagate Technology Llc Disc drive circuitry swap
US9918043B2 (en) 2006-06-27 2018-03-13 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Snippet access systems and methods
US9173001B1 (en) 2006-06-27 2015-10-27 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Media content access systems and methods
US9021404B2 (en) 2006-08-25 2015-04-28 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Systems and methods for modifying content based on a positional relationship
US8418217B2 (en) 2006-09-06 2013-04-09 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Systems and methods for accessing media content
US8464295B2 (en) 2006-10-03 2013-06-11 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Interactive search graphical user interface systems and methods
US8566874B2 (en) 2006-10-03 2013-10-22 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Control tools for media content access systems and methods
US8316320B2 (en) * 2006-10-03 2012-11-20 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Expandable history tab in interactive graphical user interface systems and methods
US8832742B2 (en) 2006-10-06 2014-09-09 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for acquiring, categorizing and delivering media in interactive media guidance applications
US9317855B2 (en) * 2006-10-24 2016-04-19 Yellowpages.Com Llc Systems and methods to provide voice connections via local telephone numbers
US8316408B2 (en) 2006-11-22 2012-11-20 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Audio processing for media content access systems and methods
US8250605B2 (en) 2006-12-18 2012-08-21 Verizon Services Corp. Systems and methods for presentation of preferred program selections
US20080155600A1 (en) * 2006-12-20 2008-06-26 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for providing remote access to interactive media guidance applications
US8194034B2 (en) * 2006-12-20 2012-06-05 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Systems and methods for controlling a display
US8209424B2 (en) * 2006-12-20 2012-06-26 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for providing remote access to interactive media guidance applications
US8028313B2 (en) 2006-12-21 2011-09-27 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Linear program guide for media content access systems and methods
US8510780B2 (en) 2006-12-21 2013-08-13 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Program guide navigation tools for media content access systems and methods
US8898701B2 (en) 2006-12-29 2014-11-25 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Method and system for providing attribute browsing of video assets
US8015581B2 (en) 2007-01-05 2011-09-06 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Resource data configuration for media content access systems and methods
US8451825B2 (en) 2007-02-22 2013-05-28 Utbk, Llc Systems and methods to confirm initiation of a callback
US8843107B2 (en) * 2007-02-08 2014-09-23 Yp Interactive Llc Methods and apparatuses to connect users of mobile devices to advertisers
US8896426B1 (en) 2007-02-09 2014-11-25 Uei Cayman Inc. Graphical user interface for programming universal remote control devices
US8490138B2 (en) * 2007-02-23 2013-07-16 Rovi Guides, Inc. Channel searching by content type
US7801888B2 (en) 2007-03-09 2010-09-21 Microsoft Corporation Media content search results ranked by popularity
US8418206B2 (en) 2007-03-22 2013-04-09 United Video Properties, Inc. User defined rules for assigning destinations of content
US20080255976A1 (en) 2007-04-10 2008-10-16 Utbk, Inc. Systems and Methods to Present Members of a Social Network for Real Time Communications
US20080262911A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2008-10-23 Utbk, Inc. Methods and Systems to Search in Virtual Reality for Real Time Communications
US8087047B2 (en) 2007-04-20 2011-12-27 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for providing remote access to interactive media guidance applications
US8601386B2 (en) 2007-04-20 2013-12-03 Ingenio Llc Methods and systems to facilitate real time communications in virtual reality
US20080263459A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2008-10-23 Utbk, Inc. Methods and Systems to Determine Availability for Real Time Communications via Virtual Reality
US20080263446A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2008-10-23 Utbk, Inc. Methods and Systems to Connect People to Services via Virtual Reality
US8320368B2 (en) 2007-06-18 2012-11-27 Utbk, Inc. Systems and methods to provide communication references based on recommendations to connect people for real time communications
US20080313083A1 (en) * 2007-06-18 2008-12-18 Utbk, Inc. Systems and Methods To Manage Presentations of Advertisements
US8681952B2 (en) * 2007-06-18 2014-03-25 Ingenio Llc Systems and methods to selectively provide telephonic connections
US8832553B2 (en) 2007-06-19 2014-09-09 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Program guide 3D zoom
US8532276B2 (en) 2007-06-26 2013-09-10 Ingenio Llc Systems and methods to provide telephonic connections via concurrent calls
US8103965B2 (en) 2007-06-28 2012-01-24 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Media content recording and healing statuses
US9826189B2 (en) 2007-06-28 2017-11-21 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Apparatus, method, and computer program product for presenting an interactive programming guide
US8739213B2 (en) * 2007-06-29 2014-05-27 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. System and method for providing an interactive program guide for past current and future programming
US8483546B2 (en) 2007-06-29 2013-07-09 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Apparatus, method, and computer program product for receiving a command during a commercial
US8280018B2 (en) 2007-07-06 2012-10-02 Utbk, Inc. Systems and methods to provide information via connections for real time communications between people
US9654721B2 (en) 2007-07-10 2017-05-16 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. System and method for providing personal content recommendations
US8724789B2 (en) 2007-08-06 2014-05-13 Yellow Pages Systems and methods to connect people for real time communications via directory assistance
US8327403B1 (en) 2007-09-07 2012-12-04 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for providing remote program ordering on a user device via a web server
US8107977B2 (en) * 2007-09-07 2012-01-31 United Video Properties, Inc. Cross-platform messaging
US8295465B2 (en) 2007-09-25 2012-10-23 Utbk, Inc. Systems and methods to connect members of a social network for real time communication
US9305590B2 (en) 2007-10-16 2016-04-05 Seagate Technology Llc Prevent data storage device circuitry swap
US20090144068A1 (en) * 2007-11-30 2009-06-04 Utbk, Inc. Methods and Apparatuses to Provide Connections for Real Time Communications
US20090165049A1 (en) 2007-12-19 2009-06-25 United Video Properties, Inc. Methods and devices for presenting and interactive media guidance application
US8051447B2 (en) 2007-12-19 2011-11-01 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Condensed program guide for media content access systems and methods
US9118869B2 (en) 2007-12-19 2015-08-25 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Vertically oriented program guide for media content access systems and methods
US20090313655A1 (en) * 2008-06-12 2009-12-17 Nokia Corporation Apparatus, method, computer program and user interface for enabling access to programs.
US8601526B2 (en) 2008-06-13 2013-12-03 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for displaying media content and media guidance information
US8624908B1 (en) 2008-06-27 2014-01-07 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods of transitioning from buffering video to recording video
US8327402B1 (en) 2008-07-15 2012-12-04 United Video Properties, Inc. Methods and devices for presenting an interactive media guidance application
CA2743050C (en) 2008-11-12 2015-03-17 Level 3 Communications, Llc User authentication in a content delivery network
JP5197317B2 (en) * 2008-11-19 2013-05-15 ラピスセミコンダクタ株式会社 Wireless LSI device and jamming wave detection circuit
US10063934B2 (en) 2008-11-25 2018-08-28 Rovi Technologies Corporation Reducing unicast session duration with restart TV
KR100966606B1 (en) * 2008-11-27 2010-06-29 엔에이치엔(주) Method, processing device and computer-readable recording medium for restricting input by referring to database
US9274505B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2016-03-01 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Systems and methods for radial display of time based information
US8522163B2 (en) 2008-12-19 2013-08-27 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Systems and methods for radial display of time based information
JP5332847B2 (en) * 2009-04-10 2013-11-06 ソニー株式会社 Content processing apparatus and method, program, and recording medium
US8117564B2 (en) * 2009-04-10 2012-02-14 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for generating a media guidance application with multiple perspective views
US9241136B2 (en) 2009-06-29 2016-01-19 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Method and apparatus for creating a personalized programming guide
US8990858B2 (en) 2009-06-29 2015-03-24 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Search-based media program guide systems and methods
US9009622B2 (en) 2009-06-30 2015-04-14 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Media content instance search methods and systems
US9237381B2 (en) * 2009-08-06 2016-01-12 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Methods and apparatus for local channel insertion in an all-digital content distribution network
US9166714B2 (en) 2009-09-11 2015-10-20 Veveo, Inc. Method of and system for presenting enriched video viewing analytics
US9014546B2 (en) 2009-09-23 2015-04-21 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for automatically detecting users within detection regions of media devices
US9143737B2 (en) 2009-10-15 2015-09-22 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Data distribution
US9258529B2 (en) 2009-10-15 2016-02-09 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Data distribution
US9571784B2 (en) 2009-10-30 2017-02-14 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Media content watch list systems and methods
US9635421B2 (en) 2009-11-11 2017-04-25 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Methods and apparatus for audience data collection and analysis in a content delivery network
US8327394B2 (en) 2009-11-30 2012-12-04 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Boosting factor for television content
US8528016B2 (en) 2009-12-28 2013-09-03 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. Dynamic program guide information
US8640052B2 (en) 2009-12-31 2014-01-28 Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. User interface enhancements for media content access systems and methods
US9201627B2 (en) 2010-01-05 2015-12-01 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for transferring content between user equipment and a wireless communications device
US9204193B2 (en) 2010-05-14 2015-12-01 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for media detection and filtering using a parental control logging application
US20110279269A1 (en) * 2010-05-16 2011-11-17 Jeremy Gerber Countdown timer application and method for programmable personal digital devices
US9167196B2 (en) 2010-05-19 2015-10-20 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for trimming recorded content using a media guidance application
US8930979B2 (en) 2010-11-11 2015-01-06 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Apparatus and methods for identifying and characterizing latency in a content delivery network
US10148623B2 (en) 2010-11-12 2018-12-04 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Apparatus and methods ensuring data privacy in a content distribution network
US9736524B2 (en) 2011-01-06 2017-08-15 Veveo, Inc. Methods of and systems for content search based on environment sampling
US9854318B2 (en) 2011-06-06 2017-12-26 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for sharing interactive media guidance information
US8954148B2 (en) * 2011-06-28 2015-02-10 Greatbatch, Ltd. Key fob controller for an implantable neurostimulator
US20130006330A1 (en) 2011-06-28 2013-01-03 Greatbatch, Ltd. Dual patient controllers
US20130197607A1 (en) 2011-06-28 2013-08-01 Greatbatch Ltd. Dual patient controllers
US8949901B2 (en) 2011-06-29 2015-02-03 Rovi Guides, Inc. Methods and systems for customizing viewing environment preferences in a viewing environment control application
US8805418B2 (en) 2011-12-23 2014-08-12 United Video Properties, Inc. Methods and systems for performing actions based on location-based rules
US9218122B2 (en) 2011-12-29 2015-12-22 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for transferring settings across devices based on user gestures
US9043825B2 (en) 2012-08-28 2015-05-26 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Content carried ratings based control
US9253262B2 (en) 2013-01-24 2016-02-02 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for connecting media devices through web sockets
US9842125B2 (en) * 2013-04-24 2017-12-12 Atlys, Inc. Nested media container, panel and organizer
US9674563B2 (en) 2013-11-04 2017-06-06 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for recommending content
US9264656B2 (en) 2014-02-26 2016-02-16 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for managing storage space
US9288521B2 (en) 2014-05-28 2016-03-15 Rovi Guides, Inc. Systems and methods for updating media asset data based on pause point in the media asset
US9948962B2 (en) 2014-11-13 2018-04-17 Time Warner Cable Enterprises Llc Apparatus and methods for efficient delivery of electronic program guide data
US11323247B2 (en) 2017-10-27 2022-05-03 Quantropi Inc. Methods and systems for secure data communication
US10476664B2 (en) 2017-10-27 2019-11-12 Quantropi Inc. Methods and systems for data protection
US10779032B2 (en) 2018-06-28 2020-09-15 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. System and method for timing management for digital video recording
US11329797B2 (en) 2020-02-25 2022-05-10 Quantropi Inc. Method and system for secure phase-encoded digital communication over optical channels

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4751578A (en) * 1985-05-28 1988-06-14 David P. Gordon System for electronically controllably viewing on a television updateable television programming information
US4787063A (en) * 1984-10-19 1988-11-22 Francis Muguet Acquisition and transmission system for a recorder and a computer center
WO1990007844A1 (en) * 1988-12-23 1990-07-12 Yuen Henry C Apparatus and method for using encoded video recorder/player timer preprogramming information
US5016273A (en) * 1989-01-09 1991-05-14 At&E Corporation Dual communication mode video tape recorder
WO1991007050A1 (en) * 1989-10-30 1991-05-16 Insight Telecast, Inc. Cable television decoder to television accessory interfacing
US5134649A (en) * 1990-09-21 1992-07-28 Gutzmer Howard A Acoustic coupler for high-speed modem
GB2256546A (en) * 1991-05-02 1992-12-09 Thomson Consumer Electronics Deletion of entries from the channel mapping list of a videocassette recorder.

Family Cites Families (621)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB1554411A (en) 1975-08-09 1979-10-17 Communications Patents Ltd Control systems
US4024401A (en) 1975-11-17 1977-05-17 General Electric Company X-ray apparatus
US4170782A (en) 1976-12-13 1979-10-09 Miller Arthur O Programming and selection monitoring system for television receivers
US4081753A (en) 1976-12-13 1978-03-28 Miller Arthur O Automatic programming system for television receivers
US4264924A (en) 1978-03-03 1981-04-28 Freeman Michael J Dedicated channel interactive cable television system
US4264925A (en) 1979-08-13 1981-04-28 Michael J. Freeman Interactive cable television system
US4422105A (en) * 1979-10-11 1983-12-20 Video Education, Inc. Interactive system and method for the control of video playback devices
US4271532A (en) 1979-11-13 1981-06-02 Rca Corporation Receiver with a channel swapping apparatus
DE2950432A1 (en) 1979-12-14 1981-06-19 Edmond 8031 Gröbenzell Keiser METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF A TELEVISION RECEIVER
US4280148A (en) 1980-01-21 1981-07-21 Saxena Arjun N Audio recording apparatus and method
US4355415A (en) 1980-04-29 1982-10-19 Rca Corporation Tuning mode arrangement useful for restricting channel selection to certain channels
US4381522A (en) 1980-12-01 1983-04-26 Adams-Russell Co., Inc. Selective viewing
US4367559A (en) 1981-02-06 1983-01-04 Rca Corporation Arrangement for both channel swapping and favorite channel features
US4425579A (en) 1981-05-22 1984-01-10 Oak Industries Inc. Catv converter with keylock to favorite channels
US4375651A (en) 1981-07-27 1983-03-01 Zenith Radio Corporation Selective video reception control system
US4694490A (en) 1981-11-03 1987-09-15 Harvey John C Signal processing apparatus and methods
US4965825A (en) 1981-11-03 1990-10-23 The Personalized Mass Media Corporation Signal processing apparatus and methods
DE3151492A1 (en) 1981-11-21 1983-07-07 Gorenje Körting Electronic GmbH & Co, 8217 Grassau Audio/video home system
US4908713A (en) 1981-12-14 1990-03-13 Levine Michael R VCR Programmer
US5692214A (en) 1981-12-14 1997-11-25 Levine; Michael R. System for unattended recording of video programs by remote control code transmitter module which receives user selections from a personal computer
US4963994A (en) 1981-12-14 1990-10-16 Levine Michael R VCR programmer
US5508815A (en) * 1981-12-14 1996-04-16 Smart Vcr Limited Partnership Schedule display system for video recorder programming
EP0096705A1 (en) 1981-12-19 1983-12-28 CHARD, Frederick William Method and apparatus for editing the output of a television set
US4429385A (en) 1981-12-31 1984-01-31 American Newspaper Publishers Association Method and apparatus for digital serial scanning with hierarchical and relational access
US4495654A (en) 1983-03-29 1985-01-22 Rca Corporation Remote controlled receiver with provisions for automatically programming a channel skip list
US4625080A (en) 1983-05-03 1986-11-25 Scott Michael M Remote video recorder programming apparatus operating over telephone lines
US4527194A (en) 1983-07-27 1985-07-02 Zenith Electronics Corporation Channel assignment for CATV system
US4754326A (en) 1983-10-25 1988-06-28 Keycom Electronic Publishing Method and apparatus for assisting user of information retrieval systems
US4641205A (en) 1984-03-05 1987-02-03 Rca Corporation Television system scheduler with on-screen menu type programming prompting apparatus
US4602279A (en) 1984-03-21 1986-07-22 Actv, Inc. Method for providing targeted profile interactive CATV displays
US4573072A (en) 1984-03-21 1986-02-25 Actv Inc. Method for expanding interactive CATV displayable choices for a given channel capacity
US4630108A (en) 1984-03-26 1986-12-16 A. C. Nielsen Company Preprogrammed over-the-air marketing research system
US4689022A (en) 1984-04-30 1987-08-25 John Peers System for control of a video storage means by a programmed processor
FR2579397B2 (en) 1985-03-19 1989-04-14 Muguet Francis METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACQUIRING, STORING AND TRANSMITTING SPECIALIZED DATA RELATING PARTICULARLY TO THE RECORDING OF TRANSMISSIONS, BETWEEN A MAGNETOSCOPE APPARATUS AND A PROCESSING CENTER
FR2572235B1 (en) 1984-10-19 1988-12-23 Muguet Francis METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ACQUIRING, STORING AND TRANSMITTING SPECIALIZED DATA RELATING PARTICULARLY TO THE RECORDING OF TRANSMISSIONS, BETWEEN A MAGNETOSCOPE APPARATUS AND A PROCESSING CENTER
US4691351A (en) 1984-11-29 1987-09-01 Sony Corporation Television signal receiving apparatus
US4706121B1 (en) * 1985-07-12 1993-12-14 Insight Telecast, Inc. Tv schedule system and process
US4718107A (en) 1986-02-14 1988-01-05 Rca Corporation Parental control for CATV converters
JP2526875B2 (en) 1986-11-05 1996-08-21 ソニー株式会社 Digital information recorder
US4945563A (en) 1986-11-05 1990-07-31 Satellite Technology Services, Inc. Video system and method for controlled viewing and videotaping
US5089885A (en) 1986-11-14 1992-02-18 Video Jukebox Network, Inc. Telephone access display system with remote monitoring
US4761684A (en) 1986-11-14 1988-08-02 Video Jukebox Network Telephone access display system
DE3640436C3 (en) 1986-11-27 1997-04-17 Siemens Ag Remote control for a consumer electronics receiver
US4807154A (en) 1987-01-29 1989-02-21 International Business Machines Corporation Method for developing automatic replies in an interactive electronic calendaring system
DE3819863A1 (en) 1987-06-12 1989-01-05 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd REMOTE CONTROL DEVICE FOR ELECTRONIC DEVICES
US5126851A (en) 1987-06-16 1992-06-30 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Video system using two different kinds of recording media
US4847698A (en) 1987-07-16 1989-07-11 Actv, Inc. Interactive television system for providing full motion synched compatible audio/visual displays
US4847700A (en) 1987-07-16 1989-07-11 Actv, Inc. Interactive television system for providing full motion synched compatible audio/visual displays from transmitted television signals
ES2110944T3 (en) 1987-07-20 1998-03-01 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv TELEVISION TRANSMISSION SYSTEM.
US4841562A (en) 1987-07-24 1989-06-20 Steven Lem Telephone VCR control
JPS6450688A (en) 1987-08-21 1989-02-27 Hashimoto Corp Method and device for generating individual television program
US4930160A (en) 1987-09-02 1990-05-29 Vogel Peter S Automatic censorship of video programs
US5228077A (en) 1987-12-02 1993-07-13 Universal Electronics Inc. Remotely upgradable universal remote control
US4920432A (en) 1988-01-12 1990-04-24 Eggers Derek C System for random access to an audio video data library with independent selection and display at each of a plurality of remote locations
IT1218950B (en) 1988-01-12 1990-04-24 Sarin Societa Servizi Ausiliar PROCEDURE AND SYSTEM FOR INTEGRATED DELIVERY PARTICULARLY FOR ADVERTISING PURPOSES OF TELEMATIC SERVICES AND GRAPHIC INFORMATION ON USER TERMINALS
JPH01246978A (en) 1988-03-28 1989-10-02 Toshiba Corp Picture information receiving and displaying device
GB2218287B (en) 1988-05-02 1992-10-07 Hashimoto Corp Display system for use with a tv program reservation system
US5202915A (en) 1988-07-01 1993-04-13 Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Single line communication apparatus for speech and data and method therefor
CA1341310C (en) 1988-07-15 2001-10-23 Robert Filepp Interactive computer network and method of operation
US4977455B1 (en) 1988-07-15 1993-04-13 System and process for vcr scheduling
US5187589A (en) 1988-07-28 1993-02-16 Pioneer Electronic Corporation Multiprogram video tape recording and reproducing device
GB8824090D0 (en) 1988-10-14 1988-11-23 Tindall A P Video recording control device
US4857999A (en) 1988-12-20 1989-08-15 Peac Media Research, Inc. Video monitoring system
US4959719A (en) 1988-12-21 1990-09-25 North American Philips Corporation Picture-in-picture television receiver control
US4866434A (en) 1988-12-22 1989-09-12 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Multi-brand universal remote control
US5307173A (en) 1988-12-23 1994-04-26 Gemstar Development Corporation Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling
US5001554A (en) 1988-12-23 1991-03-19 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Terminal authorization method
US4994908A (en) 1988-12-23 1991-02-19 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Interactive room status/time information system
KR920003936B1 (en) 1988-12-31 1992-05-18 삼성전자 주식회사 Unpermitted use protecting method by character generating circuit of v.c.r.
US5086385A (en) 1989-01-31 1992-02-04 Custom Command Systems Expandable home automation system
JPH02264586A (en) 1989-04-04 1990-10-29 Pioneer Electron Corp Catv system and catv terminal equipment
US4959720A (en) 1989-04-06 1990-09-25 Rca Licensing Corporation Tuner control apparatus having tune-by-label capability
US5592482A (en) 1989-04-28 1997-01-07 Abraham; Charles Video distribution system using in-wall wiring
US4947244A (en) 1989-05-03 1990-08-07 On Command Video Corporation Video selection and distribution system
US5216228A (en) 1989-05-12 1993-06-01 Hashimoto Corporation Bar code transmission and reception system and method
US5253066C1 (en) 1989-06-01 2001-05-22 United Video Properties Inc Tv recording and viewing control system
US5047867A (en) * 1989-06-08 1991-09-10 North American Philips Corporation Interface for a TV-VCR system
JPH0335451A (en) * 1989-06-30 1991-02-15 Sony Corp Video tape recorder
US5038211A (en) 1989-07-05 1991-08-06 The Superguide Corporation Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving television program information
US5663757A (en) 1989-07-14 1997-09-02 Morales; Fernando Software controlled multi-mode interactive TV systems
US5170388A (en) 1989-07-27 1992-12-08 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Image/audio information recording/reproduction apparatus with built-in semiconductor memory
GB8922702D0 (en) 1989-10-09 1989-11-22 Videologic Ltd Radio television receiver
US5155591A (en) 1989-10-23 1992-10-13 General Instrument Corporation Method and apparatus for providing demographically targeted television commercials
US5727060A (en) 1989-10-30 1998-03-10 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Television schedule system
US5353121A (en) 1989-10-30 1994-10-04 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Television schedule system
US5105184B1 (en) 1989-11-09 1997-06-17 Noorali Pirani Methods for displaying and integrating commercial advertisements with computer software
US6070003A (en) 1989-11-17 2000-05-30 Texas Instruments Incorporated System and method of memory access in apparatus having plural processors and plural memories
US5239654A (en) 1989-11-17 1993-08-24 Texas Instruments Incorporated Dual mode SIMD/MIMD processor providing reuse of MIMD instruction memories as data memories when operating in SIMD mode
DE69122133T2 (en) 1990-01-21 1997-02-06 Sony Corp Recording and playback device with program information
US5446919A (en) 1990-02-20 1995-08-29 Wilkins; Jeff K. Communication system and method with demographically or psychographically defined audiences
US5068733A (en) 1990-03-20 1991-11-26 Bennett Richard H Multiple access television
JP2811887B2 (en) 1990-03-27 1998-10-15 ソニー株式会社 Receiver
US5113259A (en) 1990-04-19 1992-05-12 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Data transfer from an external computer to a television receiver having picture-in-picture capability
US5090049A (en) 1990-05-22 1992-02-18 Chen Thomas N Fax message recorder and relay system and method
US5189630A (en) 1991-01-15 1993-02-23 Barstow David R Method for encoding and broadcasting information about live events using computer pattern matching techniques
FR2665319B1 (en) 1990-07-30 1993-08-20 Cgv Comp Gen Videotech DEVICE FOR DISTRIBUTING VIDEO AND / OR AUDIO SIGNALS BETWEEN SEVERAL RECEIVERS.
ES2366191T3 (en) 1990-09-10 2011-10-18 Starsight Telecast, Inc. USER INTERFACE FOR TELEVISION PROGRAMMING SYSTEM.
US5808608A (en) 1990-09-10 1998-09-15 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Background television schedule system
US5619274A (en) 1990-09-10 1997-04-08 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process
US5790198A (en) 1990-09-10 1998-08-04 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Television schedule information transmission and utilization system and process
NL9002111A (en) 1990-09-19 1992-04-16 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv METHOD FOR RECORDING IMAGE INFORMATION, AND A REGISTRATION CARRIER, AND AN IMAGE SEARCH AND DISPLAY DEVICE FOR READING THE REGISTRATION CARRIER.
US5412720A (en) 1990-09-28 1995-05-02 Ictv, Inc. Interactive home information system
US5526034A (en) 1990-09-28 1996-06-11 Ictv, Inc. Interactive home information system with signal assignment
US5123046A (en) 1990-11-05 1992-06-16 Smart Vcr Limited Partnership Vcr with cable tuner control
USRE35954E (en) 1990-11-05 1998-11-10 Smart Vcr Limited Partnership VCR with cable tuner control
US5233423A (en) 1990-11-26 1993-08-03 North American Philips Corporation Embedded commericals within a television receiver using an integrated electronic billboard
US5282028A (en) 1990-11-27 1994-01-25 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Remote control for digital music terminal with synchronized communications
JPH0731649Y2 (en) 1990-11-28 1995-07-19 船井電機株式会社 Channel tuning device
US5172413A (en) 1990-12-20 1992-12-15 Sasktel Secure hierarchial video delivery system and method
US5168353A (en) 1990-12-21 1992-12-01 Gte Laboratories Incorporated Video distribution system allowing viewer access to time staggered indentical prerecorded programs
US5253275A (en) 1991-01-07 1993-10-12 H. Lee Browne Audio and video transmission and receiving system
US6002720A (en) 1991-01-07 1999-12-14 H. Lee Browne, D/B/A Greenwich Information Technologies Llc Audio and video transmission and receiving system
US5132992A (en) 1991-01-07 1992-07-21 Paul Yurt Audio and video transmission and receiving system
DE69214172T2 (en) 1991-01-16 1997-03-27 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Video tape recorder for multi-channel recording
US5134719A (en) 1991-02-19 1992-07-28 Mankovitz Roy J Apparatus and methods for identifying broadcast audio program selections in an FM stereo broadcast system
KR0178536B1 (en) 1991-03-11 1999-04-15 강진구 Channel selecting method of relative program
US5241428A (en) 1991-03-12 1993-08-31 Goldwasser Eric P Variable-delay video recorder
US5200822A (en) 1991-04-23 1993-04-06 National Broadcasting Company, Inc. Arrangement for and method of processing data, especially for identifying and verifying airing of television broadcast programs
US5283819A (en) 1991-04-25 1994-02-01 Compuadd Corporation Computing and multimedia entertainment system
GB2256115B (en) 1991-05-16 1995-05-17 Cabletime Ltd Cable television
WO1992022983A2 (en) * 1991-06-11 1992-12-23 Browne H Lee Large capacity, random access, multi-source recorder player
US5210611A (en) 1991-08-12 1993-05-11 Keen Y. Yee Automatic tuning radio/TV using filtered seek
US6091884A (en) 1991-08-19 2000-07-18 Index Systems, Inc. Enhancing operations of video tape cassette players
US5488409A (en) 1991-08-19 1996-01-30 Yuen; Henry C. Apparatus and method for tracking the playing of VCR programs
US5570415A (en) 1991-08-29 1996-10-29 Sasktel Video programming and storage control using the telephone network
US5396546A (en) 1991-10-03 1995-03-07 Viscorp Apparatus and method for automatic and user configurable information appliance
US5231494A (en) 1991-10-08 1993-07-27 General Instrument Corporation Selection of compressed television signals from single channel allocation based on viewer characteristics
US5416508A (en) 1991-10-22 1995-05-16 Pioneer Electronic Corporation CATV system with transmission of program schedules, linked program broadcasts, and permissive ordering periods
JPH05122692A (en) 1991-10-28 1993-05-18 Pioneer Electron Corp Catv terminal equipment and catv system
JP3004105B2 (en) 1991-11-15 2000-01-31 株式会社東芝 Television receiver
US5861881A (en) 1991-11-25 1999-01-19 Actv, Inc. Interactive computer system for providing an interactive presentation with personalized video, audio and graphics responses for multiple viewers
US5724091A (en) 1991-11-25 1998-03-03 Actv, Inc. Compressed digital data interactive program system
US5477262A (en) * 1991-11-29 1995-12-19 Scientific-Altanta, Inc. Method and apparatus for providing an on-screen user interface for a subscription television terminal
US5988078A (en) 1991-12-04 1999-11-23 Gemstar Development Corp. Method and apparatus for receiving customized television programming information by transmitting geographic location to a service provider through a wide-area network
US5377317A (en) 1991-12-20 1994-12-27 International Business Machines Corporation Method and apparatus for distinctively displaying windows on a computer display screen
US5875108A (en) 1991-12-23 1999-02-23 Hoffberg; Steven M. Ergonomic man-machine interface incorporating adaptive pattern recognition based control system
US6081750A (en) 1991-12-23 2000-06-27 Hoffberg; Steven Mark Ergonomic man-machine interface incorporating adaptive pattern recognition based control system
US5903454A (en) 1991-12-23 1999-05-11 Hoffberg; Linda Irene Human-factored interface corporating adaptive pattern recognition based controller apparatus
US7006881B1 (en) 1991-12-23 2006-02-28 Steven Hoffberg Media recording device with remote graphic user interface
DE4201031C2 (en) 1992-01-14 1994-09-01 Ludwig J Prof Dr Issing Program selection system for the automated pre-selection of television or radio programs according to the individual interests of the participants
US5953485A (en) 1992-02-07 1999-09-14 Abecassis; Max Method and system for maintaining audio during video control
US5610653A (en) 1992-02-07 1997-03-11 Abecassis; Max Method and system for automatically tracking a zoomed video image
JP3328951B2 (en) 1992-02-07 2002-09-30 ソニー株式会社 TV receiver and tuning method
JPH06296200A (en) 1992-02-14 1994-10-21 Hashimoto Corp Automatic control system for video tape recorder
KR930018994A (en) 1992-02-29 1993-09-22 이필곤 T.V built-in image display circuit
JP3198486B2 (en) 1992-03-11 2001-08-13 ソニー株式会社 Monitor system for AV system
US5432561A (en) 1992-03-27 1995-07-11 North American Philips Corporation System for automatically activating picture-in-picture when an auxiliary signal is detected
US5262860A (en) 1992-04-23 1993-11-16 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system communication establishment utilizing captured and processed visually perceptible data within a broadcast video signal
CA2134344C (en) * 1992-05-01 2004-07-27 Henry C. Yuen Television program record scheduling using compressed codes
DE4217246A1 (en) 1992-05-25 1993-12-02 Grundig Emv Video device for processing additional signals, which are transmitted in the blanking intervals of television signals
US5223924A (en) 1992-05-27 1993-06-29 North American Philips Corporation System and method for automatically correlating user preferences with a T.V. program information database
US5469206A (en) 1992-05-27 1995-11-21 Philips Electronics North America Corporation System and method for automatically correlating user preferences with electronic shopping information
US5414756A (en) 1992-06-26 1995-05-09 Smart Vcr Limited Partnership Telephonically programmable apparatus
US5317403A (en) 1992-06-26 1994-05-31 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Favorite channel selection using extended keypress
CA2094526C (en) 1992-07-22 1998-05-05 Ivan Eisen Method and apparatus for creating a multi-media footnote control in a video data
US5319445A (en) 1992-09-08 1994-06-07 Fitts John M Hidden change distribution grating and use in 3D moire measurement sensors and CMM applications
US5644354A (en) 1992-10-09 1997-07-01 Prevue Interactive, Inc. Interactive video system
DE4234663A1 (en) 1992-10-15 1994-04-21 Focke & Co Device for transporting packaging material in web form
US5371551A (en) 1992-10-29 1994-12-06 Logan; James Time delayed digital video system using concurrent recording and playback
GB2273025B (en) 1992-11-12 1997-03-26 Rockwell International Corp Automatic call distributor with a programmable data window display system and method
US5325423A (en) 1992-11-13 1994-06-28 Multimedia Systems Corporation Interactive multimedia communication system
US5398074A (en) 1992-11-24 1995-03-14 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Programmable picture-outside-picture display
ATE507312T1 (en) 1992-11-27 2011-05-15 Innogenetics Nv DETECTION AND TYPING OF THE HEPATITIS C VIRUS (HCV) USING 5'UTR AND NS5 NUCLEIC ACID SEQUENCES
DE4240187A1 (en) 1992-11-30 1994-06-01 Siemens Ag Displaying information from video text signals on screen - generating text table representing all TV programmes available from different transmitters without switching between transmitters
US5657414A (en) 1992-12-01 1997-08-12 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Auxiliary device control for a subscriber terminal
US5592551A (en) 1992-12-01 1997-01-07 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Method and apparatus for providing interactive electronic programming guide
US5410326A (en) 1992-12-04 1995-04-25 Goldstein; Steven W. Programmable remote control device for interacting with a plurality of remotely controlled devices
JPH06176492A (en) 1992-12-04 1994-06-24 Sony Corp Device for recording and reproducing digital video signal
US6181335B1 (en) 1992-12-09 2001-01-30 Discovery Communications, Inc. Card for a set top terminal
US5600364A (en) 1992-12-09 1997-02-04 Discovery Communications, Inc. Network controller for cable television delivery systems
US7343614B1 (en) 1992-12-09 2008-03-11 Sedna Patent Services, Llc Program delivery system for VOD
US6828993B1 (en) 1992-12-09 2004-12-07 Discovery Communications, Inc. Set top terminal that stores programs locally and generates menus
US5798785A (en) 1992-12-09 1998-08-25 Discovery Communications, Inc. Terminal for suggesting programs offered on a television program delivery system
KR100295386B1 (en) 1992-12-09 2001-09-22 마크 홀린저 Set-top terminals for cable television delivery systems
US7134131B1 (en) 1992-12-09 2006-11-07 Sedna Patent Services, Llc Digital broadcast program billing
US6675386B1 (en) 1996-09-04 2004-01-06 Discovery Communications, Inc. Apparatus for video access and control over computer network, including image correction
US5659350A (en) 1992-12-09 1997-08-19 Discovery Communications, Inc. Operations center for a television program packaging and delivery system
US6463585B1 (en) 1992-12-09 2002-10-08 Discovery Communications, Inc. Targeted advertisement using television delivery systems
US7721307B2 (en) 1992-12-09 2010-05-18 Comcast Ip Holdings I, Llc Method and apparatus for targeting of interactive virtual objects
US5442389A (en) 1992-12-28 1995-08-15 At&T Corp. Program server for interactive television system
JPH06261139A (en) * 1993-01-08 1994-09-16 Sony Corp Av equipment control system
JP3297914B2 (en) 1993-01-08 2002-07-02 ソニー株式会社 Television receiver
JP3302425B2 (en) 1993-01-29 2002-07-15 パイオニア株式会社 Selection method and selection device
CA2157600A1 (en) 1993-03-05 1994-09-15 Roy J. Mankovitz Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling
JP3193176B2 (en) 1993-03-05 2001-07-30 パイオニア株式会社 Two-way remote control system
US5508732A (en) 1993-03-22 1996-04-16 International Business Machines Corporation Data server, control server and gateway architecture system and method for broadcasting digital video on demand
US20020032907A1 (en) 1993-03-29 2002-03-14 Daniels John J. Initiating record from an electronic programming schedule
US6973669B2 (en) 1993-03-29 2005-12-06 Microsoft Corporation Pausing television programming in response to selection of hypertext link
US20020100052A1 (en) 1999-01-06 2002-07-25 Daniels John J. Methods for enabling near video-on-demand and video-on-request services using digital video recorders
US5631995A (en) 1993-04-01 1997-05-20 U.S. Philips Corporation Video recorder having circuitry for causing the tuner therein to tune to the same received signal as the tuner in a television receiver connected to the video recorder
US5812937B1 (en) 1993-04-08 2000-09-19 Digital Dj Inc Broadcast data system with multiple-tuner receiver
JP2802876B2 (en) 1993-04-28 1998-09-24 橋本コーポレイション株式会社 Apparatus combining a TV receiver and a video tape recorder
US5539449A (en) 1993-05-03 1996-07-23 At&T Corp. Integrated television services system
TW318315B (en) 1993-05-03 1997-10-21 At & T Corp
US5524195A (en) 1993-05-24 1996-06-04 Sun Microsystems, Inc. Graphical user interface for interactive television with an animated agent
US6239794B1 (en) 1994-08-31 2001-05-29 E Guide, Inc. Method and system for simultaneously displaying a television program and information about the program
US5485221A (en) 1993-06-07 1996-01-16 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Subscription television system and terminal for enabling simultaneous display of multiple services
US5917405A (en) 1993-06-08 1999-06-29 Joao; Raymond Anthony Control apparatus and methods for vehicles
JP3590641B2 (en) 1993-06-16 2004-11-17 ソニー株式会社 Camera-integrated recording device and recording device
US5594509A (en) 1993-06-22 1997-01-14 Apple Computer, Inc. Method and apparatus for audio-visual interface for the display of multiple levels of information on a display
US5621456A (en) 1993-06-22 1997-04-15 Apple Computer, Inc. Methods and apparatus for audio-visual interface for the display of multiple program categories
US5583560A (en) 1993-06-22 1996-12-10 Apple Computer, Inc. Method and apparatus for audio-visual interface for the selective display of listing information on a display
US5467264A (en) 1993-06-30 1995-11-14 Microsoft Method and system for selectively interdependent control of devices
US6463206B1 (en) 1993-07-29 2002-10-08 Gemstar Development Corporation Television and video cassette recorder system with an electronic program guide
US5382983A (en) 1993-07-29 1995-01-17 Kwoh; Daniel S. Apparatus and method for total parental control of television use
US5481296A (en) 1993-08-06 1996-01-02 International Business Machines Corporation Apparatus and method for selectively viewing video information
DE69425198T2 (en) 1993-08-13 2001-03-15 Toshiba Kawasaki Kk Two way cable television system
US5761372A (en) 1993-09-03 1998-06-02 Sony Corporation Recording reservation central control system for one or more VTR's
US5585866A (en) 1993-09-09 1996-12-17 Miller; Larry Electronic television program guide schedule system and method including virtual channels
US5781246A (en) 1993-09-09 1998-07-14 Alten; Jerry Electronic television program guide schedule system and method
US5822123A (en) 1993-09-09 1998-10-13 Davis; Bruce Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with pop-up hints
US5589892A (en) 1993-09-09 1996-12-31 Knee; Robert A. Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with data feed access
US6275268B1 (en) 1993-09-09 2001-08-14 United Video Properties, Inc. Electronic television program guide with remote product ordering
US6418556B1 (en) 1993-09-09 2002-07-09 United Video Properties, Inc. Electronic television program guide schedule system and method
FR2709905B1 (en) 1993-09-09 1995-10-13 Alcatel Business Systems Interactive control system for multiservice installation with a television program distribution server and a telephone exchange.
US5410344A (en) 1993-09-22 1995-04-25 Arrowsmith Technologies, Inc. Apparatus and method of selecting video programs based on viewers' preferences
US6279029B1 (en) 1993-10-12 2001-08-21 Intel Corporation Server/client architecture and method for multicasting on a computer network
US5734786A (en) 1993-10-20 1998-03-31 E Guide, Inc. Apparatus and methods for deriving a television guide from audio signals
ES2117288T3 (en) 1993-10-27 1998-08-01 Princeton Video Image Inc REMOTE CONTROL OF AN ELECTRONIC IMAGE PRESENTATION.
US5465113A (en) 1993-12-13 1995-11-07 At&T Corp. Programmable channel regulating cable television controller
JP3237362B2 (en) 1993-12-27 2001-12-10 松下電器産業株式会社 Program guide display device
US5563665A (en) 1993-12-29 1996-10-08 Chang; Darwin Video signal controller for use with a multi-sync monitor for displaying a plurality of different types of video signals
GB9400101D0 (en) 1994-01-05 1994-03-02 Thomson Consumer Electronics Consumer interface for a satellite television system
US5689666A (en) 1994-01-27 1997-11-18 3M Method for handling obscured items on computer displays
JP3328046B2 (en) 1994-02-16 2002-09-24 富士通株式会社 Information receiving system
US5579239A (en) 1994-02-16 1996-11-26 Freeman; Mitchael C. Remote video transmission system
DE4405020C1 (en) 1994-02-17 1995-01-26 Inst Rundfunktechnik Gmbh Method for receiving data transmitted in a television signal
US5410367A (en) 1994-02-23 1995-04-25 Aqi Ltd. Television program scheduler for providing an indication to a user that a television program is about to start
JP3500741B2 (en) 1994-03-01 2004-02-23 ソニー株式会社 Channel selection method and channel selection device for television broadcasting
JP3460740B2 (en) 1994-03-04 2003-10-27 ソニー株式会社 Two-way broadcasting system and its receiving device
DE4407701A1 (en) 1994-03-08 1995-09-14 Thomson Brandt Gmbh Data reproduction method using video-recorder with inbuilt time switch
US5570295A (en) 1994-03-18 1996-10-29 Lucent Technologies Inc. System and method of capturing encoded data transmitted over a communications network in a video system
EP0952735B2 (en) 1994-04-08 2007-12-26 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive scroll program guide
US5537141A (en) 1994-04-15 1996-07-16 Actv, Inc. Distance learning system providing individual television participation, audio responses and memory for every student
US5485219A (en) 1994-04-18 1996-01-16 Depromax Limited Electric service to record transmissions without recording commercials
US5539822A (en) 1994-04-19 1996-07-23 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. System and method for subscriber interactivity in a television system
US5724567A (en) 1994-04-25 1998-03-03 Apple Computer, Inc. System for directing relevance-ranked data objects to computer users
US5502504A (en) 1994-04-28 1996-03-26 Prevue Networks, Inc. Video mix program guide
US5812205A (en) 1994-05-04 1998-09-22 Starsight Telecast Incorporated Automatic time set in a television system
US5550575A (en) 1994-05-04 1996-08-27 West; Brett Viewer discretion television program control system
KR100348915B1 (en) 1994-05-12 2002-12-26 마이크로소프트 코포레이션 TV program selection method and system
US5523796A (en) 1994-05-20 1996-06-04 Prevue Networks, Inc. Video clip program guide
US5635978A (en) 1994-05-20 1997-06-03 News America Publications, Inc. Electronic television program guide channel system and method
US5559548A (en) 1994-05-20 1996-09-24 Davis; Bruce System and method for generating an information display schedule for an electronic program guide
US6396546B1 (en) 1994-05-20 2002-05-28 United Video Properties, Inc. Electronic television program guide schedule system and method
US5594490A (en) 1994-05-23 1997-01-14 Cable Services Technologies, Inc. System for distributing video/audio files from central location to a plurality of cable headends
US5635979A (en) 1994-05-27 1997-06-03 Bell Atlantic Dynamically programmable digital entertainment terminal using downloaded software to control broadband data operations
US5818511A (en) 1994-05-27 1998-10-06 Bell Atlantic Full service network
US5666293A (en) 1994-05-27 1997-09-09 Bell Atlantic Network Services, Inc. Downloading operating system software through a broadcast channel
US5515511A (en) 1994-06-06 1996-05-07 International Business Machines Corporation Hybrid digital/analog multimedia hub with dynamically allocated/released channels for video processing and distribution
US5583561A (en) 1994-06-07 1996-12-10 Unisys Corporation Multi-cast digital video data server using synchronization groups
US5553123A (en) * 1994-06-09 1996-09-03 Gemstar Development Corporation Method for downloading setup data via telephone to an appliance controller
US5459522A (en) 1994-06-10 1995-10-17 Zenith Electronics Corporation Method for acquisition and display of an on-screen program guide
DE69522504T2 (en) 1994-06-14 2002-05-08 Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd Video signal recording device and video signal recording and display device
US5624265A (en) 1994-07-01 1997-04-29 Tv Interactive Data Corporation Printed publication remote contol for accessing interactive media
US5572442A (en) 1994-07-21 1996-11-05 Information Highway Media Corporation System for distributing subscription and on-demand audio programming
US5528304A (en) 1994-07-22 1996-06-18 Zenith Electronics Corp. Picture-in-picture feedback for channel related features
EP0700205A3 (en) 1994-08-31 1997-04-02 Toshiba Kk Multimedia television receiver and method of booting the same
DE4431438C2 (en) 1994-09-03 1999-11-11 Nokia Deutschland Gmbh Device for the communication of a television receiver with a telephone set
US5515098A (en) 1994-09-08 1996-05-07 Carles; John B. System and method for selectively distributing commercial messages over a communications network
US5619249A (en) 1994-09-14 1997-04-08 Time Warner Entertainment Company, L.P. Telecasting service for providing video programs on demand with an interactive interface for facilitating viewer selection of video programs
US5742905A (en) 1994-09-19 1998-04-21 Bell Communications Research, Inc. Personal communications internetworking
US5632007A (en) 1994-09-23 1997-05-20 Actv, Inc. Interactive system and method for offering expert based interactive programs
US5594661A (en) 1994-09-23 1997-01-14 U. S. West Marketing Resources Group, Inc. Method for interfacing with a multi-media information system
US5781734A (en) 1994-09-28 1998-07-14 Nec Corporation System for providing audio and video services on demand
JP3644455B2 (en) 1994-09-29 2005-04-27 ソニー株式会社 Program information broadcasting system, program information display method and receiving apparatus
US5541662A (en) 1994-09-30 1996-07-30 Intel Corporation Content programmer control of video and data display using associated data
EP0789968B1 (en) 1994-10-27 2003-03-05 Index Systems, Inc. System and method for downloading recorder programming data in a video signal
US5576755A (en) 1994-10-28 1996-11-19 Davis; Bruce System and method for verification of electronic television program guide data
US5534911A (en) 1994-11-02 1996-07-09 Levitan; Gutman Virtual personal channel in a television system
US5717923A (en) 1994-11-03 1998-02-10 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for dynamically customizing electronic information to individual end users
DE4440419A1 (en) 1994-11-07 1996-05-09 Tilman Issing Automated information selection system for radio and television service
DE4440174C2 (en) 1994-11-10 1999-12-16 Elektronik Gmbh P Lab TV control
US5671411A (en) 1994-11-10 1997-09-23 Intel Corporation Method of searching an audio/visual programming database using selected criterion having implicit logical operation
US5867205A (en) 1994-11-14 1999-02-02 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for controlling video/audio and channel selection for a communication signal based on textual information indicative of channel contents of a signal
WO1996017306A2 (en) 1994-11-21 1996-06-06 Oracle Corporation Media server
US5602582A (en) 1994-11-22 1997-02-11 U S West Marketing Resources Group, Inc. Method and system for processing a request based on indexed digital video data
US6029195A (en) 1994-11-29 2000-02-22 Herz; Frederick S. M. System for customized electronic identification of desirable objects
US5629733A (en) 1994-11-29 1997-05-13 News America Publications, Inc. Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with display and search of program listings by title
US5623613A (en) 1994-11-29 1997-04-22 Microsoft Corporation System for displaying programming information
US6571279B1 (en) 1997-12-05 2003-05-27 Pinpoint Incorporated Location enhanced information delivery system
US6008803A (en) 1994-11-29 1999-12-28 Microsoft Corporation System for displaying programming information
US5617565A (en) 1994-11-29 1997-04-01 Hitachi America, Ltd. Broadcast interactive multimedia system
US5758257A (en) 1994-11-29 1998-05-26 Herz; Frederick System and method for scheduling broadcast of and access to video programs and other data using customer profiles
US5617526A (en) 1994-12-13 1997-04-01 Microsoft Corporation Operating system provided notification area for displaying visual notifications from application programs
US6005561A (en) 1994-12-14 1999-12-21 The 3Do Company Interactive information delivery system
US5625406A (en) 1994-12-21 1997-04-29 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Unified program guide interface
US5659367A (en) 1994-12-30 1997-08-19 Index Systems, Inc. Television on/off detector for use in a video cassette recorder
US5774859A (en) 1995-01-03 1998-06-30 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Information system having a speech interface
US5596373A (en) 1995-01-04 1997-01-21 Sony Corporation Method and apparatus for providing program oriented information in a multiple station broadcast system
US6163345A (en) 1995-01-04 2000-12-19 Sony Corportion Method and apparatus for providing station and programming information in a multiple station broadcast system
CA2166434A1 (en) 1995-01-04 1996-07-05 Fujio Noguchi Method and apparatus for providing programming information
US5572438A (en) 1995-01-05 1996-11-05 Teco Energy Management Services Engery management and building automation system
US5548345A (en) 1995-01-05 1996-08-20 Protelcon, Inc. Video viewing censoring supervision system
US6233734B1 (en) 1995-01-05 2001-05-15 Videoguide, Inc. System and method for controlling the broadcast and recording of television programs and for distributing information to be displayed on a television screen
US5583563A (en) 1995-01-12 1996-12-10 Us West Marketing Resources Group, Inc. Method and system for delivering an application in an interactive television network
US5752159A (en) 1995-01-13 1998-05-12 U S West Technologies, Inc. Method for automatically collecting and delivering application event data in an interactive network
US5706191A (en) 1995-01-19 1998-01-06 Gas Research Institute Appliance interface apparatus and automated residence management system
EP0723369A1 (en) 1995-01-23 1996-07-24 NTEX datacommunications bv Access method retrieving Internet information through Teletext/Videotex and the reverse
DE19502922A1 (en) 1995-01-31 1996-08-01 Fridley Techn Ltd Reproduction of additional information in TV signal
JP4001942B2 (en) 1995-02-06 2007-10-31 ソニー株式会社 Receiving apparatus and receiving method, and broadcasting system and broadcasting method
FR2730372A1 (en) 1995-02-08 1996-08-09 Philips Electronics Nv PAY TELEVISION METHOD
US5619247A (en) 1995-02-24 1997-04-08 Smart Vcr Limited Partnership Stored program pay-per-play
US5559550A (en) 1995-03-01 1996-09-24 Gemstar Development Corporation Apparatus and methods for synchronizing a clock to a network clock
US5654886A (en) 1995-03-14 1997-08-05 Wsi Corporation Multimedia outdoor information system
US5696905A (en) 1995-03-20 1997-12-09 International Business Machines Corporation System and method for providing merchant information and establishing links to merchants while presenting a movie
US5517257A (en) 1995-03-28 1996-05-14 Microsoft Corporation Video control user interface for interactive television systems and method for controlling display of a video movie
JP3215781B2 (en) 1995-03-28 2001-10-09 東芝テック株式会社 Coin storage and dispensing device
US5710884A (en) 1995-03-29 1998-01-20 Intel Corporation System for automatically updating personal profile server with updates to additional user information gathered from monitoring user's electronic consuming habits generated on computer during use
JP3372004B2 (en) 1995-03-31 2003-01-27 ソニー株式会社 Electronic program guide device, electronic program guide system, and electronic program guide method
US5557338A (en) 1995-04-05 1996-09-17 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Television receiver using received channel guide information and a secondary video signal processor for displaying secondary channel information
US5880768A (en) 1995-04-06 1999-03-09 Prevue Networks, Inc. Interactive program guide systems and processes
US5550576A (en) 1995-04-17 1996-08-27 Starsight Telecast Incorporated Method and apparatus for merging television program schedule information received from multiple television schedule information sources
US8539528B2 (en) 1995-04-17 2013-09-17 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Multi-source switching in a television system
US5828945A (en) 1995-04-17 1998-10-27 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Merging multi-source information in a television system
US6321208B1 (en) 1995-04-19 2001-11-20 Brightstreet.Com, Inc. Method and system for electronic distribution of product redemption coupons
IT1285179B1 (en) 1995-04-24 1998-06-03 Motorola Inc PROCEDURE AND APPARATUS FOR THE CONTROL OF SENSITIVE ADDRESSING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS.
US5818438A (en) 1995-04-25 1998-10-06 Bellsouth Corporation System and method for providing television services
US5666645A (en) 1995-04-26 1997-09-09 News America Publications, Inc. Data management and distribution system and method for an electronic television program guide
JPH08307942A (en) 1995-05-02 1996-11-22 Sony Corp Cordless telephone set, electronic apparatus and program selecting method
US5630119A (en) 1995-05-05 1997-05-13 Microsoft Corporation System and method for displaying program listings in an interactive electronic program guide
US5752160A (en) 1995-05-05 1998-05-12 Dunn; Matthew W. Interactive entertainment network system and method with analog video startup loop for video-on-demand
US5699107A (en) 1995-05-05 1997-12-16 Microsoft Corporation Program reminder system
US5677708A (en) 1995-05-05 1997-10-14 Microsoft Corporation System for displaying a list on a display screen
US5805763A (en) 1995-05-05 1998-09-08 Microsoft Corporation System and method for automatically recording programs in an interactive viewing system
US5907323A (en) 1995-05-05 1999-05-25 Microsoft Corporation Interactive program summary panel
US5654748A (en) 1995-05-05 1997-08-05 Microsoft Corporation Interactive program identification system
US5585838A (en) 1995-05-05 1996-12-17 Microsoft Corporation Program time guide
US5914746A (en) 1995-05-05 1999-06-22 Microsoft Corporation Virtual channels in subscriber interface units
US5861906A (en) 1995-05-05 1999-01-19 Microsoft Corporation Interactive entertainment network system and method for customizing operation thereof according to viewer preferences
US5914712A (en) 1995-05-08 1999-06-22 Video Jukebox Network, Inc. Interactive video system
US5659366A (en) 1995-05-10 1997-08-19 Matsushita Electric Corporation Of America Notification system for television receivers
DE19519402A1 (en) 1995-05-26 1996-11-28 Philips Patentverwaltung Communication system
US5606374A (en) 1995-05-31 1997-02-25 International Business Machines Corporation Video receiver display of menu overlaying video
GB2301930B (en) 1995-06-06 1999-06-30 Sony Corp Information data reproducing system reproducing apparatus reproducing method data forming apparatus and data record medium
US5696824A (en) 1995-06-07 1997-12-09 E-Comm Incorporated System for detecting unauthorized account access
US5652613A (en) 1995-06-07 1997-07-29 Lazarus; David Beryl Intelligent electronic program guide memory management system and method
US5793964A (en) 1995-06-07 1998-08-11 International Business Machines Corporation Web browser system
US5760821A (en) 1995-06-07 1998-06-02 News America Publications, Inc. Electronic program guide schedule localization system and method
US6769128B1 (en) 1995-06-07 2004-07-27 United Video Properties, Inc. Electronic television program guide schedule system and method with data feed access
US5751282A (en) 1995-06-13 1998-05-12 Microsoft Corporation System and method for calling video on demand using an electronic programming guide
US5818441A (en) 1995-06-15 1998-10-06 Intel Corporation System and method for simulating two-way connectivity for one way data streams
US5873660A (en) 1995-06-19 1999-02-23 Microsoft Corporation Morphological search and replace
US5652615A (en) 1995-06-30 1997-07-29 Digital Equipment Corporation Precision broadcast of composite programs including secondary program content such as advertisements
FR2736783B1 (en) 1995-07-13 1997-08-14 Thomson Multimedia Sa METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECORDING AND PLAYBACK WITH LARGE CAPACITY RECORDING MEDIUM
US5650831A (en) 1995-07-17 1997-07-22 Gateway 2000, Inc. Adjustable power remote control drive
US6359636B1 (en) 1995-07-17 2002-03-19 Gateway, Inc. Graphical user interface for control of a home entertainment system
US5867223A (en) 1995-07-17 1999-02-02 Gateway 2000, Inc. System for assigning multichannel audio signals to independent wireless audio output devices
US5995155A (en) 1995-07-17 1999-11-30 Gateway 2000, Inc. Database navigation system for a home entertainment system
US5675390A (en) 1995-07-17 1997-10-07 Gateway 2000, Inc. Home entertainment system combining complex processor capability with a high quality display
US5748191A (en) 1995-07-31 1998-05-05 Microsoft Corporation Method and system for creating voice commands using an automatically maintained log interactions performed by a user
US5801753A (en) 1995-08-11 1998-09-01 General Instrument Corporation Of Delaware Method and apparatus for providing an interactive guide to events available on an information network
US5758258A (en) 1995-08-21 1998-05-26 Microsoft Corporation Selective delivery of programming for interactive televideo system
DE19531121A1 (en) 1995-08-24 1997-02-27 Olaf Bostroem Technical service system with remotely updated system software
US5758259A (en) 1995-08-31 1998-05-26 Microsoft Corporation Automated selective programming guide
JPH0974534A (en) 1995-09-05 1997-03-18 Sony Corp Magnetic tape recording and reproducing device for video signal
US5655214A (en) 1995-09-07 1997-08-05 Amulet Electronics Limited Television broadcast distribution systems comprising base station with a tuner and computer outstations
US5682206A (en) 1995-09-25 1997-10-28 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Consumer interface for programming device
US5734893A (en) 1995-09-28 1998-03-31 Ibm Corporation Progressive content-based retrieval of image and video with adaptive and iterative refinement
US5694163A (en) 1995-09-28 1997-12-02 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for viewing of on-line information service chat data incorporated in a broadcast television program
JPH11512903A (en) 1995-09-29 1999-11-02 ボストン テクノロジー インク Multimedia architecture for interactive advertising
US6732369B1 (en) 1995-10-02 2004-05-04 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Systems and methods for contextually linking television program information
EP2288150A3 (en) 1995-10-02 2013-05-15 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Systems and methods for providing television schedule information
US6388714B1 (en) 1995-10-02 2002-05-14 Starsight Telecast Inc Interactive computer system for providing television schedule information
US6323911B1 (en) 1995-10-02 2001-11-27 Starsight Telecast, Inc. System and method for using television schedule information
US8850477B2 (en) 1995-10-02 2014-09-30 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Systems and methods for linking television viewers with advertisers and broadcasters
US6049823A (en) 1995-10-04 2000-04-11 Hwang; Ivan Chung-Shung Multi server, interactive, video-on-demand television system utilizing a direct-access-on-demand workgroup
US5864704A (en) * 1995-10-10 1999-01-26 Chromatic Research, Inc. Multimedia processor using variable length instructions with opcode specification of source operand as result of prior instruction
US5929932A (en) 1995-10-24 1999-07-27 Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. Program guide display controller at user terminal of television broadcasting system
US5778182A (en) 1995-11-07 1998-07-07 At&T Corp. Usage management system
US5781226A (en) 1995-11-13 1998-07-14 General Instrument Corporation Of Delaware Network virtual memory for a cable television settop terminal
US5724103A (en) 1995-11-13 1998-03-03 Intel Corporation CD ROM information references delivered to a personal computer using the vertical blanking intervals associated data technology from a nabts compliant television broadcast program
US5802526A (en) 1995-11-15 1998-09-01 Microsoft Corporation System and method for graphically displaying and navigating through an interactive voice response menu
JP3081986B2 (en) 1995-11-16 2000-08-28 セイコーインスツルメンツ株式会社 Small printer
US6216264B1 (en) 1995-11-17 2001-04-10 Thomson Licensing S.A. Scheduler apparatus employing a gopher agent
US5867226A (en) 1995-11-17 1999-02-02 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Scheduler employing a predictive agent for use in a television receiver
US6157413A (en) 1995-11-20 2000-12-05 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive special events video signal navigation system
US5886732A (en) 1995-11-22 1999-03-23 Samsung Information Systems America Set-top electronics and network interface unit arrangement
US5819019A (en) 1995-12-01 1998-10-06 Silicon Graphics, Inc. System/method for recovering network resources in a distributed environment, via registered callbacks
US5722041A (en) 1995-12-05 1998-02-24 Altec Lansing Technologies, Inc. Hybrid home-entertainment system
US5802284A (en) 1995-12-13 1998-09-01 Silicon Graphics, Inc. System and method using cover bundles to provide immediate feedback to a user in an interactive television environment
US5835717A (en) 1995-12-13 1998-11-10 Silicon Graphics, Inc. System and method for saving state information in an interactive television system
US5805806A (en) 1995-12-18 1998-09-08 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for providing interactive networking between televisions and personal computers
JP4079462B2 (en) 1996-01-10 2008-04-23 ソニー株式会社 Program selection support device, program selection support method, broadcast reception device, broadcast reception method, broadcast transmission device, broadcast transmission method, broadcast transmission / reception device, and broadcast transmission / reception method
US5710605A (en) 1996-01-11 1998-01-20 Nelson; Rickey D. Remote control unit for controlling a television and videocassette recorder with a display for allowing a user to select between various programming schedules
US5822606A (en) 1996-01-11 1998-10-13 Morton; Steven G. DSP having a plurality of like processors controlled in parallel by an instruction word, and a control processor also controlled by the instruction word
US5790753A (en) 1996-01-22 1998-08-04 Digital Equipment Corporation System for downloading computer software programs
US6009465A (en) 1996-01-22 1999-12-28 Svi Systems, Inc. Entertainment and information systems and related management networks for a remote video delivery system
US5833468A (en) 1996-01-24 1998-11-10 Frederick R. Guy Remote learning system using a television signal and a network connection
US6507953B1 (en) 1996-02-02 2003-01-14 Thomson Licensing S.A. System and method for interfacing multiple electronic devices
US5761606A (en) 1996-02-08 1998-06-02 Wolzien; Thomas R. Media online services access via address embedded in video or audio program
US5754771A (en) 1996-02-12 1998-05-19 Sybase, Inc. Maximum receive capacity specifying query processing client/server system replying up to the capacity and sending the remainder upon subsequent request
US5635989A (en) 1996-02-13 1997-06-03 Hughes Electronics Method and apparatus for sorting and searching a television program guide
US5838314A (en) 1996-02-21 1998-11-17 Message Partners Digital video services system with optional interactive advertisement capabilities
CA2195260A1 (en) 1996-02-22 1997-08-22 Marc Andrew Levy Remote control of videocassette recorder operations over telephone lines
US6286142B1 (en) 1996-02-23 2001-09-04 Alcatel Usa, Inc. Method and system for communicating video signals to a plurality of television sets
CN1096796C (en) 1996-02-23 2002-12-18 E盖德公司 Two-way interactive television system
US5694176A (en) 1996-02-29 1997-12-02 Hughes Electronics Method and apparatus for generating television program guides with category selection overlay
JPH09237234A (en) 1996-02-29 1997-09-09 Toshiba Corp Television mail system
US5778181A (en) 1996-03-08 1998-07-07 Actv, Inc. Enhanced video programming system and method for incorporating and displaying retrieved integrated internet information segments
US5774664A (en) 1996-03-08 1998-06-30 Actv, Inc. Enhanced video programming system and method for incorporating and displaying retrieved integrated internet information segments
US5946386A (en) 1996-03-11 1999-08-31 Xantel Corporation Call management system with call control from user workstation computers
DE19610068C2 (en) 1996-03-14 1998-08-13 Siemens Ag Method for providing a cable system in the home
US5959592A (en) 1996-03-18 1999-09-28 Echostar Engineering Corporation "IF" bandstacked low noise block converter combined with diplexer
US6005631A (en) 1996-03-28 1999-12-21 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Methods and apparatus for organizing and searching an electronic programming guide
JPH09265113A (en) 1996-03-28 1997-10-07 Nec Corp Active matrix type liquid crystal display device and its production
US6240555B1 (en) 1996-03-29 2001-05-29 Microsoft Corporation Interactive entertainment system for presenting supplemental interactive content together with continuous video programs
US5884298A (en) 1996-03-29 1999-03-16 Cygnet Storage Solutions, Inc. Method for accessing and updating a library of optical discs
US5666498A (en) 1996-03-29 1997-09-09 International Business Machines Corporation Method, memory and apparatus for automatically resizing a window
US5787259A (en) 1996-03-29 1998-07-28 Microsoft Corporation Digital interconnects of a PC with consumer electronics devices
US6025837A (en) 1996-03-29 2000-02-15 Micrsoft Corporation Electronic program guide with hyperlinks to target resources
US8006260B2 (en) 1996-04-01 2011-08-23 Gemstar Development Corporation Apparatus and method for parental control using V-chip plus+ and master password
US5867799A (en) 1996-04-04 1999-02-02 Lang; Andrew K. Information system and method for filtering a massive flow of information entities to meet user information classification needs
US5657072A (en) 1996-04-10 1997-08-12 Microsoft Corporation Interactive entertainment network system and method for providing program listings during non-peak times
US5848396A (en) 1996-04-26 1998-12-08 Freedom Of Information, Inc. Method and apparatus for determining behavioral profile of a computer user
JP3911047B2 (en) 1996-04-30 2007-05-09 ソニー株式会社 Recording reservation control system and recording reservation control method
US5929849A (en) 1996-05-02 1999-07-27 Phoenix Technologies, Ltd. Integration of dynamic universal resource locators with television presentations
US5940073A (en) 1996-05-03 1999-08-17 Starsight Telecast Inc. Method and system for displaying other information in a TV program guide
US5793972A (en) 1996-05-03 1998-08-11 Westminster International Computers Inc. System and method providing an interactive response to direct mail by creating personalized web page based on URL provided on mail piece
KR100445679B1 (en) 1996-05-10 2004-12-04 소니 가부시끼 가이샤 The data broadcast receiving apparatus
US5790202A (en) 1996-05-15 1998-08-04 Echostar Communications Corporation Integration of off-air and satellite TV tuners in a direct broadcast system
US5768528A (en) 1996-05-24 1998-06-16 V-Cast, Inc. Client-server system for delivery of online information
JP3299547B2 (en) 1996-05-24 2002-07-08 株式会社日立製作所 Partial discharge detector for gas insulated equipment
JP3530308B2 (en) 1996-05-27 2004-05-24 富士通株式会社 Broadcast program transmission device and terminal device connected thereto
US5969748A (en) 1996-05-29 1999-10-19 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Television schedule system with access control
US6160988A (en) 1996-05-30 2000-12-12 Electronic Data Systems Corporation System and method for managing hardware to control transmission and reception of video broadcasts
US5923848A (en) 1996-05-31 1999-07-13 Microsoft Corporation System and method for resolving names in an electronic messaging environment
US6034689A (en) 1996-06-03 2000-03-07 Webtv Networks, Inc. Web browser allowing navigation between hypertext objects using remote control
TW357514B (en) 1996-06-04 1999-05-01 Ericsson Telefon Ab L M An access network over a dedicated medium
US5945988A (en) 1996-06-06 1999-08-31 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for automatically determining and dynamically updating user preferences in an entertainment system
US6151643A (en) 1996-06-07 2000-11-21 Networks Associates, Inc. Automatic updating of diverse software products on multiple client computer systems by downloading scanning application to client computer and generating software list on client computer
AU3294997A (en) 1996-06-13 1998-01-07 Starsight Telecast Incorporated Method and apparatus for searching a guide using program characteristics
US5801787A (en) 1996-06-14 1998-09-01 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Television schedule system and method of operation for multiple program occurrences
US6157411A (en) 1996-06-14 2000-12-05 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for compiling a repository of entertainment system data from multiple sources
US5883621A (en) 1996-06-21 1999-03-16 Sony Corporation Device control with topology map in a digital network
PT932398E (en) 1996-06-28 2006-09-29 Ortho Mcneil Pharm Inc USE OF THE SURFACE OR ITS DERIVATIVES FOR THE PRODUCTION OF A MEDICINAL PRODUCT FOR THE TREATMENT OF MANIAC-DEPRESSIVE BIPOLAR DISTURBLES
US5903816A (en) 1996-07-01 1999-05-11 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. Interactive television system and method for displaying web-like stills with hyperlinks
US5812930A (en) 1996-07-10 1998-09-22 International Business Machines Corp. Information handling systems with broadband and narrowband communication channels between repository and display systems
US6208384B1 (en) 1996-07-11 2001-03-27 Douglas G. Brown Methods and systems for providing information to a television using a personal computer
FR2752130B1 (en) 1996-07-31 1999-03-19 Thomson Multimedia Sa METHOD FOR SELECTING PROGRAMS, ESPECIALLY TELEVISION PROGRAMS AND GRAPHIC DEVICE AND INTERFACE IMPLEMENTING SAID METHOD
EP1296517A3 (en) 1996-08-02 2003-04-02 SANYO ELECTRIC Co., Ltd. Internet information displaying apparatus
US5790201A (en) 1996-08-08 1998-08-04 Antos; Jeffrey David Television and computer capability integration
US5955988A (en) 1996-08-14 1999-09-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Graphical user interface for establishing installation location for satellite based television system
WO1998010589A1 (en) 1996-09-03 1998-03-12 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Schedule system with enhanced recording capability
US6622304B1 (en) 1996-09-09 2003-09-16 Thomas W. Carhart Interface system for computing apparatus and communications stations
US5926624A (en) 1996-09-12 1999-07-20 Audible, Inc. Digital information library and delivery system with logic for generating files targeted to the playback device
US5832223A (en) 1996-09-13 1998-11-03 Motorola, Inc. System, method and device for automatic capture of internet access information in a broadcast signal for use by an internet access device
US6133910A (en) 1996-09-20 2000-10-17 Echostar Engineering Corp. Apparatus and method for integrating a plurality of video sources
US5852437A (en) 1996-09-24 1998-12-22 Ast Research, Inc. Wireless device for displaying integrated computer and television user interfaces
US6172677B1 (en) 1996-10-07 2001-01-09 Compaq Computer Corporation Integrated content guide for interactive selection of content and services on personal computer systems with multiple sources and multiple media presentation
DE69735516T2 (en) 1996-10-08 2006-10-26 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma Information receiving method and apparatus using this
JP4032402B2 (en) 1996-10-14 2008-01-16 ソニー株式会社 Information providing apparatus and method, display control apparatus and method, information providing system
US5907322A (en) 1996-10-16 1999-05-25 Catch Tv Acquisition Corp. Television event marking system
US20030005463A1 (en) 1999-09-30 2003-01-02 Douglas B Macrae Access to internet data through a television system
US5774666A (en) 1996-10-18 1998-06-30 Silicon Graphics, Inc. System and method for displaying uniform network resource locators embedded in time-based medium
US5982445A (en) 1996-10-21 1999-11-09 General Instrument Corporation Hypertext markup language protocol for television display and control
US5828839A (en) 1996-11-14 1998-10-27 Interactive Broadcaster Services Corp. Computer network chat room based on channel broadcast in real time
US5801747A (en) 1996-11-15 1998-09-01 Hyundai Electronics America Method and apparatus for creating a television viewer profile
JP3528480B2 (en) 1996-11-19 2004-05-17 ソニー株式会社 EPG device and control method thereof
JP3658896B2 (en) 1996-11-26 2005-06-08 ソニー株式会社 Information signal transmission system, playback device and display device
US5940572A (en) 1996-11-27 1999-08-17 Daewoo Electronics Co. Ltd. Integrated television and video cassette recorder system
US6139177A (en) 1996-12-03 2000-10-31 Hewlett Packard Company Device access and control using embedded web access functionality
US6263507B1 (en) 1996-12-05 2001-07-17 Interval Research Corporation Browser for use in navigating a body of information, with particular application to browsing information represented by audiovisual data
EP0945003B1 (en) 1996-12-10 2003-08-06 United Video Properties, Inc. Internet television program guide system
CA2764753C (en) 1996-12-10 2015-08-04 United Video Properties, Inc. Internet television program guide system
US6184877B1 (en) 1996-12-11 2001-02-06 International Business Machines Corporation System and method for interactively accessing program information on a television
US6057890A (en) 1996-12-12 2000-05-02 Echostar Engineering Corp. User interface for television schedule system in which the future events are paged in time
US5771275A (en) 1996-12-17 1998-06-23 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson Use of ISDN to provide wireless office environment connection to the public land mobile network
US5982411A (en) 1996-12-18 1999-11-09 General Instrument Corporation Navigation among grouped television channels
US6177931B1 (en) 1996-12-19 2001-01-23 Index Systems, Inc. Systems and methods for displaying and recording control interface with television programs, video, advertising information and program scheduling information
US6687906B1 (en) 1996-12-19 2004-02-03 Index Systems, Inc. EPG with advertising inserts
US5889950A (en) 1996-12-20 1999-03-30 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for distribution of broadcast data
US5991799A (en) 1996-12-20 1999-11-23 Liberate Technologies Information retrieval system using an internet multiplexer to focus user selection
US6411696B1 (en) 1996-12-31 2002-06-25 Intel Corporation System for finding a user with a preferred communication mechanism
US6163316A (en) 1997-01-03 2000-12-19 Texas Instruments Incorporated Electronic programming system and method
US6510557B1 (en) 1997-01-03 2003-01-21 Texas Instruments Incorporated Apparatus for the integration of television signals and information from an information service provider
US6208335B1 (en) 1997-01-13 2001-03-27 Diva Systems Corporation Method and apparatus for providing a menu structure for an interactive information distribution system
US5819156A (en) 1997-01-14 1998-10-06 Compaq Computer Corp. PC/TV usage tracking and reporting device
US5844552A (en) 1997-01-23 1998-12-01 Zenith Electronics Corporation Communication of character data in a web television
US6020880A (en) 1997-02-05 2000-02-01 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for providing electronic program guide information from a single electronic program guide server
US6067561A (en) 1997-02-07 2000-05-23 Hughes Electronics Corporation Electronic mail notification system and method within a hybrid network that transmits notifications via a continuous, high-speed channel
US6098065A (en) 1997-02-13 2000-08-01 Nortel Networks Corporation Associative search engine
CA2229904C (en) 1997-02-19 2006-10-24 Next Level Communications In-home wireless
AU732339B2 (en) 1997-02-19 2001-04-12 Next Level Communications Inc. Video, data and telephony gateway
US5850218A (en) 1997-02-19 1998-12-15 Time Warner Entertainment Company L.P. Inter-active program guide with default selection control
US5818935A (en) 1997-03-10 1998-10-06 Maa; Chia-Yiu Internet enhanced video system
US5892767A (en) 1997-03-11 1999-04-06 Selsius Systems Inc. Systems and method for multicasting a video stream and communications network employing the same
US6035339A (en) 1997-03-13 2000-03-07 At&T Corporation Network information delivery system for delivering information based on end user terminal requirements
JPH10261251A (en) 1997-03-18 1998-09-29 Sony Corp Receiver, receiving method, transmitter, transmitting method, transmitter/receiver and transmitting/receiving method
US5796952A (en) 1997-03-21 1998-08-18 Dot Com Development, Inc. Method and apparatus for tracking client interaction with a network resource and creating client profiles and resource database
US6002450A (en) 1997-03-24 1999-12-14 Evolve Products, Inc. Two-way remote control with advertising display
US8769598B2 (en) 1997-03-24 2014-07-01 Logitech Europe S.A. Program guide on a remote control
US6130726A (en) 1997-03-24 2000-10-10 Evolve Products, Inc. Program guide on a remote control display
US6005565A (en) 1997-03-25 1999-12-21 Sony Corporation Integrated search of electronic program guide, internet and other information resources
GB2325537B8 (en) 1997-03-31 2000-01-31 Microsoft Corp Query-based electronic program guide
US6564383B1 (en) 1997-04-14 2003-05-13 International Business Machines Corporation Method and system for interactively capturing organizing and presenting information generated from television programs to viewers
US5805155A (en) 1997-04-15 1998-09-08 Time Warner Entertainment Co. L.P. Time Warner Cable Virtual assets in an interactive television cable system
CA2286776C (en) 1997-04-16 2004-07-06 Starsight Telecast Incorporated Multiple database, user-choice-compiled program and event guide
JP3491665B2 (en) 1997-04-16 2004-01-26 ソニー株式会社 Remote control device and remote control method
US6208799B1 (en) 1997-04-29 2001-03-27 Time Warner Entertainment Company L.P. VCR recording timeslot adjustment
US5937160A (en) 1997-05-01 1999-08-10 Reedy Creek Technologies, Inc. Systems, methods and computer program products for updating hypertext documents via electronic mail
US6292624B1 (en) 1997-05-13 2001-09-18 Sony Corporation System and method for selection/deselection of timer recording
US6009153A (en) 1997-05-23 1999-12-28 Lucent Technologies Inc. Electronic devices and programming methods therefor
US5956025A (en) 1997-06-09 1999-09-21 Philips Electronics North America Corporation Remote with 3D organized GUI for a home entertainment system
US20030040962A1 (en) 1997-06-12 2003-02-27 Lewis William H. System and data management and on-demand rental and purchase of digital data products
US6012086A (en) 1997-06-24 2000-01-04 Sony Corporation Internet event timer recording for video and/or audio
US5864823A (en) 1997-06-25 1999-01-26 Virtel Corporation Integrated virtual telecommunication system for E-commerce
ID24894A (en) 1997-06-25 2000-08-31 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Cs METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THREE-OTO DEVELOPMENTS A HOME NETWORK
US6317885B1 (en) 1997-06-26 2001-11-13 Microsoft Corporation Interactive entertainment and information system using television set-top box
US6389464B1 (en) 1997-06-27 2002-05-14 Cornet Technology, Inc. Device management system for managing standards-compliant and non-compliant network elements using standard management protocols and a universal site server which is configurable from remote locations via internet browser technology
US8073921B2 (en) 1997-07-01 2011-12-06 Advanced Technology Company, LLC Methods for remote monitoring and control of appliances over a computer network
US6057872A (en) 1997-07-09 2000-05-02 General Instrument Corporation Digital coupons for pay televisions
US5990885A (en) 1997-07-29 1999-11-23 Network Machines, Inc. Personalized services, including a personal presence, for customers based upon collected personal preferences
US6172674B1 (en) 1997-08-25 2001-01-09 Liberate Technologies Smart filtering
US6310886B1 (en) 1997-08-28 2001-10-30 Tivo, Inc. Method and apparatus implementing a multimedia digital network
US6018372A (en) 1997-09-04 2000-01-25 Liberate Technologies Electronic program guide with multiple day planner
US6141488A (en) 1997-09-05 2000-10-31 United Video Properties, Inc. Program guide system for recording television programs
EP0901261B1 (en) 1997-09-05 2013-01-09 Hitachi, Ltd. Transport protocol conversion method and protocol conversion equipment
US6188381B1 (en) 1997-09-08 2001-02-13 Sarnoff Corporation Modular parallel-pipelined vision system for real-time video processing
DE19740079B4 (en) 1997-09-12 2004-07-01 Ciburski, Guido Method for remote control of video recorders from the Internet
JP3601950B2 (en) 1997-09-16 2004-12-15 株式会社東芝 Communication device and network information presentation method
AU8913098A (en) 1997-09-18 1999-04-05 Prevue International, Inc. Electronic-mail reminder for an internet television program guide
JPH11167594A (en) 1997-09-30 1999-06-22 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Order information recording medium and order file production device for photograph service
US20020057892A1 (en) 1997-09-30 2002-05-16 Yoshizumi Mano Video recording device including the ability to concurrently record and playback
US6016141A (en) 1997-10-06 2000-01-18 United Video Properties, Inc. Interactive television program guide system with pay program package promotion
US6133847A (en) 1997-10-09 2000-10-17 At&T Corp. Configurable remote control device
US6327418B1 (en) 1997-10-10 2001-12-04 Tivo Inc. Method and apparatus implementing random access and time-based functions on a continuous stream of formatted digital data
TW392402B (en) 1997-10-22 2000-06-01 Hitachi Ltd Method for using audio and video machine and audio and video machine system
US6005597A (en) 1997-10-27 1999-12-21 Disney Enterprises, Inc. Method and apparatus for program selection
US5963264A (en) 1997-10-30 1999-10-05 Echostar Engineering Corporation Selecting a digital television program and the control of a non-attached recording device
US6298482B1 (en) 1997-11-12 2001-10-02 International Business Machines Corporation System for two-way digital multimedia broadcast and interactive services
US6236978B1 (en) 1997-11-14 2001-05-22 New York University System and method for dynamic profiling of users in one-to-one applications
US6212327B1 (en) 1997-11-24 2001-04-03 International Business Machines Corporation Controlling record/playback devices with a computer
US5973683A (en) 1997-11-24 1999-10-26 International Business Machines Corporation Dynamic regulation of television viewing content based on viewer profile and viewing history
IL122299A (en) 1997-11-25 2003-11-23 Broadcom Corp Video encoding device
US6335963B1 (en) 1997-12-01 2002-01-01 Nortel Networks Limited System and method for providing notification of a received electronic mail message
US6104334A (en) 1997-12-31 2000-08-15 Eremote, Inc. Portable internet-enabled controller and information browser for consumer devices
US5970473A (en) 1997-12-31 1999-10-19 At&T Corp. Video communication device providing in-home catalog services
US6097441A (en) 1997-12-31 2000-08-01 Eremote, Inc. System for dual-display interaction with integrated television and internet content
US6104705A (en) 1997-12-31 2000-08-15 U.S. Philips Corporation Group based control scheme for video compression
US6321318B1 (en) 1997-12-31 2001-11-20 Texas Instruments Incorporated User-configurable on-chip program memory system
US6008802A (en) 1998-01-05 1999-12-28 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for automatically performing a function based on the reception of information corresponding to broadcast data
US7152236B1 (en) 1998-01-05 2006-12-19 Gateway Inc. Integration of internet sources into an electronic program database list
US6704028B2 (en) 1998-01-05 2004-03-09 Gateway, Inc. System for using a channel and event overlay for invoking channel and event related functions
US6237049B1 (en) 1998-01-06 2001-05-22 Sony Corporation Of Japan Method and system for defining and discovering proxy functionality on a distributed audio video network
US6545722B1 (en) 1998-01-09 2003-04-08 Douglas G. Brown Methods and systems for providing television related services via a networked personal computer
US6061779A (en) 1998-01-16 2000-05-09 Analog Devices, Inc. Digital signal processor having data alignment buffer for performing unaligned data accesses
US6445398B1 (en) 1998-02-04 2002-09-03 Corporate Media Partners Method and system for providing user interface for electronic program guide
US6202211B1 (en) 1998-02-06 2001-03-13 Henry R. Williams, Jr. Method and apparatus for providing television signals to multiple viewing systems on a network
US7185355B1 (en) 1998-03-04 2007-02-27 United Video Properties, Inc. Program guide system with preference profiles
US6064980A (en) 1998-03-17 2000-05-16 Amazon.Com, Inc. System and methods for collaborative recommendations
US6788882B1 (en) 1998-04-17 2004-09-07 Timesurf, L.L.C. Systems and methods for storing a plurality of video streams on re-writable random-access media and time-and channel- based retrieval thereof
US20040194138A1 (en) 1998-04-30 2004-09-30 Prevue Networks, Inc. Program guide system with targeted advertisements based on function buttons and non-programming options
US6219839B1 (en) 1998-05-12 2001-04-17 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. On-screen electronic resources guide
US6040829A (en) 1998-05-13 2000-03-21 Croy; Clemens Personal navigator system
US7117518B1 (en) 1998-05-14 2006-10-03 Sony Corporation Information retrieval method and apparatus
SE521209C2 (en) 1998-06-05 2003-10-14 Ericsson Telefon Ab L M Device and method of use in a virtual environment
US20050204388A1 (en) 1998-06-11 2005-09-15 Knudson Edward B. Series reminders and series recording from an interactive television program guide
US6530083B1 (en) 1998-06-19 2003-03-04 Gateway, Inc System for personalized settings
JP2000013708A (en) 1998-06-26 2000-01-14 Hitachi Ltd Program selection aiding device
US6268849B1 (en) 1998-06-30 2001-07-31 United Video Properties, Inc. Internet television program guide system with embedded real-time data
US20010026533A1 (en) 1998-07-06 2001-10-04 Andreas Schwager Method to perform a scheduled action of network devices
US7013339B2 (en) 1998-07-06 2006-03-14 Sony Corporation Method to control a network device in a network comprising several devices
CN1867068A (en) 1998-07-14 2006-11-22 联合视频制品公司 Client-server based interactive television program guide system with remote server recording
ES2188203T3 (en) 1998-07-17 2003-06-16 United Video Properties Inc GUIDE SYSTEM OF INTERACTIVE TELEVISION PROGRAMS THAT HAVE MULTIPLE DEVICES IN A PARTICULAR ADDRESS.
AR020608A1 (en) 1998-07-17 2002-05-22 United Video Properties Inc A METHOD AND A PROVISION TO SUPPLY A USER REMOTE ACCESS TO AN INTERACTIVE PROGRAMMING GUIDE BY A REMOTE ACCESS LINK
MX357059B (en) 1998-07-17 2018-06-22 Rovi Guides Inc Interactive television program guide with remote access.
US6505348B1 (en) 1998-07-29 2003-01-07 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Multiple interactive electronic program guide system and methods
US6233389B1 (en) 1998-07-30 2001-05-15 Tivo, Inc. Multimedia time warping system
US6324338B1 (en) 1998-08-07 2001-11-27 Replaytv, Inc. Video data recorder with integrated channel guides
US6898762B2 (en) 1998-08-21 2005-05-24 United Video Properties, Inc. Client-server electronic program guide
US6434524B1 (en) 1998-09-09 2002-08-13 One Voice Technologies, Inc. Object interactive user interface using speech recognition and natural language processing
US6701523B1 (en) 1998-09-16 2004-03-02 Index Systems, Inc. V-Chip plus+in-guide user interface apparatus and method for programmable blocking of television and other viewable programming, such as for parental control of a television receiver
US6437836B1 (en) 1998-09-21 2002-08-20 Navispace, Inc. Extended functionally remote control system and method therefore
US6675385B1 (en) 1998-10-21 2004-01-06 Liberate Technologies HTML electronic program guide for an MPEG digital TV system
US7058635B1 (en) 1998-10-30 2006-06-06 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for searching through an electronic programming guide
US6317881B1 (en) 1998-11-04 2001-11-13 Intel Corporation Method and apparatus for collecting and providing viewer feedback to a broadcast
US7165098B1 (en) 1998-11-10 2007-01-16 United Video Properties, Inc. On-line schedule system with personalization features
US6262772B1 (en) 1998-11-23 2001-07-17 Philips Electronics North America Corporation Method and apparatus for preventing display screen burn-in
US6865746B1 (en) 1998-12-03 2005-03-08 United Video Properties, Inc. Electronic program guide with related-program search feature
US7260823B2 (en) 2001-01-11 2007-08-21 Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. Profiling and identification of television viewers
JP2000184320A (en) 1998-12-11 2000-06-30 Nec Corp Recording and reproducing device and display device for electronic program guide
US20030131356A1 (en) 1998-12-21 2003-07-10 Andrew M. Proehl Method and apparatus for notification on a broadcast device
US6169543B1 (en) 1998-12-28 2001-01-02 Thomson Licensing S.A. System and method for customizing program guide information to include reminder item or local identifier
US6564005B1 (en) 1999-01-28 2003-05-13 International Business Machines Corporation Multi-user video hard disk recorder
US6611654B1 (en) 1999-04-01 2003-08-26 Koninklijke Philips Electronics Nv Time- and location-driven personalized TV
US6486892B1 (en) 1999-04-07 2002-11-26 Joseph L. Stern System and method for accessing, manipulating and viewing internet and non-internet related information and for controlling networked devices
US6721954B1 (en) 1999-06-23 2004-04-13 Gateway, Inc. Personal preferred viewing using electronic program guide
US6326982B1 (en) 1999-06-24 2001-12-04 Enreach Technology, Inc. Method and apparatus for automatically accessing web pages based on television programming information
US6192340B1 (en) 1999-10-19 2001-02-20 Max Abecassis Integration of music from a personal library with real-time information
US6727914B1 (en) 1999-12-17 2004-04-27 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Method and apparatus for recommending television programming using decision trees
US6754904B1 (en) 1999-12-30 2004-06-22 America Online, Inc. Informing network users of television programming viewed by other network users
US6934964B1 (en) 2000-02-08 2005-08-23 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Electronic program guide viewing history generator method and system
US20020040475A1 (en) * 2000-03-23 2002-04-04 Adrian Yap DVR system
US6670971B1 (en) 2000-05-11 2003-12-30 Onder Uzel Internet television system and method with user selectable genres and schedule
JP3643759B2 (en) 2000-09-01 2005-04-27 三洋電機株式会社 Deflection yoke
US6728642B2 (en) 2001-03-29 2004-04-27 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Method of non-linear analysis of biological sequence data
US6947935B1 (en) 2001-04-04 2005-09-20 Microsoft Corporation Training, inference and user interface for guiding the caching of media content on local stores
US20030084461A1 (en) 2001-10-25 2003-05-01 Khoi Hoang Method and apparatus for transmitting non-VOD services
US20020174424A1 (en) 2001-05-21 2002-11-21 Chang Matthew S. Apparatus and method for providing an indication of program(s) and/or activities
US20020194596A1 (en) 2001-06-18 2002-12-19 Srivastava Gopal K. Control of multiple AV-devices by a single master controller using infrared transmitted commands and bus transmitted commands
US7281261B2 (en) 2001-06-29 2007-10-09 Microsoft Corporation Remotely accessing and programming a set top box
US6760667B1 (en) 2001-09-14 2004-07-06 Emerald Geoscience Research Corporation Method for generating P-S and S-S seismic data and attributes from P-P seismic data
TWI285031B (en) 2001-09-28 2007-08-01 Interdigital Tech Corp Automatic frequency correction method and apparatus for time division duplex modes of 3G wireless communications
US20030093329A1 (en) 2001-11-13 2003-05-15 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Method and apparatus for recommending items of interest based on preferences of a selected third party
US6744967B2 (en) 2001-12-20 2004-06-01 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Program position user interface for personal video recording time shift buffer
US7084780B2 (en) 2002-02-05 2006-08-01 Nvidia Corporation Remote control device for use with a personal computer (PC) and multiple A/V devices and method of use
US6927806B2 (en) 2002-02-21 2005-08-09 Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. Systems, methods and apparatuses for minimizing subscriber-perceived digital video channel tuning delay
US7774816B2 (en) 2002-04-23 2010-08-10 Rovi Technologies Corporation Conflict manager for a video recorder
US9172915B2 (en) 2004-08-04 2015-10-27 Dizpersion Corporation Method of operating a channel recommendation system
TWI239512B (en) 2002-07-24 2005-09-11 Mediatek Inc ADIP demodulation method and apparatus
US20040098744A1 (en) 2002-11-18 2004-05-20 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Creation of a stereotypical profile via image based clustering
KR100577360B1 (en) 2003-09-09 2006-05-10 삼성전자주식회사 Recommended program sharing device using digital set top box and recommended program sharing method thereof
JP4124115B2 (en) 2003-12-02 2008-07-23 ソニー株式会社 Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and computer program
US7792920B2 (en) 2004-04-30 2010-09-07 Vulcan Inc. Network-accessible control of one or more media devices
JP3978197B2 (en) 2004-05-31 2007-09-19 株式会社日立製作所 Recorder with dubbing function
US20060136966A1 (en) 2004-12-22 2006-06-22 Folk Robert H Ii Digital video recorder for recording missed program episodes and for resolving scheduling conflicts between programs to be recorded
US20070157242A1 (en) 2005-12-29 2007-07-05 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for managing content
JP2008026822A (en) 2006-07-25 2008-02-07 Toshiba Corp Method for manufacturing photomask and method for manufacturing semiconductor device
US8087047B2 (en) 2007-04-20 2011-12-27 United Video Properties, Inc. Systems and methods for providing remote access to interactive media guidance applications
JP5260400B2 (en) 2009-04-24 2013-08-14 パナソニック株式会社 Multilayer board for producing multilayer printed wiring boards

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4787063A (en) * 1984-10-19 1988-11-22 Francis Muguet Acquisition and transmission system for a recorder and a computer center
US4751578A (en) * 1985-05-28 1988-06-14 David P. Gordon System for electronically controllably viewing on a television updateable television programming information
WO1990007844A1 (en) * 1988-12-23 1990-07-12 Yuen Henry C Apparatus and method for using encoded video recorder/player timer preprogramming information
US5016273A (en) * 1989-01-09 1991-05-14 At&E Corporation Dual communication mode video tape recorder
WO1991007050A1 (en) * 1989-10-30 1991-05-16 Insight Telecast, Inc. Cable television decoder to television accessory interfacing
US5134649A (en) * 1990-09-21 1992-07-28 Gutzmer Howard A Acoustic coupler for high-speed modem
GB2256546A (en) * 1991-05-02 1992-12-09 Thomson Consumer Electronics Deletion of entries from the channel mapping list of a videocassette recorder.

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
RESEARCH DISCLOSURE, no.329, September 1991, HAVANT GB page 657, XP226205 'Installation of consumer apparatus' *

Cited By (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8266655B2 (en) 1995-04-17 2012-09-11 Starsight Telecast, Incorporated Multi-source switching in a television system
US8640170B2 (en) 1995-04-17 2014-01-28 Starsight Telecast, Incorporated Multi-source switching in a television system displaying source indicators
US8539528B2 (en) 1995-04-17 2013-09-17 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Multi-source switching in a television system
US8424040B2 (en) 1995-04-17 2013-04-16 Starsight Telecast, Incorporated Multi-source switching in a television system
EP0840980A4 (en) * 1995-07-21 1998-06-17
EP0840980A1 (en) * 1995-07-21 1998-05-13 Starsight Telecast, Inc. Automatic time set in a television system
EP1133178A1 (en) * 1996-02-02 2001-09-12 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. System and method for interfacing multiple electronic devices
WO1998056178A1 (en) * 1997-06-06 1998-12-10 Thomson Consumer Electronics, Inc. System and method for recording pay tv programs
EP1331814B1 (en) * 1998-06-12 2016-03-09 Thomson Licensing Television program recording with user preference determination
US9860584B2 (en) 1998-06-16 2018-01-02 Rovi Guides, Inc. Interactive television program guide with simultaneous watch and record capabilities
US8286207B1 (en) 1998-07-13 2012-10-09 Thomson Licensing System for processing programs and system timing information derived from multiple broadcast sources
EP0975162A3 (en) * 1998-07-23 2001-12-05 Toshiba Video Products Japan Co., Ltd. Television program recording system
US6571053B1 (en) 1998-07-23 2003-05-27 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Television program recording system
EP0975162A2 (en) * 1998-07-23 2000-01-26 Toshiba Video Products Japan Co., Ltd. Television program recording system
FR2798805A1 (en) * 1999-09-16 2001-03-23 Sagem TELEVISION WITH CONFIGURABLE REMOTE CONTROL AND ADJUSTING METHOD THEREOF
EP1085752A1 (en) * 1999-09-16 2001-03-21 Sagem S.A. TV receiver with a configurable remote control and the associated setting method
EP1111915A1 (en) * 1999-12-23 2001-06-27 Two Way TV Limited Control system
US8495679B2 (en) 2000-06-30 2013-07-23 Thomson Licensing Method and apparatus for delivery of television programs and targeted de-coupled advertising
WO2002047379A1 (en) * 2000-12-07 2002-06-13 Right Hemisphere Pty Ltd Video recorder programming

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2009044771A (en) 2009-02-26
CN1071977C (en) 2001-09-26
CA2157600A1 (en) 1994-09-15
WO1994021081A3 (en) 1994-11-10
JP2010288303A (en) 2010-12-24
AU6352894A (en) 1994-09-26
US20100247071A1 (en) 2010-09-30
US8761584B2 (en) 2014-06-24
JP2007195135A (en) 2007-08-02
US20020090203A1 (en) 2002-07-11
JP4473197B2 (en) 2010-06-02
JP4472786B2 (en) 2010-06-02
JPH08507423A (en) 1996-08-06
US20080188213A1 (en) 2008-08-07
JP2011015411A (en) 2011-01-20
US20050105881A1 (en) 2005-05-19
JP2006042380A (en) 2006-02-09
EP0688488A1 (en) 1995-12-27
CN1122642A (en) 1996-05-15
US20100247072A1 (en) 2010-09-30
US6760537B2 (en) 2004-07-06
JP2011015412A (en) 2011-01-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6760537B2 (en) Apparatus and method for television program scheduling
US5553123A (en) Method for downloading setup data via telephone to an appliance controller
EP0701759B1 (en) System and method for automatically recording television programs in television systems with tuners external to video recorders
US6430358B1 (en) Universal remote including apparatus using compressed codes for video recorder control
US6430359B1 (en) Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling
EP0632949B1 (en) Apparatus and method using compressed codes for television program record scheduling
US5475382A (en) Remote control mounting stand
US6049652A (en) Apparatus and method using compressed codes for recorder preprogramming
WO1994016523A1 (en) Universal remote controller using compressed codes
EP0619058B1 (en) Apparatus and method using compressed codes for scheduling broadcast information recording
EP0938232A2 (en) Television program record scheduling using compressed codes
CA2134344C (en) Television program record scheduling using compressed codes

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 94192018.6

Country of ref document: CN

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AT AU BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CZ DE DK ES FI GB HU JP KP KR KZ LK LU MG MN MW NL NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SK UA VN

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AT BE CH DE DK ES FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN ML MR NE SN TD TG

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AT AU BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CZ DE DK ES FI GB HU JP KP KR KZ LK LU MG MN MW NL NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SK UA VN

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A3

Designated state(s): AT BE CH DE DK ES FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1994910749

Country of ref document: EP

Ref document number: 2157600

Country of ref document: CA

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1994910749

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1994910749

Country of ref document: EP